FIELD INSTRUCTIONS
FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF
COASTAL ALASKA
2010
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
RESOURCE MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT PROGRAM
PACIFIC NORTHWEST RESEARCH STATION
USDA FOREST SERVICE
THIS MANUAL IS BASED ON:
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
NATIONAL CORE FIELD GUIDE
VOLUME I: FIELD DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURES FOR PHASE 2 PLOTS
VERSION 4.0
Cover image by Gretchen Bracher
I
pg.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Section 1.1 Organization of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Section 1.2 The Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Section 1.3 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Section 1.4 Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Section 1.5 Plot Design General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Subsection 1.5.1 Plot Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Subsection 1.5.2 Data are Collected on Plots at the Following Levels: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Section 1.6 Quality Assurance/Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Subsection 1.6.1 General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chapter 2 Locating the Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Section 2.1 Locating an Established Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Subsection 2.1.1
Subsection 2.1.2
Subsection 2.1.3
Subsection 2.1.4
Navigating with Photography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Navigating with GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Navigating with Reference Point (RP) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Reverse Reference Point (RP) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Section 2.2 Established Plot Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Subsection 2.2.1
Subsection 2.2.2
Subsection 2.2.3
Subsection 2.2.4
Subsection 2.2.5
Subsection 2.2.6
Difficulty Finding Established Plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Incorrectly Installed Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Incorrectly Installed Subplot or Microplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PC or Subplot Pin Missing or Moved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lost Subplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lost Plot (Replacement Plot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Section 2.3 Locating New Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Subsection 2.3.1 Locating Plots Using Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Subsection 2.3.2 Locating a New Plot with Reference Point (RP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Subsection 2.3.3 Installing a Plot with Target (TGT) Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Section 2.4 Circumstances Precluding Plot Establishment/Measurement . . . . .10
Chapter 3 Plot Layout and Referencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Section 3.1 Plot Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Section 3.2 Plot Establishment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Subsection 3.2.1 Plot Establishment Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Subsection 3.2.2 Plot Establishment Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Section 3.3 Monumenting and Referencing Plot Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Subsection 3.3.1 The Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Subsection 3.3.2 Witness Trees/Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Subsection 3.3.3 Exceptions to Monumenting Plot Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table of Contents
Subsection 3.1.1 Plot Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Subsection 3.1.2 Plot Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
pg.
II
Section 3.4 Monumenting and Referencing Subplots 2 Through 4 . . . . . . . . . . .14
Subsection 3.4.1 Locate and Monument Subplot Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Subsection 3.4.2 Establishing Subplots when Plot Center is Inaccessible. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Subsection 3.4.3 Locate and Monument the Microplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Section 3.5 Monumenting and Referencing Entirely Nonforest Plots . . . . . . . . .16
Subsection 3.5.1 Nonforest Plots on Chugach National Forest Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Subsection 3.5.2 Nonforest Plots Located on All Other Ownerships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter 4 Plot Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Section 4.1 Lost Plot/Replacement Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Subsection 4.1.1 Lost Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Subsection 4.1.2 Replacement Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Section 4.2 Plot Level Data Downloaded to the PDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Subsection 4.2.1 Plot Level Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Item 4.2.1.1 STATE (CORE 1.1) [STATECD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Item 4.2.1.2 COUNTY (CORE 1.2) [COUNTYCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Item 4.2.1.3 PLOT NUMBER (CORE 1.3) [PLOT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Item 4.2.1.4 CYCLE (PNW) [CYCLE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Item 4.2.1.5 SUBCYCLE (PNW) [SUBCYCLE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Item 4.2.1.6 PERIODIC PLOT NUMBER (PNW) [PERIODIC_PLOT_NBR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Item 4.2.1.7 FIELD GUIDE VERSION (CORE 1.9) [MANUAL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Item 4.2.1.8 PDR STARTING DATA RECORDER VERSION NUMBER (PNW) [PDR_START_VERSION] . 19
Item 4.2.1.9 PDR ENDING DATA RECORDER VERSION NUMBER (PNW) [PDR_END_VERSION] . . . . . 19
Item 4.2.1.10 DECLINATION (CORE OPTIONAL 1.11) [DECLINATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Item 4.2.1.11 INVASIVE PLANT SAMPLING STATUS (PNW) [SAMPLE_STATUS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Item 4.2.1.12 INVASIVE PLANT SPECIMEN COLLECTION RULE (PNW) [SPECIMEN_COLLECTION_RULE] 20
Item 4.2.1.13 YEAR OF PREVIOUS INVENTORY (PNW) [PREV_INV_YEAR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Item 4.2.1.14 MONTH OF PREVIOUS INVENTORY (PNW) [PREV_INV_MONTH_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Item 4.2.1.15 FIRE PLOT (PNW) [FIRE_PLOT_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Section 4.3 Plot Level Data Collected in the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Subsection 4.3.1 Crew Visit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Item 4.3.1.1 SAMPLE METHOD CODE (PNW) [DATA_SOURCE_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Item 4.3.1.2 QA STATUS (CORE 1.14) [QA_STATUS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Item 4.3.1.3 CREW TYPE (PNW) [CREW_TYPE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Item 4.3.1.4 CREW NUMBER (CORE 1.15) [CREWNBR1, CREWNBR2, CREWNBR3, CREWNBR4,
CREWNBR5]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Item 4.3.1.5 TRANSPORTATION TO PLOT (AFSL) [TRANSPORTATION_PLOT_CD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . 22
Subsection 4.3.2 Current Date of Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Item 4.3.2.1 YEAR (CORE 1.10.1) [MEASYEAR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Item 4.3.2.2 MONTH (CORE 1.10.2) [MEASMON] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Item 4.3.2.3 DAY (CORE 1.10.3) [MEASDAY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Subsection 4.3.3 Time Spent on Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table of Contents
Item 4.3.3.1 TRAVEL TIME TO PLOT (PNW) [TIME_TO_PLOT_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Item 4.3.3.2 MEASUREMENT TIME ON PLOT (PNW) [TIME_ON_PLOT_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Item 4.3.3.3 TRAVEL TIME FROM PLOT (PNW) [TIME_FROM_PLOT_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Subsection 4.3.4 Plot Level Fundamentals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Item 4.3.4.1 PLOT STATUS (CORE 1.4) [PLOT_STATUS_CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Item 4.3.4.2 PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (CORE 1.5) [PLOT_NONSAMPLE_REASN_CD] . . . . . . . . . 25
Item 4.3.4.3 SUBPLOTS EXAMINED (CORE 1.6) [SUBP_EXAMINE_CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Item 4.3.4.4 SAMPLE KIND (CORE 1.7) [KINDCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Item 4.3.4.5 PNW PLOT KIND (PNW) [PLOT_KIND_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Item 4.3.4.6 PNW PREVIOUS (REPLACED) PLOT NUMBER (AFSL) [REPLACED_PLOT_NBR_P2A]. . . 27
pg.
III
Subsection 4.3.5 Additional Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Item 4.3.5.1 LANDOWNER PLOT SUMMARY REQUEST (PNW) [LAND_OWN_REQ_CD_PNWRS] . . . . . 27
Item 4.3.5.2 TOPOGRAPHIC POSITION (PNW) [TOPO_POSITION_PNW]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Item 4.3.5.3 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD (CORE 1.12) [RDDISTCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Item 4.3.5.4 WATER ON PLOT (CORE 1.13) [WATERCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Item 4.3.5.5 PLOT NOTES (CORE 1.18) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Subsection 4.3.6 Reference Point Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Item 4.3.6.1 RP TYPE (PNW) [RP_TYPE_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Item 4.3.6.2 RP SPECIES (PNW) [RP_SPCD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Item 4.3.6.3 RP DIAMETER (PNW) [RP_DIA_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Item 4.3.6.4 RP AZIMUTH (PNW) [RP_AZIMUTH_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Item 4.3.6.5 RP HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (PNW) [RP_DIST_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Item 4.3.6.6 RP AZIMUTH/DISTANCE TO SUBPLOT NUMBER (PNW) [RP_SUBP_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . 30
Item 4.3.6.7 RP NOTES (PNW) [RP_NOTES_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Subsection 4.3.7 Items Recorded on the Plot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Section 4.4 GPS Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Subsection 4.4.1 GPS Unit Settings, Datum, and Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Item 4.4.1.1 GPS UNIT TYPE (CORE 1.16.3) [GPS_TYPE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Item 4.4.1.2 GPS SERIAL NUMBER (CORE 1.16.4) [GPS_SERIAL_NBR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Item 4.4.1.3 GPS DATUM (CORE 1.16.5) [GPS_DATUM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Item 4.4.1.4 COORDINATE SYSTEM (CORE 1.16.6) [GPS_COORD_SYS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Item 4.4.1.5 GPS LOCATION TYPE (PNW) [GPS_LOC_TYPE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Subsection 4.4.2 Collecting Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Item 4.4.2.1 LATITUDE DEGREES (CORE 1.16.7.1) [GPS_LAT_DEG] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Item 4.4.2.2 LATITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (CORE 1.16.7.2) [GPS_LAT_DMIN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Item 4.4.2.3 LONGITUDE DEGREES (CORE 1.16.8.1) [GPS_LONG_DEG] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Item 4.4.2.4 LONGITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (CORE 1.16.8.2) [GPS_LONG_DMIN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Item 4.4.2.5 GPS ELEVATION (CORE 1.16.15) [GPS_ELEV]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Item 4.4.2.6 GPS ERROR (CORE 1.16.16) [GPS_ERROR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Item 4.4.2.7 NUMBER OF READINGS (CORE 1.16.17) [GPS_NBR_READINGS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Item 4.4.2.8 GPS FILENAME (CORE OPTIONAL 1.16.18) [GPS_FILENAME] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Item 4.4.2.9 GPS NOTES (PNW) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Subsection 4.4.3 Correction for Offset Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Item 4.4.3.1 AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (CORE 1.16.13) [GPS_AZM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Item 4.4.3.2 DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (CORE 1.16.14) [GPS_DIST] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Subsection 4.4.4 Downloaded Plot Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Item 4.4.4.1 PREVIOUS LATITUDE DEGREES (AFSL) [PREV_LAT_DEG_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Item 4.4.4.2 PREVIOUS LATITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (AFSL) [PREV_LAT_DMIN_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . 35
Item 4.4.4.3 PREVIOUS LONGITUDE DEGREES (AFSL) [PREV_LONG_DEG_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Item 4.4.4.4 PREVIOUS LONGITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (AFSL) [PREV_LONG_DMIN_PNWRS] . . . . . 35
Item 4.4.4.5 PREVIOUS COORDINATES METHOD (PNW) [PREV_COORD_METHOD_PNWRS]. . . . . . . 36
Chapter 5 Condition Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Section 5.1 Determination of Condition Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Section 5.2 Condition Class Status Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Accessible Forest Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Nonforest Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Noncensus Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Census Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Nonsampled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Section 5.3 Delineating Condition Classes Differing in Condition Class Status .41
Section 5.4 Delineating Condition Classes within Accessible Forest Land. . . . .44
Section 5.5 Condition Class Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Table of Contents
Subsection 5.2.1
Subsection 5.2.2
Subsection 5.2.3
Subsection 5.2.4
Subsection 5.2.5
pg.
IV
Subsection 5.5.1 General Condition Class Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Item 5.5.1.1 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (CORE 2.4.1) [CONDID]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Item 5.5.1.2 CONDITION CLASS STATUS (CORE 2.4.2) [COND_STATUS_CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Item 5.5.1.3 PREVIOUS CONDITION CLASS STATUS (PNW) [PREV_COND_STATUS_CD_PNWRS] . . 47
Subsection 5.5.2 Accessible Forest Land Delineating Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Item 5.5.2.1 RESERVED STATUS (CORE 2.5.1) [RESERVCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Item 5.5.2.2 OWNER GROUP (CORE 2.5.2) [OWNGRPCD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Item 5.5.2.3 PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP (PNW) [PREV_OWNGRPCD_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Item 5.5.2.4 FOREST TYPE (CORE 2.5.3) [FLDTYPCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Item 5.5.2.5 STAND SIZE CLASS (CORE 2.5.4) [FLDSZCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Item 5.5.2.6 REGENERATION STATUS (CORE 2.5.5) [STDORGCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Item 5.5.2.7 TREE DENSITY (CORE 2.5.6) [MAPDEN]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Subsection 5.5.3 Ancillary (Non-Delineating) Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Item 5.5.3.1 OWNER CLASS (CORE OPTIONAL 2.5.7) [OWNCD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Item 5.5.3.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE (PNW) [ADFORCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Item 5.5.3.3 PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS (CORE 2.5.8) [FORINDCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Item 5.5.3.4 ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (CORE 2.5.9) [STDORGSP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Item 5.5.3.5 AGE BASIS CODE (PNW) [AGE_BASIS_CD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Item 5.5.3.6 STAND AGE (CORE 2.5.10) [FLDAGE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Item 5.5.3.7 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (CORE 2.5.23) [PHYSCLCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Item 5.5.3.8 DISTURBANCE 1 (CORE 2.5.11) [DSTRBCD1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Item 5.5.3.9 DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (CORE 2.5.12) [DSTRBYR1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.10 DISTURBANCE 2 (CORE 2.5.13) [DSTRBCD2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.11 DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (CORE 2.5.14) [DSTRBYR2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.12 DISTURBANCE 3 (CORE 2.5.15) [DSTRBCD3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.13 DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (CORE 2.5.16) [DSTRBYR3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.14 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 1 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBCD1_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.15 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBYR1_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.16 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 2 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBCD2_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.17 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBYR2_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Item 5.5.3.18 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 3 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBCD3_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Item 5.5.3.19 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBYR3_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Item 5.5.3.20 TREATMENT 1 (CORE 2.5.17) [TRTCD1] (PFSL) [TRTCD1_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Item 5.5.3.21 TREATMENT YEAR 1 (CORE 2.5.18) [TRTYR1]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.22 TREATMENT 2 (CORE 2.5.19)” [TRTCD2] (PFSL) [TRTCD2_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.23 TREATMENT YEAR 2 (CORE 2.5.20) [TRTYR2]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.24 TREATMENT 3 (CORE 2.5.21) [TRTCD3] (PFSL) [TRTCD3_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.25 TREATMENT YEAR 3 (CORE 2.5.22) [TRTYR3]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.26 HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1 (PNW) [HIST_TRTCD1_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.27 HISTORICAL TREATMENT YEAR 1 (PNW) [HIST_TRTYR1_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.28 HISTORICAL TREATMENT 2 (PNW) [HIST_TRTCD2_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.29 HISTORICAL TREATMENT YEAR 2 (PNW) [HIST_TRTYR2_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Item 5.5.3.30 HISTORICAL TREATMENT 3 (PNW) [HIST_TRTCD3_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Item 5.5.3.31 HISTORICAL TREATMENT YEAR 3 (PNW) [HIST_TRTYR3_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Subsection 5.5.4 Determining Condition Classes on Nonforest Land. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Item 5.5.4.1 PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (CORE 2.5.24) [PRESNFCD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table of Contents
Subsection 5.5.5 Nonsampled Condition Class Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Item 5.5.5.1 CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (CORE 2.4.3)
[COND_NONSAMPLE_REASN_CD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Item 5.5.5.2 ESTIMATED NONSAMPLED LAND COVER TYPE (PNW) [EST_NON_SAMP_LCT_PNWRS] . . 63
Item 5.5.5.3 NONSAMPLED FOREST TYPE (PNW) [FLDTYPCD_NON_SAMP_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Section 5.6 Condition Class Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Subsection 5.6.1 Condition Class Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Item 5.6.1.1 CONDITION CLASS NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter 6 Subplot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Section 6.1 Recording Subplot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
V
pg.
Subsection 6.1.1 Subplot Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Item 6.1.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 3.1) [SUBP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Item 6.1.1.2 SUBPLOT STATUS (CORE 3.2) [SUBP_STATUS_CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Item 6.1.1.3 SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (CORE 3.3) [POINT_NONSAMPLE_REASN_CD] . . . . . 66
Item 6.1.1.4 PREVIOUS SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION (PNW) [PREV_SUBPCOND_PNWRS] . . . . . . 66
Item 6.1.1.5 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION (CORE 3.4) [SUBPCOND] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Item 6.1.1.6 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION CLASS STATUS CHANGE (PNW)
[SUBCOND_CHG_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Item 6.1.1.7 SUBPLOT CONDITION LIST (CORE 3.9) [CONDLIST]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Item 6.1.1.8 MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (CORE 3.5) [MICRCOND] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Item 6.1.1.9 SUBPLOT SLOPE (CORE 3.6) [SLOPE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Item 6.1.1.10 SUBPLOT ASPECT (CORE 3.7) [ASPECT]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Item 6.1.1.11 SNOW/WATER DEPTH (CORE 3.8) [WATERDEP]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Item 6.1.1.12 SUBPLOT NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 7 Boundary References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Section 7.1 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Section 7.2 Reference Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Subsection 7.2.1 Boundaries on AK-Remeasurement Plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Subsection 7.2.2 Boundary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Item 7.2.2.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 4.2.1) [SUBP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Item 7.2.2.2 PLOT TYPE (CORE 4.2.2) [SUBPTYP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Item 7.2.2.3 PERIODIC TO ANNUAL BOUNDARY CHANGE (AFSL) [BNDCHG_2PA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Item 7.2.2.4 CONTRASTING CONDITION (CORE 4.2.4) [CONTRAST] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Item 7.2.2.5 LEFT AZIMUTH (CORE 4.2.5) [AZMLEFT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Item 7.2.2.6 CORNER AZIMUTH (CORE 4.2.6) [AZMCORN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Item 7.2.2.7 CORNER DISTANCE (CORE 4.2.7) [DISTCORN]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Item 7.2.2.8 RIGHT AZIMUTH (CORE 4.2.8) [AZMRIGHT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Item 7.2.2.9 BOUNDARY NOTES (PNW) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Chapter 8 Tree and Sapling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Section 8.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Section 8.2 Selecting Tally Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Subsection 8.2.1 Where to Tally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Subsection 8.2.2 Within Plot Area Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Section 8.3 Conducting the Tree Tally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Subsection 8.3.1 Subplot Witness Trees/Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Subsection 8.3.2 Subplots/Conditions without Tally Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Section 8.4 Tree Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Subsection 8.4.1 Tree Tracking Data Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table of Contents
Item 8.4.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 5.1) [SUBP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Item 8.4.1.2 TREE RECORD NUMBER (CORE 5.2) [TREE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Item 8.4.1.3 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (CORE 5.3) [CONDID; PREVCOND; PREV_CONDID_P2A] . 78
Item 8.4.1.4 PREVIOUS TREE STATUS (AFSL) [PREV_STATUSCD_P2A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Item 8.4.1.5 PRESENT TREE STATUS (CORE 5.7) [STATUSCD_PNWRS;NON_TALLY_TREE_PNWRS]79
Item 8.4.1.6 SUBPLOT TALLY TREE WITNESS (PNW) [SUBP_WITNESS_FLAG_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Item 8.4.1.7 STANDING DEAD (CORE 5.7.2) [STANDING_DEAD_CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Item 8.4.1.8 RECONCILE (AFSL) [RECONCILECD_P2A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Item 8.4.1.9 SPECIES (CORE 5.8) [SPCD; PREV_SPCD_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Item 8.4.1.10 AZIMUTH (CORE 5.4) [AZIMUTH; PREV_AZM_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Item 8.4.1.11 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (CORE 5.5) [DIST; PREV_HORIZ_DIST_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Item 8.4.1.12 SLOPE DISTANCE TO WITNESS TREE OR OBJECT (PNW)
[SLOPE_DIST_TO_WITNESS_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
pg.
VI
Section 8.5 Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Subsection 8.5.1 Marking Current Diameter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Subsection 8.5.2 Diameter on Stumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Subsection 8.5.3 Diameter at Breast Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Item 8.5.3.1 PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (AFSL) [PREV_DIA_P2A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Item 8.5.3.2 DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (CORE 5.9.2) [DIA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Item 8.5.3.3 SNAG ESTIMATED DIAMETER (PNW) [DIA_EST_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Item 8.5.3.4 DIAMETER CHECK (AFSL) [DIACHECK_P2A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Section 8.6 Tree Growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Item 8.6.0.1 10-YEAR INCREMENT (PNW) [INC10YR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Subsection 8.6.1 Tree Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Item 8.6.1.1 PREVIOUS ACTUAL LENGTH (PNW) [PREV_ACTUALHT_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Item 8.6.1.2 ACTUAL LENGTH (CORE 5.15) [ACTUALHT]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Item 8.6.1.3 PREVIOUS TOTAL LENGTH (PNW) [PREV_HT_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Item 8.6.1.4 TOTAL LENGTH (CORE 5.14) [HT]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Item 8.6.1.5 LENGTH METHOD (CORE 5.16) [HTCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Item 8.6.1.6 PREVIOUS LENGTH METHOD (PNW) [PREV_HTCD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Subsection 8.6.2 Tree Live Crown Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Item 8.6.2.1 COMPACTED CROWN RATIO (CORE 5.19) [CR]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Item 8.6.2.2 CROWN CLASS (CORE 5.17) [CCLCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Section 8.7 Tree Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Subsection 8.7.1 Recording Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Item 8.7.1.1 ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (CORE 5.13) [CULL_FLD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Section 8.8 Miscellaneous Tree Measured Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Subsection 8.8.1 Live Tree Measured Data Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Item 8.8.1.1 TREE CLASS (AFSL) [TREECLCD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Subsection 8.8.2 Standing Dead or Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Item 8.8.2.1 CAUSE OF DEATH (AFSL) [AGENTCD_P2A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Item 8.8.2.2 MORTALITY YEAR (AFSL) [MORTYR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Item 8.8.2.3 DECAY CLASS (CORE 5.23) [DECAYCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Item 8.8.2.4 SNAG REASON FOR DISAPPEARANCE (PNW) [SNAG_DIS_CD_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Item 8.8.2.5 CULTURALLY KILLED (PNW) [CULTURALLY_KILLED_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Section 8.9 Tree Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Subsection 8.9.1 Tree Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Item 8.9.1.1 TREE NOTES (CORE 5.27) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 9 Seedling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Section 9.1 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Subsection 9.1.1 Seedling Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table of Contents
Item 9.1.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 6.1) [SUBP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Item 9.1.1.2 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (CORE 6.3) [CONDID] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Item 9.1.1.3 SPECIES (CORE 6.2) [SPCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Item 9.1.1.4 SEEDLING COUNT (CORE 6.4) [TREECOUNT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Item 9.1.1.5 SEEDLING NOTES (PNW) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 10 Site Tree Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Section 10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Section 10.2 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Subsection 10.2.1 Plots with Site Trees Collected Previously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Subsection 10.2.2 Primary Selection Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
pg.
VII
Section 10.3 Site Tree Selection Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Section 10.4 Alaska Age Tree Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Section 10.5 Site Tree Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Subsection 10.5.1 Site Tree Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Item 10.5.1.1 SITE TREE NUMBER (CORE) [TREE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Item 10.5.1.2 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE OPTIONAL 7.2.7) [SUBP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Item 10.5.1.3 SITE TREE STATUS (PNW) [SITE_AGE_TREE_STATUS_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Item 10.5.1.4 QUESTIONABLE SITE TREE FLAG (PNW) [QUESTION_SITE_AGE_TREE_PNWRS] . . . 110
Item 10.5.1.5 SITE/AGE TREE TYPE (AFSL) [SITE_AGE_TREE_TYPE_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Item 10.5.1.6 CONDITION CLASS LIST (CORE 7.2.1) [CONDLIST]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Item 10.5.1.7 TREE RECORD NUMBER (PNW) [TALLY_TREE_NBR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Item 10.5.1.8 AZIMUTH (CORE OPTIONAL 7.2.8) [AZIMUTH] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Item 10.5.1.9 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (CORE OPTIONAL 7.2.9) [DIST]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Item 10.5.1.10 SPECIES (CORE 7.2.2) [SPCD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Item 10.5.1.11 DIAMETER (CORE 7.2.3) [DIA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Item 10.5.1.12 SITE TREE LENGTH (CORE 7.2.4) [HT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Item 10.5.1.13 TREE AGE AT DIAMETER (CORE 7.2.5) [AGEDIA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Item 10.5.1.14 AGE DETERMINATION METHOD (AFSL) [AGE_DETERMINATION_METHOD_PNWRS] 112
Item 10.5.1.15 NUMBER OF RINGS (AFSL) [RING_COUNT_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Item 10.5.1.16 NUMBER OF RINGS IN INNER 2 IN (AFSL) [RING_COUNT_INNER_2INCHES_PNWRS] . . . 112
Item 10.5.1.17 LENGTH OF MEASURED CORE (AFSL) [CORE_LENGTH_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Item 10.5.1.18 SITE INDEX (PNW) [FLD_SITREE_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Item 10.5.1.19 SITE INDEX EQUATION BASE AGE (PNW) [SIBASE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Item 10.5.1.20 SITE INDEX EQUATION NUMBER (PNW) [SITREE_EQU_NO_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Item 10.5.1.21 SITE TREE NOTES (CORE 7.2.6) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 11 Vegetation Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Section 11.1 Vegetation Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Subsection 11.1.1 Species Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Item 11.1.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (PFSL) [SUBP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Item 11.1.1.2 SPECIES GROWTH HABIT (PNW) [GROW_HAB_CD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Item 11.1.1.3 SPECIES (PNW) [VEG_FLD_SPCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Item 11.1.1.4 SPECIES LIFEFORM (PNW) [VEG_TYPE_CD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Item 11.1.1.5 SPECIES HEIGHT (PNW) [HT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Item 11.1.1.6 SPECIES COVER (PNW) [CVR_PCT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Subsection 11.1.2 Lifeform and Total Vegetation Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Item 11.1.2.1 PERCENT TREE SEEDLING COVER (PNW) [PCT_TREE_CVR_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Item 11.1.2.2 PERCENT SHRUB COVER (PNW) [PCT_SHRUB_CVR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Item 11.1.2.3 PERCENT FORB COVER (PNW) [PCT_FORB_CVR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Item 11.1.2.4 PERCENT GRAMINOID COVER (PNW) [PCT_GRASS_CVR_PNWRS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Subsection 11.1.3 Vegetation Profile Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Item 11.1.3.1 VEGETATION PROFILE NOTES (PNW) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Section 11.2 Collection and Identification of Unknown Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Section 11.3 Literature Cited. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Item 12.0.0.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (PNW) [SUBP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Item 12.0.0.2 SPECIES (PNW) [VEG_FLDSPCD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Item 12.0.0.3 UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER (PNW) [UNIQUE_SP_NBR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Item 12.0.0.4 SPECIES CANOPY COVER (PNW) [SUBP_(1,2,3,4)_SP_CANOPY_CVR_TTL_PNWRS] . 124
Item 12.0.0.5 INVASIVE SPECIMEN COLLECTED (AFSL) [SPECIMEN_COLLECTED] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Item 12.0.0.6 SPECIMEN LABEL NUMBER (AFSL) [SPECIMEN_LABEL_NBR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Item 12.0.0.7 INVASIVE SPECIMEN NOT COLLECTED REASON (AFSL)
[SPECIMEN_NOT_COLLECTED_REASON] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Table of Contents
Chapter 12 Invasive Plant Species. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
pg.
VIII
Item 12.0.0.8 VEGETATION COMMUNITY DESCRIP LABEL (AFSL)
[COMMUNITY_DESC_SPEC_LBL_PNWRS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Item 12.0.0.9 INVASIVE PLANT NOTES (PNW) [NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Section 12.1 Unknown Invasive Plants and Specimen Collection . . . . . . . . . . .125
Appendix A Historical Inventory Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Appendix B Reference Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Section B.1 State Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Section B.2 Alaska Unit Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Section B.3 Slope Correction Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Section B.4 Metric Equivalents and Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Appendix C Forest Type Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Appendix D Tree Species List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Appendix E Tree Coding Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Appendix F Site Index Equation Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Appendix G Invasive Species List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Appendix H Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification 147
Section H.1 All Tallied Trees on the Four Subplots/Microplots . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Section H.2 All Trees Tallied on the Subplot Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Section H.3 All Trees < 7 Inches, Observed on the Four Subplots Only . . . . . . 152
Section H.4 All Trees ≥5.0 Inches Observed on the Four Subplots Only . . . . . 153
Section H.5 All Trees <7 Inches Observed on One Acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Section H.6 All Trees ≥5.0 Inches Observed on One Acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Table of Contents
Section H.7 Minimum Number of Trees Per Acre for Forest Land Based on
Largest Tally Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Appendix I Quality Assurance/Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Section I.1 Check Plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Subsection I.1.1
Subsection I.1.2
Subsection I.1.3
Subsection I.1.4
Subsection I.1.5
Subsection I.1.6
QA/QC Check Plot Type and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field QA/QC Check Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blind Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integrity of the Plot Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
157
157
158
158
158
IX
pg.
Subsection I.1.7 Review Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Appendix J GPS Operating Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Section J.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Section J.2 Garmin GPSMap 76CX Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Subsection J.2.1 GPS Keypad Layout and Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Section J.3 GPS Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Subsection J.3.1
Subsection J.3.2
Subsection J.3.3
Subsection J.3.4
GPS Unit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Menu Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Navigation Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the GPS on Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
160
160
161
Section J.4 Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Subsection J.4.1 Creating a Waypoint (When Coordinates are Provided) . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Subsection 12.1.1 Marking (Storing) Current Location as a Waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Subsection J.4.2 Naming Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Section J.5 Navigating with the GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Section J.6 Recording GPS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Section J.7 Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Appendix K Laser 200 Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Section K.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Section K.2 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Section K.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Section K.4 Filter and Reflectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Section K.5 Distance and Percent Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Section K.6 Tree Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Section K.7 Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Section K.8 Cumulative Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Appendix L Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Section L.1 Safety in the Woods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Section L.2 Safety in and Around the Helicopter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Section L.4 What To Do if Injured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Appendix M Plot Jacket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Section M.1 Plot Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Table of Contents
Section L.3 Safety on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
pg.
X
Section M.2 Plot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Subsection M.2.1
Subsection M.2.2
Subsection M.2.3
Subsection M.2.4
Subsection M.2.5
Subsection M.2.6
Subsection M.2.7
Subsection M.2.8
Subsection M.2.9
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Travel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Access Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Narrative Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
172
172
172
172
174
174
174
175
Section M.3 Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Subsection M.3.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Subsection M.3.2 Photo Work Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Section M.4 Landowner Permission Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Appendix N Plot Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Section N.1 Plot Level Data Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Section N.2 Condition Class Attributes Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Section N.3 Subplot Information Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Section N.4 Boundary Data Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Section N.5 Tree Tracking Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Section N.6 Seedling Data Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Section N.7 Site/Age Tree Information Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Section N.8 Vegetation Profile Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Section N.9 Invasive Plant Species Data Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Section N.10 Unknown Specimen Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Section N.11 Plot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Appendix O Radio Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Section O.1 Repeater Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Table of Contents
Subsection O.1.1
Subsection O.1.2
Subsection O.1.3
Subsection O.1.4
Repeater Channel Groups and Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongass National Forest Repeater Location Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chugach National Forest Repeater Location Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blank Information Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
194
195
196
Appendix P Important Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Section P.1 PNW-FIA: Anchorage Forestry Sciences Lab (AFSL) . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Section P.2 National Forest Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Appendix Q Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
XI
pg.
Appendix R Changes from Core Phase 2 Field Guide Version 3.0 to 4.0 . . 205
Appendix S Summary of Manual Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Equipment Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
pg.
XII
pg.
1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
This manual documents data collection procedures, codes, standards, and definitions used by the Pacific
Northwest Research Station, Forest Inventory and Analysis (PNW-FIA) program in the 2010 annual forest
inventory of Alaska. PNW-FIA is one of four United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Forest
Service, FIA programs across the country which conducts forest inventories in most of the 50 states and in
the Pacific Islands. PNW-FIA is responsible for inventorying the forest resources of Alaska, California,
Oregon, Washington, and the Pacific Islands. Field data collection within PNW-FIA is completed by two
data collection units: the Portland Forestry Sciences Laboratory (PFSL) and the Anchorage Forestry
Sciences Laboratory (AFSL). PFSL is based in Portland, Oregon and is responsible for California, Oregon,
and Washington. AFSL is based in Anchorage, Alaska and is responsible for Alaska and the Pacific
Islands.
Nationally consistent and uniform Core data measurements are assured by following the procedures
outlined in the Forest Inventory and Analysis National Core Field Guide. In addition to the Core data items
required by the national FIA program, PNW-FIA measures regional data items that are of interest to the
clients and customers of the PNW Research Station.
SECTION 1.1 ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL
This manual is structured primarily for use by field personnel. Each chapter corresponds either to a
separate function that must be performed in locating and measuring a field plot, or to a particular aspect of
data recording that must be completed. Procedures are ordered to coincide, as much as possible, with the
order in which field data are collected and entered into the data recorder.
Core field data collection procedures, listed in the Forest Inventory and Analysis National Core Field Guide,
Version 4.0, have been incorporated into this manual. Instructions that are single underlined, tables that are
shaded, and data item names followed by CORE and the Core chapter/section number in bold and
parentheses, describe data items or field procedures included in the Core field guide. Any regional
adjustments are noted in italic font within the underlined text or shaded table. Note: all scientific names are
shown in italic font. Portions of this manual that are not underlined or shaded describe regional procedures
which supplement national Core data. Regional data item names are followed, in bold and parentheses, by
the specific lab (i.e., AFSL) or by PNW if the data item applies to both PNW labs. When data items are
referenced within chapter text, the data item name will appear in all capital letters (e.g., “Record the
CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class in which each tree is located.”).
Database codes have been included in brackets following the data item name. National Information
Management System (NIMS) codes are listed for Core data items and regional database codes are listed
for regional data items. Note: Core data items containing regional additions (e.g., values, codes) will list
“CORE” as the source, but brackets will contain regional database codes; national database codes will be
populated from the regional database.
The following examples show how data items will be displayed depending on the source (i.e., Core or
regional) of the data item:
ITEM NUMBER; DATA ITEM NAME; (SOURCE); [DATABASE CODE]
ITEM X.X.X.X CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (CORE 5.3) [CONDID]........................Core
ITEM X.X.X.X PREVIOUS ACTUAL LENGTH (PNW) [PREV_HT_PNWRS]..............AFSL and PFSL
ITEM X.X.X.X RECONCILE (AFSL) [RECONCILECD_PNWRS].................................AFSL only
In addition, the following information is given for each data item:
Chapter 1: Introduction
When collected: Specific criteria for when data item is recorded
Field width: X digits
Tolerance: Acceptable range of measurement
Values: Legal values/codes for data items
pg.
2
SECTION 1.2 THE INVENTORY
The national FIA program consists of three phases. Phase 1 (P1) is a remote sensing phase aimed at
classifying all land into forest and nonforest. Phase 2 (P2) consists of a set of field sample locations
distributed across the landscape with approximately one sample location (FIA plot) for every 6,000 acres at
standard intensification. Forested sample locations are visited by field crews that collect a variety of forest
ecosystem data. Nonforest locations are visited, as necessary, to quantify rates of land use change or to
measure regional data items, when specified. This field manual describes the P2 process. Phase 3 (P3)
consists of a subset of the phase 2 plots (approximately one every 96,000 acres), which are visited during
the growing season in order to collect an extended suite of ecological data including full vegetation census,
tree and crown condition, soil data, lichen diversity, coarse woody material, and ozone injury. Data are
collected on a subset of plots in all states every year (i.e., annual inventory), as opposed to the historical
FIA approach of sampling states sequentially in a cycle (i.e., periodic inventory).
SECTION 1.3 PRODUCTS
PNW-FIA reports on the status and trends of forests in Alaska, Washington, Oregon, California, and the
Pacific Islands, and provides information sought by resource planners, policy analysts, and others involved
in forest resource decision-making. Data collected in PNW-FIA inventories are summarized, interpreted,
analyzed, and published in analytical reports and research articles of national, state, regional, and subregional scope. Information is presented by forest land and owner classes for land use change; timber
volume, growth, mortality, and removals; potential forest productivity; opportunities for silvicultural
treatment; and type and area of wildlife habitats.
The data collected in these inventories represent a wealth of information that can answer questions about
the status and trend of forest ecosystems, distribution of plant species and their relationship to the
environment, the incidence of insects and disease in relation to forest type and condition, changes in forest
structure and productivity resulting from disturbance, and improved prediction of forest growth and
development on different sites and in response to management.
SECTION 1.4 UNITS OF MEASURE
The PNW-FIA program uses ENGLISH units as the measurement system. Previous inventories used metric
units. For commonly used conversion factors, see the Metric Equivalents and Aids section in Appendix B
(Reference Information).
SECTION 1.5 PLOT DESIGN GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Core ground plot consists of four subplots approximately 1/24 acre in size with a radius of 24.0 feet.
The center subplot is subplot 1. Subplots 2, 3, and 4 are located 120.0 feet horizontal at azimuths of 360,
120, and 240 degrees, respectively, from the center of subplot 1 (see Figure 1.1).Throughout this field
guide, the use of the word ‘plot’ refers to the entire set of four subplots. ‘Plot center’ is defined as the center
of subplot 1.
Each subplot contains a microplot of approximately 1/300 acre in size with a radius of 6.8 feet. The center
of the microplot is offset 90 degrees and 12.0 feet horizontal from each subplot center. Microplots are
numbered in the same way as subplots.
Section 1.2: The Inventory
In the PNW-FIA annual inventory, the four subplots are laid out in the pattern shown in Figure 1.1; subplots
are never “substituted” or “moved” in order to keep the entire subplot within a homogeneous condition.
pg.
3
SUBSECTION 1.5.1 PLOT LAYOUT
Figure 1.1: FIA Phase 2 plot diagram.
SUBSECTION 1.5.2 DATA ARE COLLECTED ON PLOTS AT THE FOLLOWING LEVELS:
Plot- Data that describe the entire cluster of four subplots.
Microplot - Data that describe a small area within a subplot.
Subplot - Data that describe a single subplot of a cluster.
Condition Class - A discrete combination of landscape attributes that describe the environment on all or
part of the plot. These attributes include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CONDITION CLASS STATUS
RESERVED STATUS
OWNER GROUP
FOREST TYPE
STAND SIZE CLASS
REGENERATION STATUS
TREE DENSITY
Tree - Data describing live saplings with a diameter 1.0 inch through 4.9 inches, and live or dead trees with
diameter greater than or equal to 5.0 inches.
Seedling - Data describing live trees with a diameter less than 1.0 inch and greater than or equal to 0.5 feet
in length (conifers) or greater than or equal to 1.0 feet in length (hardwoods).
Site/Age Tree - Data describing site index and age trees.
Vegetation - Data describing plant composition and cover.
Invasive Species - Data describing presence and abundance of invasive plant species.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Boundary - An approximate description of the demarcation line between two condition classes that occur
on a single subplot or microplot. There is no boundary recorded when the demarcation occurs beyond the
fixed-radius plots.
pg.
4
SECTION 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
SUBSECTION 1.6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The goal of the FIA Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) program is to ensure that all resource
inventory data are scientifically sound, of known quality, and are thoroughly documented. Measurement
quality objectives (MQO) are established as standards to define data quality.
The PNW-FIA QA/QC staff works to continually improve the PNW-FIA inventory process by controlling,
identifying, and documenting errors and sources of variability that could be detrimental to the quality of
PNW-FIA inventory results. Emphasis is placed on extensive crew training, field inspections, and
documentation of protocols and procedures used in the inventory.
Measurement quality and consistency are assessed by using three methods: hot checks, cold checks, and
blind plots (see Appendix I for inspection plot descriptions). Periodic on-site inspections of field locations
are conducted to ensure that the field work is being performed with the required accuracy and precision.
Specifically, objectives of field checking are:
Section 1.6: Quality Assurance/Quality Control
1. To obtain uniform and consistent interpretation and application of field instructions among all field
crews.
2. To minimize technique errors.
3. To check the performance of each individual crew member.
4. To reveal inadequacies in the instructions and in the training program.
5. To assess and document the quality (accuracy, precision, completeness) of field data.
pg.
5
CHAPTER 2 LOCATING THE PLOT
This chapter describes the steps taken to locate and establish new FIA plots, and to locate and remeasure
previously established FIA plots.
Establishing the plot location is the crucial first step in collecting valid field data. While measurements at
each location are used to compile statistical information for the entire inventory, each location is also
compared to information derived from processing remotely sensed (e.g., satellite, aircraft) data for the same
location. Because these two sampling layers must measure attributes on the same location, the ground
sample must be located as accurately as possible.
SECTION 2.1 LOCATING AN ESTABLISHED PLOT
Established plots include:
•
Periodic revisited plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3) installed on the 4-subplot design (i.e., AKRemeasurement)
The first step in relocating a previously established plot is to find the old reference point (RP). From the
landing zone (LZ) or vehicle/skiff parking spot use resources such as photos, maps/drawings, written
descriptions, GPS coordinates (Subsection 4.4.4), and reference point (RP) data. Each field crew should
have a map with the location of the plots marked and identified with the plot number, and a plot jacket for
each plot that may be visited. GPS coordinates for each plot are printed on the ownership label on the plot
jacket. Use the available resources to reach the general vicinity of the plot. All previously established plots
should have an RP from which a horizontal distance and azimuth to the plot center (PC) was recorded. This
distance and azimuth can be followed from the RP to relocate the PC.
When measuring to the PC, whether from an old or a new RP, the end of the measured distance should be
marked with flagging and/or a temporary plot pin. This will allow for precisely quantifying the discrepancy
(horizontal distance and azimuth) from the end of the measured traverse to the PC in the Plot Access
Description on the plot card. Also, if the PC cannot be found in three hours or less and the traverse is
believed to end at the correct location beyond reasonable doubt (after photo verification and a decent
search of the surrounding area) then a replacement plot must be established at the end of the RP to PC
traverse (see Section 4.1, Lost Plot/Replacement Plot).
SUBSECTION 2.1.1 NAVIGATING WITH PHOTOGRAPHY
The plot jacket for each field plot will usually contain photos, supplemental imagery, and maps. The plot
center is marked with crosshairs (“+”) or is pinpricked and circled on the old photos and should be
transferred to all new photos. Photo pinpricks must be transferred without error. Use both new and old
photos to proceed to the plot area when revisiting established plots.
Some areas of Alaska have very poor or limited aerial photo coverage. Prior to departure, evaluate aerial
photography and plan an approach to the plot; although an alternate route may be necessary once on the
ground, this process will aid in locating the plot efficiently. If poor photo quality could prevent a crew from
following the procedures outlined here, seek advice from experienced crew leaders and/or the unit
coordinator prior to departure. In some extreme cases, navigating to the plot with a GPS unit and previous
or new plot coordinates will be the only option (see Subsection 2.1.2, Navigating with GPS).
If using a new photo on an AK-Remeasurement plot, transfer previous RP/PC pinpricks from the old photo;
the pinprick must be transferred without error. see APPENDIX M Plot Jacket, for instructions.
Chapter 2: Locating the Plot
Several types of photos are included in the plot jacket (black and white, or color ortho; “pocket” color infrared [CIR]; or color satellite ortho); one of these photos should be chosen for the RP/PC pinpricks. This
photo should include all relevant information needed for future crews to navigate successfully to the RP and
PC. For AK-Remeasurement plots, the newest photo will not always be the best to use; in this situation, it is
acceptable to reuse older photography.
pg.
6
SUBSECTION 2.1.2 NAVIGATING WITH GPS
Plots visited previously will, in most cases, have field collected GPS coordinates. When using GPS
coordinates to navigate, ensure coordinates are entered accurately into the GPS unit and follow your
progress on the photo. Compare the GPS navigation readings to other plot location data such as RP to PC
distance and azimuth to confirm direction of travel.
If during GPS navigation to the plot you encounter anything that could affect a future crew’s travel or safety
(e.g., passage around cliffs, shallow stream crossings, illicit activities, game trails, etc.) create a waypoint.
Record the waypoint coordinates (Subsection 4.4.2) and provide an explanation in the electronic GPS
NOTES.
Plot labels may show three sets of coordinates: GPS, Target (TGT), and Image (IMG); reliability for
navigation decreases from GPS to TGT to IMG.
•
GPS coordinates are usually the most reliable. They were collected by the crew that last visited the
plot. If satellite coverage was poor, or high position dilution of precision (PDOP) existed when the
initial coordinates were collected, the error may be high and the coordinates unreliable.
•
TGT coordinates were originally derived from an Albers meters projection and can be used for initial
installation of a plot if the image quality does not allow definite identification of an RP. For navigation
purposes they may not be reliable because of error introduced by the field crew chaining from the RP
to PC during initial installation.
•
IMG coordinates are derived from the ortho photos and rectified to match the location of the pinprick.
These are generally the least reliable coordinates for navigation because error may have been
introduced by the field crew during installation (e.g., incorrectly located pinprick) or during orthorectification.
Refer to Appendix J, GPS Operating Guide, for operation instructions for specific GPS units used by AFSL.
SUBSECTION 2.1.3 NAVIGATING WITH REFERENCE POINT (RP) DATA
Reference points have been established on most previously visited plots; horizontal distance and azimuth
from the RP to the PC were recorded. See Section 3.3 for monumentation details.
Species, diameter at breast height (DBH) (to the nearest centimeter on periodic PNW-FIA plots), azimuth
from RP to PC, and horizontal distance from RP to PC (in meters on periodic PNW-FIA plots), were
recorded on the plot card and on the photo used at the previous visit, and will be in the previous data
printout.
Section 2.1: Locating an Established Plot
The RP will be monumented with square aluminum tags (non-tree RP monumentation will vary). An RP tree
will have three square aluminum tags; two at approximately six feet above ground (facing crew’s approach),
and one below stump height (facing plot center) and scribed with the old RP distance (in metric units) and
azimuth data. Beginning in 2008, RP info was not scribed on RP tags.
If the old RP is not suitable for reuse, and the distance between the old and new RP is less than 10 feet,
then use same data as the old RP (converted to English units, with new DBH and species as needed). Use
notes to describe general location from new to old RP (e.g., “5 feet at 170 degrees”).
If the distance between the old and new RP is greater than 10 feet, write all standard RP data (species,
DBH, etc.) from the new RP to the old in the plot card notes (first line of RP location & description).
New RP tags will have horizontal distance and azimuth to old RP etched into them (English units). Use of
notes in this situation is critical.
Also, if the horizontal distance to PC from the RP is far (thousands of feet), then you may want to create a
new RP and determine new horizontal distance and azimuth to PC. If this method is chosen by the crew
leader, care must be taken to assure that the PC can be found at the end of the new distance. Again, it is
very important to write down notes describing the procedures used to relocate (or attempts to relocate) PC.
Measure to PC from new RP. Though measuring the distance and azimuth from the RP to the PC may be
time consuming, if done carefully, it is a reliable method for relocating field plots.
Before measuring from the RP to the plot center, check photos to see if the azimuth and distance seem
reasonable. If reliable GPS coordinates exist, GPS distance and azimuth can be compared to RP data
distance and azimuth.
pg.
7
SUBSECTION 2.1.4 REVERSE REFERENCE POINT (RP) METHOD
If the RP cannot be found, but the plot center is found, locate a new RP after remeasuring the plot (time
permitting). The tree/object selected should be visible on the photo, preferably between the LZ and PC.
Record new RP data using the following methods:
•
If GPS coverage is very good, collect coordinates for the new RP. Use the navigation function on the
GPS receiver to get an azimuth/horizontal distance from the new RP to the collected PC coordinates.
Record all the usual RP data in the RP section of the plot card and label them “GPS” to indicate that
azimuth/horizontal distance were not measured with a compass and tape. These data must also be
entered into the data recorder. Pinprick the new RP on the best photo available and record the RP data
on the back of the photo; label these data with the method (GPS) used to determine the azimuth and
horizontal distance to the new RP.
•
If GPS coverage is poor, pinprick the location of the new RP on the best photos available (same photos
as the PC pinprick). Use the methods in Subsection 2.3.2 (Locating a New Plot with Reference Point
(RP)) to determine the horizontal distance and azimuth from RP to PC; however, do not measure out to
PC (unless time permits). Record all the usual RP data on the plot card, in the data recorder, and on the
back of the photo. Label the RP data with “GPS” to indicate the method used to get the azimuth and
horizontal distance from RP to PC.
SECTION 2.2 ESTABLISHED PLOT ISSUES
See Section 2.1, Locating an Established Plot, for definition of established plots.
SUBSECTION 2.2.1 DIFFICULTY FINDING ESTABLISHED PLOTS
If an established plot cannot be found, follow these steps:
1. Return to the last known point on the route to the plot. Plan a route to the pinpricked plot center; divide
the route into stages with a physical feature at the end of each stage which can be identified on the
photos and confirmed on the ground. Proceed stage by stage, confirming the endpoint of the previous
stage before proceeding to the next. The endpoint of the last stage should correspond with the
pinpricked location, and be monumented with a center pin and witness trees/snags/stumps/objects. If
the plot cannot be found, continue with the following steps.
2. Look for stream confluences, ridges, openings, groups of large trees, old skid roads, large snags, etc. on
the ground, to confirm you are at the pinpricked location.
3. Try to locate the area where previous crews might have been when they thought they were at the
pinpricked location. Check the previous plot card for remarks providing insight on plot location such as:
"Plot center moved back 20 feet on same azimuth to agree with photo pinprick". Look for other indicators
such as:
•
Stand type and size of trees
•
The size and species of the RP and subplot 1 witness trees
•
Direction of travel from the RP (it could be 180 degrees off)
•
Slope and aspect
4. Previous plot access information (Route to RP and RP Information) should be compared with the
original photo pinprick. If these two plot references do not correlate to the same location:
Begin a spiral search from where the RP to PC traverse ended; extend up to a 200-foot radius
around the ground location.
•
At the same time, use all photos, drawings/maps, previous data, and/or GPS coordinates to aid in
relocating.
•
If the end of the RP to PC measured distance does not appear to be at the PC photo pinprick, then
use photos to find the pinprick location visually on the ground. If the ground location of the pinprick is
found then begin a spiral search of that area, extending up to a 200-foot radius.
5. If no sign of the plot can be found after an extensive search (three hours) using all the data and tools
available, the plot will be considered lost. Search time is limited to allow for plot re-establishment on the
same field day. See Section 4.1, Lost Plot/Replacement Plot.
Chapter 2: Locating the Plot
•
pg.
8
SUBSECTION 2.2.2 INCORRECTLY INSTALLED PLOT
AK-Remeasurement (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 OR 3): Plot is remeasured in its current location, regardless of
location errors (i.e., incorrect initial plot location). In this situation, pinprick the actual plot center location on
the photos and label the new pinprick on the back of the photo (e.g., “actual plot location”); draw an “X” over
the previous pinprick and label (e.g., “initial pinprick location–plot not installed here“). Electronic PLOT
NOTES (Item 4.3.5.5) must be recorded, and a written explanation/description included on the plot card.
SUBSECTION 2.2.3 INCORRECTLY INSTALLED SUBPLOT
Subplots are remeasured where they were installed at the previous visit, regardless of installation error.
SUBSECTION 2.2.4 PC OR SUBPLOT PIN MISSING OR MOVED
If the PC pin or a subplot pin is missing or has moved, re-establish the PC pin or subplot pins at the
previously established location using all available information (e.g., previous crew's data sheets, plot card
diagrams and descriptions, downloaded tree data in PDR, and any monumentation on the ground). The
location of the plot center and subplot pins is critical for ensuring that trees do not arbitrarily move in or out
of tally between surveys. When a crew has exhausted all efforts to find the PC or subplot pin, use the
following guidelines to re-establish plot/subplot center:
1. If the PC pin or a subplot pin is not in the previous location (i.e., pulled out of ground or moved) or is
missing:
• Locate the witness trees and any trees that are located nearest to the limiting distance of 24.0
feet. Use the slope distances and horizontal distances of these trees to ensure proper pin reestablishment.
• To ensure optimal precision, the crew should measure out the previous slope/horizontal
distances along the back-azimuths from the trees nearest the limiting distance to where PC or
subplot center should be. The location where the measured distances converge should be the reestablished stake/pin position.
• If the measured distances do not intersect at one point after verifying the distances and backazimuths, re-establish the pin at the average point, and record the discrepancies in the electronic
PLOT NOTES.
For example: Tree A has a horizontal distance of 23.4 feet and a back-azimuth of 270 degrees.
Tree B has a horizontal distance of 23.2 feet and a back-azimuth of 90 degrees. Although the
measuring tapes extending from the two trees should meet at center, there is a gap of 0.4 feet
between them. Re-establish center at the average point between the two tapes, and record the
discrepancies in the electronic PLOT NOTES.
Section 2.2: Established Plot Issues
SUBSECTION 2.2.5 LOST SUBPLOT
When an individual subplot is lost (cannot be relocated), re-establish the subplot center pin. CONDITION
CLASS STATUS (Item 5.5.1.2) of the new subplot must be updated (if necessary) and previous tree data
must be reconciled. See Section 8.4, Tree Tracking, for specific instructions for closing out downloaded tree
records on lost subplots.
SUBSECTION 2.2.6 LOST PLOT (REPLACEMENT PLOT)
If a previously established plot cannot be found following an extensive search (three hours) using all the
data and tools available, the plot is considered lost; certain procedures must be followed to “close out” the
old (lost) plot and replace it with a new plot. See Section 4.1, Lost Plot/Replacement Plot, for specific
procedures.
pg.
9
SECTION 2.3 LOCATING NEW PLOTS
Annual inventory plots installed for the first time where no periodic P2 plot previously existed should have
new photos with the plot center marked—either pinpricked or marked with crosshairs. Some plots may also
have coordinates obtained by digitizing USGS topographic maps. Some plots may contain photos and
supplemental imagery, which can be used as an aid in locating plot center. When you arrive at the point you
believe to be the PC, carefully check the location on the new photos/imagery against the surrounding
terrain and pattern of tree crowns and vegetation to confirm the location on the photo/imagery and your
location on the ground are the exact same spot. The new plot should be installed accurately: within +/- 10.0
feet of pinprick on a 1:12,000 or finer scale photo (e.g., 1:5,000), and within +/- 30.0 feet if the photo scale
is 1:12,000 or broader (e.g., 1:15,840).
SUBSECTION 2.3.1 LOCATING PLOTS USING PHOTOS
Use a map, ortho photos, and aerial photos to find the ground location of the plot center (PC) delineated on
the photos. Plot center will be located by measuring from a reference point (RP), to aid in relocating the plot
for remeasurement. For some plots, the PC can be located on the ground visually without measuring from
an RP.
Establish the PC using ortho photos. On occasion, the ortho photos will not be adequate for establishing the
location and a color infrared aerial photo (CIR) will be used instead. The procedures for using either
medium are similar but the CIRs require additional steps for scaling and orientation (explained below).To
accurately establish the field location the crew will need to know:
•
Photo scale reciprocal (PSR), or scale, to determine ground distances
•
Baseline azimuth, an azimuth reference on photo to determine compass bearing
Establishing the photo scale reciprocal (PSR) and a baseline azimuth:
•
Ortho photos: If using the ortho photos, the scale is already available (and is usually printed on the
photo). The ortho photos have been printed at a scale of 1:15840 (1 inch photo distance = ¼-mile
ground distance) and 1:10,000 unless noted otherwise. The baseline azimuth shown in the title bar of
the ortho photo refers to the series of perpendicular lines overlaid on the photo.
•
CIR photos: If there is not enough detail on the ortho photo then the color infrared (CIR) print can be
scaled by using information from the ortho photo or measuring objects on the ground. Refer to
APPENDIX M, Plot Jacket, for specific procedures for determining photo scale reciprocal (PSR) for the
CIR photos using the ortho photo.
SUBSECTION 2.3.2 LOCATING A NEW PLOT WITH REFERENCE POINT (RP)
To establish a new plot, the pinpricked location (PC) on the photo must be accurately located on the
ground. Determine ground distance and azimuth from a reference point on the photo to the plot center on
the photo; use these data to measure from the RP to the PC. RP selection and monumentation is covered
in Chapter 3, Plot Layout and Referencing.
Reference point (RP) to plot center (PC) measurements:
Azimuth
Chapter 2: Locating the Plot
1. Locate an RP on the ground which is easily and precisely identifiable on the photo. Pinprick the RP
and the PC. Describe the RP on the plot card as well as circling and labeling the pinprick on the back
of the ortho photo.
2. Draw a line between the RP and the PC intersecting the baseline on the ortho (described above). If
the RP-PC line does not intersect the baseline, then a third line intersecting the baseline at a 90degree angle can be drawn. The azimuth is determined by placing the center of a photo protractor at
the intersection of the new line and the baseline, turning the protractor so the azimuth on the
protractor is lined up with the baseline azimuth and then reading the new azimuth. The new line now
becomes the baseline.
3. Determine the direction from the RP to the PC by placing the center of the photo protractor at the
intersection of the baseline/RP-PC lines. Turn the protractor so the baseline azimuth on the
protractor is lined up with the baseline.
4. Read the RP-PC azimuth off the protractor and record it on the back of the photo (check the azimuth
to ensure that a reverse azimuth was not recorded [e.g., 180 degrees off]).
pg.
10
Ground Distance
1. Measure the photo distance (PD) between the RP and PC with the greatest accuracy possible
(1/100-inch preferable).
2. Take the photo scale reciprocal (PSR) as specified on the photo, or determined using the methods
above, and plug into the formula below.
3. Calculate the ground distance using the following formula:
Ground Distance = Photo Distance (inches) x PSR / 12 (divide by 12 to convert inches to feet)
Example:
Photo Distance (i.e., RP to PC on photo) = 1.26 inches
Photo Scale Reciprocal = 15840
1.26 inches x 15840 / 12 = 1663.2 feet. Round to the nearest foot. 1663 feet from RP PC.
Note: All calculations must be written out in full on the back of the photo.
Using compass and tape, measure out the computed ground horizontal distance, correcting for slope,
between the RP and PC. Measure from the face of the RP base tag to the PC.
SUBSECTION 2.3.3 INSTALLING A PLOT WITH TARGET (TGT) COORDINATES
Occasionally the quality of the imagery will not permit installing a plot accurately to the crosshairs. In this
case, TGT coordinates can be used to install the plot.
To establish a new plot with TGT Coordinates follow these steps:
1. Navigate to approximately 200 to 300 feet from the TGT Coordinates.
2. Choose an RP using the same selection criteria specified in Chapter 3 (Plot Layout and Referencing).
Section 2.4: Circumstances Precluding Plot Establishment/Measurement
3. Create a waypoint at the RP.
4. While the GPS unit is averaging creating the waypoint, scroll through the GPS screens to the navigation
screen.
5. When the GPS unit has collected 180 readings at the RP, note the distance and azimuth indicated to the
TGT coordinates.
6. Measure to the plot with compass and cloth tape as you would usually from the RP.
SECTION 2.4 CIRCUMSTANCES PRECLUDING PLOT ESTABLISHMENT/
MEASUREMENT
Active Logging: If the plot area is being actively logged (timber is being felled, bucked, or yarded) or is
unsafe to visit because of active logging, do not establish/measure the plot. Note the status of the
logging operation on the plot jacket and return the plot to the unit coordinator. Proceed to an alternate plot if
available.
Plot center (subplot 1) cannot be physically occupied (e.g., Census water, noncensus water, denied
access, or hazardous): The subplot will not be installed/measured or referenced; the entire subplot is
classified as the subplot center condition, even though a portion of it may be in another condition class.
Other subplots are installed/measured using normal procedures (see Subsection 3.4.2, Establishing
Subplots when Plot Center is Inaccessible).
•
Note: If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Census or noncensus water do not install or
measure the subplot, even if it can be occupied safely.
pg.
11
CHAPTER 3 PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
This chapter describes the Forest Inventory and Analysis (FIA) plot design, establishment guidelines, and
tolerances, and procedures used to monument and reference plots and subplots.
SECTION 3.1 PLOT DESIGN
The Core ground plot consists of four subplots with a radius of 24.0 feet. The center subplot is subplot 1.
Subplots 2, 3, and 4 are located 120.0 feet (horizontal) at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees,
respectively, from the center of subplot 1 (see Figure 3.1: FIA Phase 2 plot diagram). Throughout this field
manual, the use of the word ‘plot’ refers to the entire set of four subplots. ‘Plot center’ is defined as the
center of subplot 1.
Each subplot contains a microplot with a radius of 6.8 feet. The center of the microplot is offset 90 degrees
and 12.0 feet horizontal from each subplot center. Microplots are numbered in the same way as subplots.
SUBSECTION 3.1.1 PLOT LAYOUT
Figure 3.1: FIA Phase 2 plot diagram
The following table can assist in locating subplots 2 through 4 from a subplot other than subplot 1.
Numbers
To
3
4
4
Azimuth
150
210
270
Backsight
degrees
330
030
090
Distance
feet
207.8
207.8
207.8
SUBSECTION 3.1.2 PLOT DIMENSIONS
A. Subplot – for sampling landscape-level characteristics, assessing vegetation, tallying trees meeting a
minimum diameter at breast height:
•
Radius = 24.0 feet
•
Area = 1,809.56 square feet or approximately 0.04 acre or approximately 1/24 acre
B. Microplot – for counting tree seedlings and tallying tree saplings:
•
Radius = 6.8 feet
•
Area = 145.27 square feet or approximately 0.003 acre or approximately 1/300 acre
Chapter 3: Plot Layout and Referencing
Subplot
From
2
2
3
pg.
12
SECTION 3.2 PLOT ESTABLISHMENT
SUBSECTION 3.2.1 PLOT ESTABLISHMENT GUIDELINES
Establish the ground plot at the location corresponding to the pinprick/crosshair on the photo, as described
in Section 3.1, Plot Design. In the annual inventory the four subplots are laid out in the pattern shown in
Figure 3.1: FIA Phase 2 plot diagram.
When the crew cannot occupy the plot center because safety hazards exist, or the plot center is
inaccessible or out of the sample, the crew should check the other subplots. See Section 2.4
Circumstances Precluding Plot Establishment/Measurement, for installation instructions when a safety
hazard exists. If any subplot centers can be occupied and are in the sample, the subplots that can be
occupied should be established and sampled following normal procedures. When a subplot center or
microplot center cannot be occupied, no measurements will be taken on that subplot or microplot; instead,
the entire subplot or microplot should be classified according to the condition preventing occupancy. See
SUBPLOT STATUS (Item 6.1.1.2) for examples of coding data items in specific situations.
Note: If a subplot center (including subplot 1) is classified as noncensus water (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 3) or Census water (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 4), no measurements are taken on that
subplot, even if it can be occupied safely (i.e., regardless of water level, a subplot center covered by
noncensus or Census water cannot be “occupied”).
If an AK-Remeasurement plot (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3) was installed incorrectly at the previous visit, the
current crew should remeasure the plot in its present location and contact the field supervisor (see
Subsection 2.2.2, Incorrectly Installed Plot). Notes are required, both on the plot card and in PLOT NOTES
(Item 4.3.5.5), when previously mislocated plots are encountered.
If an AK-Remeasurement subplot was installed incorrectly at the previous visit, the current crew should
remeasure the subplot in its present location and contact the field supervisor. Notes are required, both on
the plot card and in PLOT NOTES, when previously mislocated subplots are encountered.
In cases where individual subplots are lost (cannot be relocated), see Subsection 2.2.5, Lost Subplot, for
instructions.
SUBSECTION 3.2.2 PLOT ESTABLISHMENT TOLERANCES
Plot center (center of subplot 1): +/- 10.0 feet of pinprick on a 1:12,000 or finer scale photo (e.g.,
1:5,000); +/- 30.0 feet if the photo scale is 1:12,000 or broader (e.g., 1:15,840)
Subplot 2, 3, or 4: +/- 5 feet
Microplot: +/- 0.1 feet
SECTION 3.3 MONUMENTING AND REFERENCING PLOT CENTER
Section 3.2: Plot Establishment
All ground visited plots are monumented at plot center and referenced by a reference point (RP) and two
witness trees/objects. Install a white plot pin at the plot center (PC, center of subplot 1); see Subsection
3.3.3, Exceptions to Monumenting Plot Center, for valid exceptions to this rule. Insert the pin into the
ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7 inches, soil permitting) and tie a small piece of
flagging to the pin.
If previously established, the plot was monumented at last visit with a plastic or fiberglass pin in the ground
at PC, and was referenced by an RP and two nearby witnesses—marked distinctively with square or round
tags. Replace the previous plot pin with a new white plot pin at exactly the same location as the old pin
(pack out plastic pins and discard), and update witness measurements.
Note: Monumenting and referencing protocol for entirely nonforest plots differs from standard protocol; see
Section 3.5 (Monumenting and Referencing Entirely Nonforest Plots) for monumenting and referencing
guidelines.
13
pg.
SUBSECTION 3.3.1 THE REFERENCE POINT
The reference point references the plot center monument, a fiberglass pin marking PC, on all field visited
plots. It is an object (usually a tree) that is easily identified on the aerial photo and on the ground, and apt to
be present at the next visit. Do not reference a subplot other than the one with the plot center monument
just because that subplot is closer to the RP. The RP may reference a subplot other than subplot 1 only
when there is a significant obstacle or other obstruction between the RP and subplot 1, or when a subplot
other than subplot 1 has the center monumentation (see Subsection 3.3.3, Exceptions to Monumenting Plot
Center).
Select an RP: The RP should be distinctive both on the ground and on the aerial imagery. The previous RP
tree may be reused, if it is still suitable. If the old RP tree is dead, missing, or difficult to identify on the
ground or on the photo, select a new RP and leave the tags on the old RP. If possible, it should be a tree
that is not likely to die or be cut before the next inventory, although a snag or other object may be selected
as an RP (e.g., a distinctive fence post, building corner). If such an RP is utilized, describe it on the back of
the plot photo and under Plot Access Description on the plot card.
Tag the RP: Attach three square aluminum tags to the RP tree; old tags may be reused, if suitable. Nail two
tags six feet above ground line; facing the direction(s) from which you expect future crews to approach the
RP. Nail one square tag below stump height on the side of the tree facing the plot center monument. Nails
should be driven in only enough to anchor them firmly into the wood. If the RP is a building, rock, or other
item that should not be tagged, include a description in the Plot Access Description on the plot card and in
the RP NOTES (Item 4.3.6.7).
In addition to monumenting the RP, the following must be completed:
•
RP data and written description (to the RP and to the plot) recorded on the plot card. See Appendix
M, Plot Jacket, for specific guidelines.
•
RP pinpricked on the plot photo, and the pinprick labeled with RP data on the back of the photo,
noting any irregularities. See the Plot Jacket appendix for specific guidelines.
•
RP data recorded in the data recorder, noting any irregularities in the RP NOTES. See Subsection
4.3.6, Reference Point Attributes, for specific guidelines and data items.
SUBSECTION 3.3.2 WITNESS TREES/OBJECTS
All ground visited plots will have two witness trees/objects referencing plot center (see Subsection 3.3.3,
Exceptions to Monumenting Plot Center, for exceptions to this rule); witness the PC monument and subplot
pins as follows:
A. Selecting witnesses: Select two trees/objects near the subplot center which form, as closely as
possible, a right angle with the center marker. Trees/objects within six feet of the subplot center are
preferable. If live trees are not available, use similarly sturdy objects that have a low likelihood of moving
or rapidly decaying. On previously established subplots, reuse the previous witnesses unless better
trees/objects are available.
Chapter 3: Plot Layout and Referencing
B. Monumenting witnesses: Monumentation procedures vary depending on the subplot being witnessed;
plot center (PC, center of subplot 1) has different monumentation than subplots 2 through 4 (see Table
3.1: Subplot witness monumentation). When attaching a tag to a live witness tree, drive the nail into the
tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. On previously established subplots, renew old
witness tags as needed. If a witness is replaced, remove old tags to avoid confusion at subsequent
visits.
pg.
14
Plot Center
(PC, Subplot 1)
Nail a square (silver)
aluminum tag well
below stump height
(< 0.5 feet above
ground level) on each
witness tree on the
side facing plot
center.
At two locations on
each witness tree,
nail a square
aluminum tag six feet
above ground height
facing the direction of
expected approach to
plot.
Table 3.1:Subplot witness monumentation
Subplots 2 through 4
(Note: All round [two-color] aluminum tags are placed with the yellow side out; scribe
the subplot number on rounds to aid in identifying the subplot in the future.)
If the witness is a live tally tree ≥3.0 inches DBH: attach one yellow round aluminum
tag below stump height facing subplot center, and one or two yellow round aluminum
tag(s) six feet above ground height facing the direction of anticipated approach to the
subplot. Note: avoid using tally saplings unless no other trees are available. If saplings
must be used, wire a yellow round aluminum tag to an ancillary branch.
If the witness is a dead tally tree: attach one or two yellow round aluminum tag(s) six
feet above ground height facing the direction of anticipated approach to the subplot.
Pound nails flush with the bole of the snag.
If a witness is a non-tally tree: attach one yellow round aluminum tag below stump
height facing subplot center, and one or two yellow round aluminum tag(s) six feet
above ground height facing the direction of anticipated approach to the subplot. If the
witness is a live tree ≥3.0 inches DBH, attach an aluminum nail at the diameter
measurement point. If saplings must be used, wire the yellow round aluminum tag to an
ancillary branch facing subplot center.
If the witness is a stump (i.e., < 4.5 feet tall): attach a yellow round aluminum tag
below stump height facing plot center. Attach another yellow round aluminum tag
centered on the top/cut face of the stump. When nailing tags to stumps, pound nails
flush to the bole. Tags nailed to stumps stay attached longer if bark is removed prior to
nailing the tag.
If the witness is a shrub: nail or wire a yellow round aluminum tag to the base of the
shrub facing subplot center. If possible, nail or wire an additional round higher in the
shrub facing the direction of expected approach to the subplot.
If the witness is another object: monument as appropriate for the object.
Section 3.4: Monumenting and Referencing Subplots 2 Through 4
SUBSECTION 3.3.3 EXCEPTIONS TO MONUMENTING PLOT CENTER
The plot center monument is not placed at the center of subplot 1 (plot center) if either of the following
situations occur:
•
The center of subplot 1 is too hazardous to visit (e.g., subplot center 1 is in the middle of a pond, or
the middle of a freeway, or on the side of a cliff)
OR
•
Placing the plot center monument at the center of subplot 1 is likely to irritate a landowner (e.g.,
subplot 1 center is in the middle of someone's front lawn)
THEN: Reference the center of the lowest-numbered subplot on which the above exceptions do not apply.
Circle the pinprick on the back of the photo; write "RP to subplot X” (insert appropriate number) and
required RP data near the circle. Record an electronic PLOT NOTE stating which subplot was
monumented.
SECTION 3.4 MONUMENTING AND REFERENCING SUBPLOTS 2 THROUGH 4
Accessible subplots that have a forest land condition class present on the 24.0-foot fixed-radius subplot,
and accessible subplots with a measurable nonforest condition class (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2
and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE = 1004) present on the subplot, also require referencing (see
Table 3.1: Subplot witness monumentation).
15
pg.
SUBSECTION 3.4.1 LOCATE AND MONUMENT SUBPLOT CENTER
Subplots 2, 3 and 4 are located at 360, 120, 240 degrees respectively (see Subsection 3.1.1, Plot Layout).
Mark subplot center: Place a fiberglass pin at the ground location of subplot center. On AKRemeasurement plots, replace the previous plot pin with a new white plot pin at exactly the same location
as the old pin (pack out plastic pins and discard). Insert the pin into the ground far enough to leave about 1/
3 visible (about 5-7 inches, soil permitting) and tie a small piece of flagging to the pin.
Reference witnesses: Reference the fiberglass pin to two nearby witnesses (see Table 3.1: Subplot
witness monumentation). On AK-Remeasurement plots, replace old tags as necessary.
SUBSECTION 3.4.2 ESTABLISHING SUBPLOTS WHEN PLOT CENTER IS INACCESSIBLE
When plot center is inaccessible (e.g., hazardous due to cliffs, falls in census water), but one or more of the
other subplot centers is accessible, establish all accessible subplots by using the offset procedures
described below.
In the following example, plot center (PC) is inaccessible, but subplots 2 and 3 are in accessible forest land.
All of subplots 1 and 4 are classified as CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5 (nonsampled). Subplot 2 and
subplot 3 must be established since they are in accessible forest land (see Figure 3.2: Inaccessible plot
center).
Example: The course from RP to PC is 235 degrees for 230 feet. The cliff is encountered at 198
feet—32 feet short of PC. To establish subplot 2, proceed 360 degrees for 120 feet, then proceed on the
original azimuth (235 degrees) for the remaining 32 feet to the center of subplot 2. To establish subplot
3: start where the original course from RP to PC ended; go 120 degrees for 120 feet; then go 235
degrees for 32 feet to the center of subplot 3.
Chapter 3: Plot Layout and Referencing
Figure 3.2: Inaccessible plot center
pg.
16
SUBSECTION 3.4.3 LOCATE AND MONUMENT THE MICROPLOT
The center of each 6.8-foot fixed-radius microplot is located 12 feet horizontal from each subplot center at
90 degrees (see Subsection 3.1.1, Plot Layout). Place a yellow fiberglass pin at microplot center. Insert the
pin into the ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7 inches, soil permitting) and tie a small
piece of flagging to the pin.
SECTION 3.5 MONUMENTING AND REFERENCING ENTIRELY NONFOREST
PLOTS
SUBSECTION 3.5.1 NONFOREST PLOTS ON CHUGACH NATIONAL FOREST LAND
Plots on Chugach National Forest land that are entirely nonforest and are ground visited must be
referenced on all four subplots. Follow the steps in Section 3.3 (Monumenting and Referencing Plot Center)
and Section 3.4 (Monumenting and Referencing Subplots 2 through 4).
SUBSECTION 3.5.2 NONFOREST PLOTS LOCATED ON ALL OTHER OWNERSHIPS
Section 3.5: Monumenting and Referencing Entirely Nonforest Plots
Plots that are entirely nonforest and are ground visited must be referenced at plot center. Follow the steps
in Section 3.3 (Monumenting and Referencing Plot Center) to reference the plot center. Subplots 2 through
4 do not need to be referenced if the entire plot is nonforest.
17
pg.
CHAPTER 4 PLOT LEVEL DATA
Plot attributes record information about the plot location, the field crew visit, and landowner requests. This
information aids future crews in plot relocation, sets up date and inventory cycle information in the data
recorder, and makes it possible to analyze the relationship of plot data to other mapped data (e.g., rivers).
All data items listed in this chapter are collected on plots with at least one accessible forest land condition
(PLOT STATUS = 1) and all nonforest/nonsampled plots (PLOT STATUS = 2 or PLOT STATUS = 3). In
general, plot level data apply to the entire plot and are recorded from the center of subplot 1. A plot is
considered nonforest if no part of it is currently located in forest land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1). A
plot is nonsampled if the entire plot is not sampled for one of the reasons listed in PLOT NONSAMPLED
REASON.
If a forest plot has been converted to nonforest or becomes a nonsampled plot, the previous data are
reconciled and an attempt is made to visit the plot during the next inventory. If a nonforest plot becomes
forest or access is gained to a previously nonsampled plot, a new forest ground plot is installed. All
nonforest and nonsampled plots are visited if there is any reasonable chance that they might include some
forest land condition class.
Trees on previously forest land plots will be reconciled during data processing. There is a distinction
between plots that have been clearcut, and plots that have been converted to another land use. A clearcut
plot is considered forest land until it is actively converted to another land use. Additional information
concerning land use classifications is contained in Section 5.5, Condition Class Attributes.
SECTION 4.1 LOST PLOT/REPLACEMENT PLOT
Plots that cannot be relocated by using the guidelines in Section 2.2, Established Plot Issues, are
considered lost; certain procedures must be followed to “close out” the old (lost) plot and replace it with a
new plot.
•
AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3) - See Section 4.1 for specific procedures.
SUBSECTION 4.1.1 LOST PLOT
If a previously established plot cannot be found, the plot is considered lost.
1. Close out the lost annual plot:
If no trees exist: Use photos, maps, and GPS to verify plot location and treat plot as remeasurement.
•
If a major disturbance has occurred with no trees or monumentation remaining: Use photos, maps,
and GPS to verify the plot location and consider it a remeasurement plot.
•
If some monumentation is present, but not all the trees are found: The plot should be re-established
and AK-Remeasurement protocol followed.
•
If trees were recorded: Use coding procedures for lost plots listed under PLOT NONSAMPLED
REASON (Item 4.3.4.2).
•
If trees were recorded and there is no evidence of disturbance: Document factors you believe
contributed to the plot being lost on the plot card and in the electronic PLOT NOTES (Item 4.3.5.5).
•
If trees were recorded and there is evidence of disturbance: efforts to locate plot must be
documented and factors you believe contributed to the plot being lost (e.g., poor imagery, previous
crew error, avalanche, etc.) recorded on the plot card and in the electronic PLOT NOTES. Describe
any disturbances that have occurred since the previous visit.
2. Install a replacement plot (see Subsection 4.1.2, Replacement Plot).
SUBSECTION 4.1.2 REPLACEMENT PLOT
Once a lost plot is closed out (see Subsection 4.1.1, Lost Plot), a replacement plot must be installed at the
ground location marked by the pinprick/crosshairs on the photo. Create a new plot file for the replacement
plot (PNW PLOT KIND = 5); a new (or surrogate) PLOT NUMBER will be assigned (see Item 4.2.1.3).
Locating and laying out a replacement plot should be performed as if installing the plot for the first time.
Notify the unit coordinator before sending any replacement plots to the office.
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
•
pg.
18
SECTION 4.2 PLOT LEVEL DATA DOWNLOADED TO THE PDR
Do not change the downloaded code for the following data items. If instructed, verify the code is correct and
if it isn't, contact the PDR programmer.
SUBSECTION 4.2.1 PLOT LEVEL DATA ITEMS
Item 4.2.1.1 STATE (CORE 1.1) [STATECD]
The unique Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) code identifying the State where the plot
center is located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code State
02
Alaska
Item 4.2.1.2 COUNTY (CORE 1.2) [COUNTYCD]
The unique FIPS code identifying the unit where the plot center is located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See Appendix B
Item 4.2.1.3 PLOT NUMBER (CORE 1.3) [PLOT]
The identification number, unique within the state, assigned to each plot; this item is populated when the
plot file is created or extracted in the data recorder. If PNW PLOT KIND = 5 (Replacement Plot), 99999 will
be a surrogate number until a new PLOT NUMBER is assigned back at the field office; notify the field
coordinator before sending in any replacement plots (see Subsection 4.1.2, Replacement Plot, for more
information).
Section 4.2: Plot Level Data Downloaded to the PDR
Note: If a replacement plot file needs to be created (see Subsection 4.1.2, Replacement Plot), the new plot
number assigned by MIDAS (or 99999 as a surrogate) will be entered when opening the new plot file. Do
not change the downloaded code within plot attributes.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 00001 to 99999
Item 4.2.1.4 CYCLE (PNW) [CYCLE]
This code identifies the cycle number of the current plot.
When collected: All Plots
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 01-99
Item 4.2.1.5 SUBCYCLE (PNW) [SUBCYCLE]
This code identifies the subcycle of the plot.
When collected: All Plots
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 01-10
19
pg.
Item 4.2.1.6 PERIODIC PLOT NUMBER (PNW) [PERIODIC_PLOT_NBR_PNWRS]
This code identifies the plot number (if any) used for this location at previous periodic inventories. Do not
change the downloaded/printed code. Verify downloaded code with the code on the label of the plot jacket.
Notify the PDR programmer if a difference exists. This item is included as an aid in finding/identifying old
reference/witness tags to correctly locate the PC.
When collected: Downloaded when plot has been assigned a plot number at previous periodic
inventories
Field width: 7 digits (3 alpha + 4 numeric)
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Numbering system based on three letters abbreviating map quad names followed by
a unique 4 digit number. Example: COR0260 = Cordova quad plot 260
Item 4.2.1.7 FIELD GUIDE VERSION (CORE 1.9) [MANUAL]
This code identifies the version number of the Forest Inventory and Analysis National Core Field Guide that
was used to collect the annual inventory data on this plot. This will be used to match collected data to the
proper version of the field guide. The 2010 FIELD GUIDE VERSION is 4.0.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits (x.y)
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 4.0
Item 4.2.1.8 PDR STARTING DATA RECORDER VERSION NUMBER (PNW) [PDR_START_VERSION]
A 30-digit field identifying the version number of the data recorder program used at the current visit to
collect data on the plot on the day the plot was started, in the format a.b.c.d.REGION.e. The a signifies the
national field guide version, and b signifies the minor national field guide version. The c represents the main
national MIDAS build version, and the d represents the main national MIDAS revision number. The
REGION code will be PNW for our region. The e represents the regional version number of MIDAS. As an
example 4.0.1.3.PNW.5 represents version 4.0 of the national manual, and it is the first major build of
MIDAS, and the 3rd national revision. It also signifies the 5th update of the MIDAS application for PNW. The
regional version number will be recycled back to “0” when the main national field guide version is updated,
for example, when Core Field Guide 5.0 is implemented.
When collected: Generated for all plots
Field width: 30 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: a.b.c.d.REGION.e (starting at 4.0.2.3.PNW.1)
Item 4.2.1.9 PDR ENDING DATA RECORDER VERSION NUMBER (PNW) [PDR_END_VERSION]
A 30-digit field identifying the version number of the data recorder program used at the current visit to
collect data on the plot on the day the plot was completed. See Item 4.2.1.8, PDR STARTING DATA
RECORDER VERSION NUMBER, for a description of the naming convention of values for this data item.
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
When collected: Generated for all plots
Field width: 30 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: a.b.c.d.REGION.e (starting at 4.0.2.3.PNW.1)
pg.
20
Item 4.2.1.10 DECLINATION (CORE OPTIONAL 1.11) [DECLINATION]
The azimuth correction used to adjust magnetic North to true North is downloaded into the PDR. All
azimuths are assumed to be magnetic azimuths unless otherwise designated. This field carries a decimal
place because the USGS corrections are provided to the nearest half degree.
DECLINATION is defined as: DECLINATION = (TRUE NORTH - MAGNETIC NORTH)
In Alaska, magnetic azimuths are used in the field (declination set to zero). Do not change the downloaded/
printed code.
When collected: Downloaded for all plots
Field width: N/A
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Declination set to zero
Item 4.2.1.11 INVASIVE PLANT SAMPLING STATUS (PNW) [SAMPLE_STATUS]
This is a downloaded code identifying if invasive plant data are being collected (see Chapter 12, Invasive
Plant Species, for invasive plant protocol). All plots in Alaska are sampled for invasive species.
When collected: Downloaded for all plots with at least one accessible condition class (PLOT STATUS
= 1); OR, all plots with at least one measurable nonforest condition class
(CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE 1004)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
0
Not collecting invasive plant data
1
Invasive plant data collected only on accessible forest land conditions
(CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
2
Invasive plant data collected on all ground-visited, accessible land
conditions (SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1 and CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1 or 2)
Section 4.2: Plot Level Data Downloaded to the PDR
Item 4.2.1.12 INVASIVE PLANT SPECIMEN COLLECTION RULE (PNW)
[SPECIMEN_COLLECTION_RULE]
This is a downloaded code indicating if collection of specimens of unknown (or suspected) invasive species
is required (INVASIVE PLANT SAMPLING STATUS = 1 or 2; see Item 4.2.1.11)A specimen is collected
when a crew encounters a known invasive species within a subplot on a remote plot or encounters a
suspected invasive but is unsure of species identification. Follow the instructions in Section 12.1 (Unknown
Invasive Plants and Specimen Collection) for specimens collected on remote plots.
When collected: Downloaded for all plots when INVASIVE PLANT DATA SAMPLING STATUS = 1 or
2
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Value Description
0
Specimen collection for invasive plants is not required
1
Specimen collection for invasive plants is required
2
Specimen collection is required in specific situations only. A specimen
must be collected in AFSL whenever the code for “unknown plant” is used,
or when invasive plants are found on remote plots.
Item 4.2.1.13 YEAR OF PREVIOUS INVENTORY (PNW) [PREV_INV_YEAR_PNWRS]
This code is downloaded if plot was visited previously. It indicates the year of the previous periodic or
annual inventory. Do not change the downloaded date.
When collected: Downloaded if plot was visited previously
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Year
21
pg.
Item 4.2.1.14 MONTH OF PREVIOUS INVENTORY (PNW) [PREV_INV_MONTH_PNWRS]
This code is downloaded if plot was visited previously. It indicates the month of the previous periodic or
annual inventory. Do not change the downloaded date.
When collected: Downloaded if plot was visited previously
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Month (1 to 12)
Item 4.2.1.15 FIRE PLOT (PNW) [FIRE_PLOT_PNWRS]
This is a downloaded code identifying if plot has been selected as a Fire Effects and Recovery Study
(FERS) plot; protocol can be found in the Fire Effects and Recovery Study manual supplement.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 character
Tolerance: n/a
Values: Code Definition
Y
Plot has been selected as a FERS plot
N
Plot is not a FERS plot
SECTION 4.3 PLOT LEVEL DATA COLLECTED IN THE FIELD
SUBSECTION 4.3.1 CREW VISIT INFORMATION
Item 4.3.1.1 SAMPLE METHOD CODE (PNW) [DATA_SOURCE_PNWRS]
Record the code that describes the source for the data collected on the plot location.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Sample Method Description
Core codes
(office use only)
1
2
3
4
Ground
All data collected from a ground visit by a
field crew.
Viewed from a Location was flown over or viewed from a
distance
distance (e.g., viewed from a road or
adjacent ridgeline).
Photo
Information for the location was
Interpretation determined using photo interpretation.
Other–specify Specify source of data in PLOT NOTES
and on the plot card.
1
1
2
2
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
pg.
22
Item 4.3.1.2 QA STATUS (CORE 1.14) [QA_STATUS]
Electronic data files are automatically named by the data recorder using the PLOT NUMBER and File
Name Code. Electronic data files for plots with QA STATUS 2 through 6 are saved as separate files so that
the original standard production plot data is preserved and can be used for quality control and statistical
analysis.
Record the code to indicate the type of plot data collected, using the following codes:
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Standard production plot
2
Cold check
3
Reference plot (off grid)
4
Training/practice plot (off grid)
5
Botched plot file (disregard during data processing)
6
Blind check
7
Hot check (production plot)
Item 4.3.1.3 CREW TYPE (PNW) [CREW_TYPE]
Record the code to specify what type of crew is measuring the plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Crew Type
1
Standard Forest Service field crew
2
QA crew (any QA crew member present collecting data, regardless of plot
QA Status)
Item 4.3.1.4 CREW NUMBER (CORE 1.15) [CREWNBR1, CREWNBR2, CREWNBR3, CREWNBR4,
CREWNBR5]
Section 4.3: Plot Level Data Collected in the Field
Record up to five crew numbers as assigned to individual field crew members; always record the crew
leader first. The first 2 digits are for the responsible unit’s station number (NRS – 24XXXX, SRS – 33XXXX,
RMRS – 22XXXX, and PNW – 26XXXX).
When collected: All plots
Field Width: 6 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
PNW 260001 - 269999
Item 4.3.1.5 TRANSPORTATION TO PLOT (AFSL) [TRANSPORTATION_PLOT_CD_PNWRS]
Record the code corresponding with the type of transportation used to access the plot.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1 or 2
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Transportation Type
1
Helicopter
2
Skiff
3
Float Plane
4
Road
5
Other (Specify in PLOT NOTES)
23
pg.
SUBSECTION 4.3.2 CURRENT DATE OF INVENTORY
Item 4.3.2.1 YEAR (CORE 1.10.1) [MEASYEAR]
Record the year in which the plot was completed.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: > 2010
Item 4.3.2.2 MONTH (CORE 1.10.2) [MEASMON]
Record the month in which the plot was completed.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values:
Month
January
February
March
April
Code
1
2
3
4
Month
May
June
July
August
Code
5
6
7
8
Month
September
October
November
December
Code
9
10
11
12
Item 4.3.2.3 DAY (CORE 1.10.3) [MEASDAY]
Record the day of the month on which the plot was completed.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1 to 31
SUBSECTION 4.3.3 TIME SPENT ON PLOT
Basic information about time spent collecting plot data is needed. The time it takes to measure plots will
help determine possible cost and time savings of changes or deletions to data collected, or cost and time
expenditures of proposed new items. The following data items are recorded when a plot is field visited
(SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1).
Item 4.3.3.1 TRAVEL TIME TO PLOT (PNW) [TIME_TO_PLOT_PNWRS]
Record the number of hours it took for the crew to reach and find the plot. Include time spent driving, flying,
getting keys from landowners, changing flat tires, hiking, searching for the plot location, etc. If multiple days
were required to reach the plot, include travel time from all days. If additional plots are measured from a
single campsite, use travel time from the campsite for the additional plots. If time differs among crew
members, use the crew leader’s travel time. If the plot was visited on subsequent days, only use travel time
to reach the plot on the initial visit. Estimate travel time to the nearest half hour.
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance: 1 hour
Values: 00.0 to 99.5
pg.
24
Item 4.3.3.2 MEASUREMENT TIME ON PLOT (PNW) [TIME_ON_PLOT_PNWRS]
Record the number of person-hours it took to measure all items on the plot (number of people on plot X
number of hours on plot). If multiple days were required, add times for a total. Include all time on plot
including breaks (if any), equipment repair, etc., as well as actual measurement time. Estimate
measurement time on plot to the nearest half hour.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance: 1 hour
Values: 00.0 to 99.5
Item 4.3.3.3 TRAVEL TIME FROM PLOT (PNW) [TIME_FROM_PLOT_PNWRS]
Record the number of hours you think it will take to travel back from the plot. Do not include time for
anticipated stops or delays. Typically this will be from the plot to the lodging where you are staying. If
multiple days are required to return, use total travel time anticipated. If additional plots have been measured
from a single campsite, use only travel time to the campsite for the additional plots. Estimate travel time to
the nearest half hour.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance: 1 hour
Values: 00.0 to 99.5
SUBSECTION 4.3.4 PLOT LEVEL FUNDAMENTALS
Item 4.3.4.1 PLOT STATUS (CORE 1.4) [PLOT_STATUS_CD]
Record the code describing the sampling status of the plot. In cases where a plot is inaccessible, record
PLOT STATUS = 3.
Section 4.3: Plot Level Data Collected in the Field
If an inaccessible plot (access denied or hazardous) is obviously nonforest (e.g., viewed from a distance),
code PLOT STATUS, PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON, CONDITION STATUS, CONDITION
NONSAMPLED REASON, NONSAMPLED LAND COVER TYPE, and PRESENT NONFOREST LAND
USE as follows:
PLOT STATUS = 3 (nonsampled possibility of forest land)
PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2 or 3 (access denied or hazardous)
CONDITION STATUS = 5 (nonsampled)
CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 2 or 3 (access denied or hazardous)
NONSAMPLED LAND COVER TYPE = 2 (nonforest)
PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE will be recorded for the condition class at plot center
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
1
Sampled – at least one accessible forest land condition present on plot
2
Sampled – no accessible forest land condition present on plot (use this
code if accessible forest land condition is present only on the hectare plot)
3
Nonsampled – possibility of forest land
25
pg.
Item 4.3.4.2 PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (CORE 1.5) [PLOT_NONSAMPLE_REASN_CD]
For entire plots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons.
When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 3
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
01
Outside U.S. boundary – Entire plot is outside of the U.S. border. Entire
plots would only be assigned this code if it is determined that a previously
measured plot is currently beyond the U.S. border.
02
Denied access – Access to the entire plot is denied by the legal owner, or
by the owner of the only reasonable route to the plot. Because a deniedaccess plot can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample
and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available.
There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class
delineated by denied access.
03
Hazardous – Entire plot cannot be accessed because of a hazard or
danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance
plantations, high water, etc. Although most hazards will not change over
time, a hazardous plot remains in the sample and is re-examined at the
next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no
minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a
hazardous condition.
05
06
Lost data – Plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after a panel was
completed and submitted for processing. This code is applied at the time of
processing after notification to the units. This code is for office use only.
Lost plot – Entire plot cannot be found. Notify the field supervisor when
this situation occurs. Whenever this code is assigned, a replacement plot
is required. A lost plot is assigned PNW PLOT KIND = 2 and NONSAMPLED
REASON = 6. The replacement plot is assigned PNW PLOT KIND = 5.
08
09
10
Skipped visit – Entire plot skipped. Used for plots that are not completed
prior to the time a panel is finished and submitted for processing. This code
is for office use only.
Dropped intensified plot – Intensified plot dropped due to a change in grid
density. This code used only by units engaged in intensification. This code
is for office use only.
Other – Entire plot not sampled due to a reason other than one of the
specific reasons already listed. An electronic PLOT NOTE is required to
describe the situation.
Item 4.3.4.3 SUBPLOTS EXAMINED (CORE 1.6) [SUBP_EXAMINE_CD]
Record the number of subplots examined. By default, PLOT STATUS = 1 plots have all 4 subplots
examined.
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Only subplot 1 center condition examined and all other subplots assumed
(inferred) to be the same (remote sensing use only)
4
All four subplots fully described (no assumptions/inferences) (for field
visited plots and plots viewed from a distance)
pg.
26
Item 4.3.4.4 SAMPLE KIND (CORE 1.7) [KINDCD]
This is a downloaded code that describes the kind of plot being installed. This data item cannot be updated
by the field crew. Note: All plots in Alaska (including AK-Remeasurement) are SAMPLE KIND = 1; PNW
PLOT KIND (Item 4.3.4.5) is used to specify plot type (e.g., new plot or periodic revisited plot).
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Sample Kind Definition
1
AK-Remeasurement or Initial 4-subplot plot establishment - the initial
establishment and sampling of a national design plot (FIA Field Guide
versions 1.1 and higher). SAMPLE KIND 1 is assigned under the following
circumstances:
▪ Initial activation of a panel or subpanel
▪ Reactivation of a panel or subpanel that was previously dropped
▪ Resampling of established plots that were not sampled at the previous
visit. No 4-subplot FIA (P2 or P3) plot was previously established.
Item 4.3.4.5 PNW PLOT KIND (PNW) [PLOT_KIND_PNWRS]
Section 4.3: Plot Level Data Collected in the Field
The PNW PLOT KIND code identifies annual inventory plots installed at old periodic plot locations (periodicto-annual) so that estimates of forest change can be made. Although differences exist between periodic
and annual inventories, paired plots (annual-to-periodic) can be used to estimate annual net change for 5year reports, and to estimate mortality, growth, and net change for 10-year reports if “remeasured” periodic
plots are clearly identified.
When collected: When SAMPLE KIND = 1
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code PNW PLOT KIND Definition
1
New plot: No previous periodic plot installed at this location, and plot is not a
revisited plot or replacement plot.
2
AK-Remeasurement – periodic revisited plot – exact: Annual plot of 4subplots is being established over a periodic plot and the center pin of
subplot 1 is at the same position as for the periodic plot. Crew should
complete Alaska remeasurement protocols (in terms of national Core
protocol, “AK-Remeasurement” plots are technically revisited periodic plots
with a number of Core remeasurement data items included).
3
AK-Remeasurement – periodic revisited plot – remonumented: Annual plot
of 4-subplots is being established over a periodic plot, but ground
disturbance (e.g., logging activities, fire, landslide) required re-establishing
subplot 1 in the same location, as best as could be done. Code 3 should also
be used when the center pin is no longer in the ground but can be accurately
re-established using witness trees, boundary trees, RP, etc. Crew should
complete Alaska remeasurement protocols (in terms of national Core
protocol, “AK-Remeasurement” plots are technically revisited periodic plots
with a number of Core remeasurement data items included). When code 3 is
used, provide explanation in the electronic PLOT NOTES.
5
Replacement plot – could not find / lost periodic plot: All attempts to locate
the previous plot have failed. Collect all data for this newly installed annual
inventory plot. Note: There will be two separate plot files: one for the lost
(replaced) plot, and one for its replacement (new) plot. The lost plot is
assigned PLOT STATUS = 3, PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON CODE = 6,
and PNW PLOT KIND = 2. The replacement plot is coded PNW PLOT KIND
= 5 and is assigned a PNW PREVIOUS (REPLACED) PLOT NUMBER. See
Section 4.1 (Lost Plot/Replacement Plot) for more information about
replacement plots.
6
Periodic plot – first ground plot installation: plot was classified in the office
using remotely sensed imagery during the periodic inventory; this is the first
ground plot installation. Note: This is not considered AK-Remeasurement.
27
pg.
The following examples describe how to code PNW PLOT KIND and associated data items.
Annual inventory initial installation:
A. Crew installs a new annual plot – no corresponding periodic plot.
• PNW PLOT KIND = 1
• No AK-Remeasurement protocols apply
Annual inventory installation at previous periodic plot location (AK-Remeasurement):
A. Crew installs a new annual plot at the same location as an old periodic plot by finding monumentation
from the previous crew.
• PNW PLOT KIND = 2
• AK-Remeasurement protocols apply
B. Crew attempts to install a new annual plot at the same location of an old periodic plot but because of
ground disturbance (e.g., logging, fire, landslide), no monumentation from the previous crew can be
found. Establish the center of annual inventory subplot 1 in the same location, as best as could be
done, using all available tools (aerial photos, previous crew's write-up and location map, etc).
• PNW PLOT KIND = 3
• AK-Remeasurement protocols apply
C. Crew attempts to install a new annual plot at the same location as an old periodic plot and cannot
find the old periodic plot. See Section 2.2, Established Plot Issues, for more instructions.
• PNW PLOT KIND = 5
• No AK-Remeasurement protocols apply
D. Crew installs a new annual plot at the same location as an old periodic plot that was remotely sensed
previously; no ground plot exists.
• PNW PLOT KIND = 6
• No AK-Remeasurement protocols apply
Item 4.3.4.6 PNW PREVIOUS (REPLACED) PLOT NUMBER (AFSL) [REPLACED_PLOT_NBR_P2A]
Record the identification number for the lost [periodic] plot that is being replaced. Note: This is not the
PERIODIC PLOT NUMBER (Item 4.2.1.6) used during the periodic inventory; it is the new, five-digit, annual
identification (plot) number assigned to old periodic plots.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 5
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 00001 to 99999
SUBSECTION 4.3.5 ADDITIONAL ITEMS
Item 4.3.5.1 LANDOWNER PLOT SUMMARY REQUEST (PNW) [LAND_OWN_REQ_CD_PNWRS]
Record a 1-digit code which indicates if a landowner of the plot area requests a summary of the data
collected on their land. Make any special comments relevant to the data request (e.g., landowner does not
own all four subplots, the owner of subplot 2 would like data, etc.) in the electronic PLOT NOTES and use
code 2.
Landowner Plot Summary Request
No data request
Plot summary requested
Special case request
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code
0
1
2
pg.
28
Item 4.3.5.2 TOPOGRAPHIC POSITION (PNW) [TOPO_POSITION_PNW]
Record a 1-digit code for the TOPOGRAPHIC POSITION that best describes the plot area. Use the
common shape of slope listed in the table below as a guide. Record the code that best fits the
TOPOGRAPHIC POSITION (Figure 4.1).
If the plot straddles a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side hill
record the topographic position of the side hill.
Figure 4.1: Illustration of TOPOGRAPHIC POSITION codes
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT STATUS = 1);
OR, all plots with at least one measurable nonforest condition class (CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE 1004).
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: One class for codes 3, 4, and 5. No errors for other codes.
Values: Code
Topographic Position
Common shape of slope
1
Ridge top or mountain peak over 130 feet
Flat
2
Narrow ridge top or peak less than 130 feet wide Convex
3
Convex
Side hill – upper 1/3
4
Side hill – middle 1/3
No rounding
5
Side hill – lower 1/3
Canyon bottom less than 660 feet wide
Bench, terrace or dry flat
Broad alluvial flat over 660 feet wide
Swamp or wet flat
Concave
Section 4.3: Plot Level Data Collected in the Field
6
7
8
9
Concave
Flat
Flat
Flat
Item 4.3.5.3 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD (CORE 1.12) [RDDISTCD]
Record the straight-line distance from plot center (subplot 1) to the nearest improved road. An improved
road is a road of any width that is maintained as evidenced by pavement, gravel, grading, ditching, and/or
other improvements.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT STATUS = 1);
OR, all plots with at least one measurable nonforest condition class (CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE 1004).
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
100 feet or less
1
101 to 300 feet
2
301 to 500 feet
3
501 to 1000 feet
4
1001 feet to 1/2 mile
5
1/2 to 1 mile
6
1 to 3 miles
7
3 to 5 miles
8
Greater than 5 miles
9
29
pg.
Item 4.3.5.4 WATER ON PLOT (CORE 1.13) [WATERCD]
Record the water source that has the greatest impact on the area within the accessible forest land portion
of any of the four subplots. The coding hierarchy is listed in order from large permanent water to temporary
water. This variable can be used for recreation, wildlife, hydrology, and timber availability studies.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT STATUS = 1);
OR, all plots with at least one measurable nonforest condition class (CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE 1004).
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
None – no water sources within the accessible forest land CONDITION
0
CLASS
Permanent streams or ponds too small to qualify as noncensus water
1
Permanent water in the form of deep swamps, bogs, marshes without
2
standing trees present and less than 1.0 acre in size, or with standing trees
Ditch/canal – human-made channels used as a means of moving water,
3
such as irrigation or drainage which are too small to qualify as noncensus
water
Temporary streams
4
Flood zones – evidence of flooding when bodies of water exceed their
5
natural banks
Other temporary water – specify in PLOT NOTES
9
Item 4.3.5.5 PLOT NOTES (CORE 1.18) [NOTES]
Use these fields to record notes pertaining to the entire plot. If the notes apply only to a specific subplot or
other specific aspect of the plot, then make that clear in the notes.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases and numbers
SUBSECTION 4.3.6 REFERENCE POINT ATTRIBUTES
Record the following items which describe the reference point (RP) and the course from the RP to the plot
as described in the Subsection 3.3.1, The Reference Point. These data items should match what is
recorded on the plot card and on the back of the photo.
Note: All ground visited plots (SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1) require an RP and two witness trees/objects
(see Subsection 3.3.2, Witness Trees/Objects).
Item 4.3.6.1 RP TYPE (PNW) [RP_TYPE_PNWRS]
Record the type of object chosen as the reference point (RP).
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code RP TYPE
1
Tree or stump
2
Rock
3
Shrub
4
Other – specify in RP notes
pg.
30
Item 4.3.6.2 RP SPECIES (PNW) [RP_SPCD_PNWRS]
If the RP is a tree or stump record the species code.
When collected: When RP TYPE = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See Appendix D, Tree Species List for species codes.
Item 4.3.6.3 RP DIAMETER (PNW) [RP_DIA_PNWRS]
If the RP is a tree or a stump, measure and record the DBH to the nearest inch (see Section 8.5,
Diameter).
When collected: When RP TYPE = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 percent
Values: 001 to 999 to the nearest inch
Item 4.3.6.4 RP AZIMUTH (PNW) [RP_AZIMUTH_PNWRS]
Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the RP to the plot center. When azimuth is determined using a GPS,
include this information in the electronic RP NOTES and on the back of the photo.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 4 degrees
Values: 001 to 360
Item 4.3.6.5 RP HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (PNW) [RP_DIST_PNWRS]
Record, to the nearest foot, the horizontal distance from the RP to the plot center; an RP should be within
5000 feet of plot center. When horizontal distance is collected using a GPS, include this information in the
electronic RP NOTES and on the back of the photo.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: +/- 5 percent
Values: 0000 to 5000 feet
Section 4.3: Plot Level Data Collected in the Field
Item 4.3.6.6 RP AZIMUTH/DISTANCE TO SUBPLOT NUMBER (PNW) [RP_SUBP_PNWRS]
Record the 1-digit number of the subplot which is referenced from the RP. Always reference to subplot 1
unless it is inaccessible (e.g., hazardous, denied access, census/non-census water) or a significant
obstacle exists between the RP and subplot 1. If subplot 1 center is inaccessible, the PC pin should be
installed at the lowest numbered subplot that is accessible.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance; No errors
Values: 1 to 4
Item 4.3.6.7 RP NOTES (PNW) [RP_NOTES_PNWRS]
Record notes to explain any special RP situation that may need clarification for future plot visits (e.g., shrub
species, height/size of rock, RP not visited, RP AZIMUTH and RP HORIZONTAL DISTANCE collected with
a GPS, etc.). Required if RP TYPE = 4 - other.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1: as needed to describe a special situation with
the plot RP
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Value: Single words or abbreviated sentences
31
pg.
SUBSECTION 4.3.7 ITEMS RECORDED ON THE PLOT CARD
The following items are collected and recorded on the paper plot card; see Appendix M, Plot Jacket, for
descriptions of these items and detailed instructions:
•
Plot Information (plot number, state, county, start date, end date, crew)
•
RP Data (species, diameter, azimuth, horizontal distance, to subplot number)
•
Plot Travel Time (travel time to plot, measurement time, travel time from plot)
•
Plot Access Description (travel route)
•
Plot Narrative Description (condition[s], disturbance[s], treatment[s], hazard[s], and issues not
evident in the data)
•
Plot Diagram (landforms, hazards, special features)
•
Plot Check List
SECTION 4.4 GPS COORDINATES
Use a global positioning system (GPS) unit to determine the plot coordinates and elevation of all plot
locations, including nonforest and nonsampled plot locations when SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1.
Multiple records per plot will exist in the GPS screen; records are differentiated by GPS LOCATION TYPE
(Item 4.4.1.5). Typically a set of coordinates for three locations: LZ, RP, and PC will be entered into the data
recorder, each requiring separate records or lines of data. Additional GPS records (i.e., waypoints) may be
recorded and should include a brief description in GPS NOTES (Item 4.4.2.9).
SUBSECTION 4.4.1 GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, AND COORDINATE SYSTEM
Consult the GPS unit operating manual or other regional instructions to ensure that the GPS unit internal
settings, including datum and coordinate system, are correctly configured.
Use the NAD83 datum and the geographic coordinate system. See Appendix J (GPS Operating Guide) for
instructions on setting up and using the GPS unit.
Item 4.4.1.1 GPS UNIT TYPE (CORE 1.16.3) [GPS_TYPE]
Record the kind of GPS unit used to collect coordinates. If suitable coordinates cannot be obtained, record
”0”.
When collected: When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code GPS UNIT TYPE
0
GPS coordinates not collected, including nonsampled plots (requires GPS
NOTES)
1
Rockwell Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR)
2
Other brand capable of field-averaging
3
Other brands capable of producing files that can be post-processed
4
Other brands not capable of field-averaging or post-processing
Record the last six digits of the serial number on the GPS unit used.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE > 0
Field width: 6 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 000001 to 999999
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
Item 4.4.1.2 GPS SERIAL NUMBER (CORE 1.16.4) [GPS_SERIAL_NBR]
pg.
32
Item 4.4.1.3 GPS DATUM (CORE 1.16.5) [GPS_DATUM]
This is an auto-generated code indicating the map datum that the GPS coordinates are collected in (i.e., the
map datum selected on the GPS unit to display the coordinates).
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE > 0
Field width: 5 characters (cccnn)
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
NAD83 North American Datum of 1983
Item 4.4.1.4 COORDINATE SYSTEM (CORE 1.16.6) [GPS_COORD_SYS]
This is an auto-generated code indicating the type of coordinate system used to obtain readings.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE > 0
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
Geographic coordinate system
1
Item 4.4.1.5 GPS LOCATION TYPE (PNW) [GPS_LOC_TYPE]
Record the location type for coordinates collected on the ground.
When collected: All GPS records
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Type
1
LZ/TR
2
RP
3
PC
4
Subplot 2
5
Subplot 3
6
Subplot 4
7
Other
Description
Landing zone / Truck parking spot (required)
Reference point (required)
Plot center (PC) (required)
Use only if PC not possible
Use only if PC not possible
Use only if PC not possible
Describe in GPS NOTES and on plot card
SUBSECTION 4.4.2 COLLECTING READINGS
Collect at least 180 GPS readings at the plot center. These may be collected in a file for post-processing or
averaged by the GPS unit. Each individual position should have an error of less than 70 feet if possible (the
error of all the averaged readings is far less).
Section 4.4: GPS Coordinates
Soon after arriving at plot center, use the GPS unit to attempt to collect coordinates. If suitable positions
(180 readings at error less than or equal to 70 feet) cannot be obtained, try again before leaving the plot
center.
If it is still not possible to get suitable coordinates from plot center, attempt to obtain them from a location
within 200 feet of plot center. Obtain the azimuth and horizontal distance from the “offset” location to plot
center. Record the azimuth and horizontal distance to the plot center as described in Item 4.4.3.1 and Item
4.4.3.2.
Coordinates may be collected further than 200 feet away from the plot center if a laser measuring device is
used to determine the horizontal distance from the “offset” location to plot center. Record the azimuth and
horizontal distance to plot center as described in Item 4.4.3.1 and Item 4.4.3.2.
In all cases try to obtain at least 180 positions before recording the coordinates.
33
pg.
Item 4.4.2.1 LATITUDE DEGREES (CORE 1.16.7.1) [GPS_LAT_DEG]
Record the latitude degrees as determined by GPS.
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 51-70
Item 4.4.2.2 LATITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (CORE 1.16.7.2) [GPS_LAT_DMIN]
Record the latitude decimal minutes as determined by GPS.
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 7 digits
Tolerance: +/- 140 feet
Values: 00.0000 – 59.9999
Item 4.4.2.3 LONGITUDE DEGREES (CORE 1.16.8.1) [GPS_LONG_DEG]
Record the longitude degrees as determined by GPS.
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 129-165
Item 4.4.2.4 LONGITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (CORE 1.16.8.2) [GPS_LONG_DMIN]
Record the longitude decimal minutes as determined by GPS.
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 7 digits
Tolerance: +/- 140 feet
Values: 00.0000-59.9999
Item 4.4.2.5 GPS ELEVATION (CORE 1.16.15) [GPS_ELEV]
Record the elevation above mean sea level, in feet, as determined by GPS.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1, 2 or 4
Field width: 6 digits (1st digit is + or -, last 5 digits are numeric)
Tolerance: +/- 280 feet
Values: -00100 to +20000
Item 4.4.2.6 GPS ERROR (CORE 1.16.16) [GPS_ERROR]
Record the error as shown on the GPS unit to the nearest foot. As described in Subsection 4.4.2, make
every effort to collect readings only when the error is less than or equal to 70 feet. However, if after trying
several different times during the day, at several different locations, this is not possible, record readings with
an error of up to 999 feet.
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1 or 2
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 000 – 999
(071 to 999 if an error of less than 70 cannot be obtained)
pg.
34
Item 4.4.2.7 NUMBER OF READINGS (CORE 1.16.17) [GPS_NBR_READINGS]
Record a 3-digit code indicating how many readings were averaged by the GPS unit to calculate the plot
coordinates. Collect at least 180 readings if possible.
The PDR requires that the number of averaged readings be entered. The Garmin GPSmap76Cx uses a
counter to record the number of readings. The update rate for this unit is approximately one reading each
second. From the bottom of the Mark Waypoint screen, scroll to the left and highlight “Avg.” Press enter and
the unit will begin to average the points location, this number will be displayed at the bottom as
“Measurement Count”. When this number reaches 180, press “enter” again to continue with marking the
waypoint. See Appendix J (GPS Operating Guide) for more information. Enter the measurement count for
the NUMBER OF READINGS in the PDR.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1 or 2
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 001 to 999
Item 4.4.2.8 GPS FILENAME (CORE OPTIONAL 1.16.18) [GPS_FILENAME]
Record the filename containing the GPS positions collected on the plot.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 3
Field width: 15 characters
Tolerance: No errors
Values: English words, phrases and numbers
Item 4.4.2.9 GPS NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular GPS record being defined.
When collected: As needed; required with GPS LOCATION TYPE = 7 or GPS UNIT TYPE = 0
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: Words and abbreviated sentences
SUBSECTION 4.4.3 CORRECTION FOR OFFSET LOCATION
As described in Subsection 4.4.2, coordinates may be collected at a location other than the plot center (an
“offset” location). Record the two data items below.
Item 4.4.3.1 AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (CORE 1.16.13) [GPS_AZM]
Section 4.4: GPS Coordinates
Record the azimuth from the location where coordinates were collected to actual plot center. If coordinates
are collected at plot center, record 000.
When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2, 3 or 4
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 3 degrees
Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center
001 to 360 when coordinates are not collected at plot center
35
pg.
Item 4.4.3.2 DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (CORE 1.16.14) [GPS_DIST]
Record the horizontal distance in feet from the location where coordinates were collected to the actual plot
center. If coordinates are collected at plot center, record 000. As described in Subsection 4.4.2, if a laser
range finder is used to determine DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER, offset locations may be up to 999 feet
from the plot center. If a range finder is not used, the offset location must be within 200 feet.
When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2, 3 or 4
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 6 feet
Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center
001 to 200 when a Laser range finder is not used to determine distance
001 to 999 when a Laser range finder is used to determine distance
SUBSECTION 4.4.4 DOWNLOADED PLOT COORDINATES
For most plots, previous estimates of plot coordinates (pinprick location) will be available. These estimates
come from several sources and will be of undocumented accuracy, but can be used as an aid in plot
location. If available, the approximate plot coordinates will be printed on the previous plot data sheets and
on the plot jacket label. They can be saved as a waypoint on the GPS unit and used to help locate the plot.
Do not change any of the downloaded/printed plot coordinates codes.
Item 4.4.4.1 PREVIOUS LATITUDE DEGREES (AFSL) [PREV_LAT_DEG_PNWRS]
This field indicates the latitude degrees as determined from USGS maps, aerial photos, or a previous plot
visit.
When collected: Downloaded for most plots
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 51-70
Item 4.4.4.2 PREVIOUS LATITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (AFSL) [PREV_LAT_DMIN_PNWRS]
This field indicates the latitude decimal minutes as determined from USGS maps, aerial photos, or a
previous plot visit.
When collected: Downloaded for most plots
Field width: 7 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 00.0000 – 59.9999
Item 4.4.4.3 PREVIOUS LONGITUDE DEGREES (AFSL) [PREV_LONG_DEG_PNWRS]
This field indicates the longitude degrees as determined from USGS maps, aerial photos, or a previous plot
visit.
Item 4.4.4.4 PREVIOUS LONGITUDE DECIMAL MINUTES (AFSL) [PREV_LONG_DMIN_PNWRS]
This field indicates the longitude decimal minutes as determined from USGS maps, aerial photos, or a
previous plot visit.
When collected: Downloaded for most plots
Field width: 7 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 00.0000 – 59.9999
Chapter 4: Plot Level Data
When collected: Downloaded for most plots
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 129-165
pg.
36
Item 4.4.4.5 PREVIOUS COORDINATES METHOD (PNW) [PREV_COORD_METHOD_PNWRS]
This field indicates the method by which previous plot coordinates were obtained.
Section 4.4: GPS Coordinates
When collected: Downloaded for most plots
Field width: 1 character
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code PREVIOUS COORDINATES METHOD
D
Digitized from USGS maps
M
Digitized (MDSD) from PI photography (usually small [broad] scale)
P
Coordinates taken from old PI tables - sometimes computer generated and
plotted on maps or digitized from quad maps
G
Collected at the plot location using a GPS unit
T
Target (TGT) coordinates originally derived from Albers meters projection
I
Image (IMG) coordinates derived from ortho photo and rectified to match
location of the pinprick
S
Digitized from SPOT imagery
N
Coordinates provided by national forests (R5 and R6) - of unknown origin
37
pg.
CHAPTER 5 CONDITION CLASS
The Forest Inventory and Analysis (FIA) plot is a cluster of four subplots arranged in a fixed pattern. A plot
may straddle more than one condition class; subplots are never moved or reconfigured in order to confine
all four subplots to a single condition class. Every plot has at least one condition class: the condition class
present at plot center (PC, the center of subplot 1). Condition class attributes record information about
forest structure, composition, and disturbance. This information allows researchers to group and analyze
similar forest types, understand management practices used by different landowners, examine the effects
of disturbance, and classify land types.
SECTION 5.1 DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS
Step 1. Delineate the plot area by CONDITION CLASS STATUS
The first attribute considered when defining a condition class is CONDITION CLASS STATUS. The area
sampled by a plot is assigned to condition classes based upon the following differences in CONDITION
CLASS STATUS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Accessible forest land
Nonforest land
Noncensus water
Census water
Nonsampled
Forest land and measurable nonforest land define the population of interest for FIA purposes. These are
the areas where most of the data collection is conducted.
Step 2. Further subdivide accessible forest land by six delineation variables
Any condition class sampled as accessible forest land may be further subdivided, in order of listed
priority, into smaller condition classes if distinct, contrasting condition classes are present because of
variation in any of the following attributes within the sampled area:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
RESERVED STATUS
OWNER GROUP
FOREST TYPE
STAND SIZE CLASS
REGENERATION STATUS
TREE DENSITY
No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting accessible forest land condition classes.
For each condition class recognized, several "ancillary attributes" that help describe the condition will be
collected, but will not be used for delineation purposes. See Subsection 5.5.3, Ancillary (NonDelineating) Data Items, for more information.
Note: All condition classes delineated within the 24-foot fixed-radius are mapped on the plot card.
See Chapter 7, Boundary References, for instruction on how to map condition class boundaries.
SECTION 5.2 CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS
Accessible forest land is land that is within the population of interest, is accessible, is on a subplot that can
be occupied at subplot center, can safely be visited, and meets the following criteria:
The condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees of any size (Appendix D, Tree Species List) or has
been at least 10-percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s)
that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, intensive grazing, or
recreation activities.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
SUBSECTION 5.2.1 ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND
pg.
38
To qualify as forest land, the prospective condition must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide
measured stem-to-stem from the outer-most edge. Forested strips must be 120.0 feet wide for a continuous
length of at least 363.0 feet in order to meet the acre threshold. Forested strips that do not meet these
requirements are classified as part of the adjacent nonforest land.
Transition zones and forest/nonforest
encroachment – When an accessible forest land
condition encroaches into a nonforest land
condition, the border between forest and
nonforest is often a gradual change in tree cover
or stocking with no clear and abrupt boundary. In
addition, it may be difficult to determine exactly
where the forested area meets the minimum
stocking criteria and where it does not. For these
cases, determine where the land clearly meets
the 10 percent minimum forest land stocking,
and where it clearly is less than required
stocking; divide the zone between these points
in half, and determine the side of the zone on
which the subplot center is located. Classify the
condition class of the subplot based on this line
(Figure 5.1).
For example, at measurement time 1, a clear
and distinct boundary existed between the
forest and nonforest land condition classes. Figure 5.1: Example of classifying the condition class of
At time 2, however, there now exists a zone the subplot in a transition zone with forest/nonforest
encroachment.
of regeneration or small diameter trees
between the previous forest condition and
where the nonforest clearly remains. If the zone of encroachment is clearly stocked where it meets the
nonforest, classify the entire zone as forest. If the zone is clearly nonforest up to the original stand, call it
all nonforest. If the encroachment or transition zone is not clearly stocked where it meets the nonforest,
determine where it is clearly stocked (forest) and where it is clearly not stocked (nonforest); divide this
zone in half, and classify the entire subplot based on which side of the line the subplot center falls.
Section 5.2: Condition Class Status Definitions
Treated strips – Occasionally, crews will come across plantations of trees, in which rows of trees alternate
with strips of vegetation that have been bulldozed, mowed, tilled, treated with herbicide, or crushed.
Because these strip treatments are conducted to optimize growth or to release the stand, the areas are
considered forest land, and the treatment is considered a timber stand improvement operation. Do not
confuse these practices with similar treatments on nonforest lands such as yards or rights-of-way. Contact
with the landowner may help determine the intent of a treatment.
Indistinct boundary due to the condition minimum-width definition – Do not subdivide subplots where a
condition class may change due only to the forest vs. nonforest minimum width (120.0 feet) definition.
Although the point where the definition changes from forest to nonforest creates an invisible "line" between
conditions, this definitional boundary is not distinct and obvious. See Figure 5.2 and Figure 5.3. Where
the point of the definition change occurs on the subplot, determine only if the subplot center is on the forest
or nonforest side of that approximate boundary, and classify the entire subplot based on the condition of the
subplot center. If the boundary crosses through the center of the subplot, classify the subplot as the
condition it most resembles. If the boundary occurs between subplots, classify each subplot based on its
relation to the definitional boundary.
39
pg.
Figure 5.2: Forest condition narrows within a
nonforest land condition. Examine the location of
the subplot center in reference to the approximate
line where the forest narrows to 120.0 feet wide. In
this example the entire subplot is classified as
forest.
Figure 5.3: Nonforest land condition narrows
within a forest condition. Examine the location of
the subplot center in reference to the
approximate line where the nonforest narrows to
120.0 feet wide. In this example the entire
subplot is classified as forest.
Conditions that meet the 10-percent tree stocking threshold may be considered nonforest based on land
use. Indications of nonforest use may include current extreme grazing, the absence of forest vegetation,
and evidence of human habitation and use around maintained structures such as landscaping, gardens,
fences, lawns, and play areas. The absence of forest vegetation means that some or all layers of the
species present – trees, shrubs, and forbs – differ from what one would expect on forest land undisturbed
by nonforest use. For example, a fenced farm lot may have forest trees present, but if extreme sustained
grazing has severely diminished or eliminated forest shrub and forb communities and tree regeneration is
stifled, the farm lot is likely nonforest
SUBSECTION 5.2.2 NONFOREST LAND
Nonforest land is any land within the sample that does not meet the definition of accessible forest land or
any of the other CONDITION CLASS STATUS values defined in Subsection 5.2.3 or Subsection 5.2.4 as
noncensus or Census water. To qualify, the area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide, with
five exceptions discussed in Section 5.4, Delineating Condition Classes within Accessible Forest Land. Do
not consider evidence of "possible" or future development or conversion. A nonforest land condition will
remain in the sample and will be examined at the next occasion to see if it has become forest land.
Note: When a condition class is within Chugach National Forest boundaries (ADMINISTRATIVE
FOREST CODE = 1004), land meeting the nonforest land definition (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2)
that is accessible and within the fixed-radius subplot is considered a measurable nonforest condition
class. Certain data items are recorded in measurable nonforest conditions that are not typically
measured in nonforest conditions; these are identified in the associated “when collected” field for
individual data items.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1); or
all measurable nonforest condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2 and
ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE = 1004)
Example: If accessible forest land, nonforest urban land, and nonforest cropland are all present
within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the forest land condition and map each nonforest land use
as a separate condition class.
When no accessible forest land condition or measurable nonforest condition classes exist within
the 24.0-foot fixed-radius, record only the nonforest land use at the subplot center.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
Delineate all nonforest condition classes on ground visited subplots when an accessible forest land
condition or a measurable nonforest condition class is present within the 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot
(see Subsection 5.5.4, Determining Condition Classes on Nonforest Land).
pg.
40
Plots that are entirely nonforest fall into one of the following three categories:
1. The plot is visited on the ground (SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1).
A plot file is created in the field data recorder.
GPS coordinates are collected.
PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected at each subplot center.
If measurable nonforest land, additional data items are collected.
Invasive plant protocol is completed.
2. The plot is viewed from a distance (SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 2 or 4)
A plot file is created in the field data recorder.
No GPS coordinates are collected.
PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center.
3. The plot is not field visited or viewed from a distance. (SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 3 or 4)
A plot data file is created in the office.
No GPS coordinates are collected.
PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center.
SUBSECTION 5.2.3 NONCENSUS WATER
Noncensus water includes lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 1.0 acre to 4.5 acres in
size; and rivers, streams, canals, etc. 30.0 feet to 200.0 feet wide. The width of a water feature is measured
between points on either side up to which water prevents the establishment and survival of trees (where
nonforest land is mapped next to water, use the point where water prevents the establishment of woody
vegetation).
If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in noncensus water do not install the point, even if it can be
occupied safely.
•
No field measurements are made on that subplot.
•
Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures (see Subsection 3.4.2,
Establishing Subplots when Plot Center is Inaccessible, for instructions on how to install a plot
without access to plot center).
Section 5.2: Condition Class Status Definitions
If the subplot has an accessible condition at subplot center and has noncensus water present anywhere
else within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius boundary:
•
Map the noncensus water area as a separate condition class.
•
Use normal procedures to map and measure other condition classes.
SUBSECTION 5.2.4 CENSUS WATER
Census water includes ocean, lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 4.5 acres in size and
larger; and rivers, streams, canals, etc. more than 200 feet wide (1990 U.S. Census definition). The width of
a water feature is measured between points on either side up to which water prevents the establishment
and survival of trees (where nonforest land is mapped next to water, use the point where water prevents the
establishment of woody vegetation).
If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Census water do not install the point, even if it can be
occupied safely.
•
No field measurements are made on that subplot.
•
Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures (see Subsection 3.4.2,
Establishing Subplots when Plot Center is Inaccessible, for instructions on how to install a plot
without access to plot center).
If the subplot has an accessible condition at subplot center and has Census water present anywhere else
within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius boundary:
41
pg.
•
Map the Census water area as a separate condition class.
•
Use normal procedures to map and measure other condition classes.
SUBSECTION 5.2.5 NONSAMPLED
See CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (Item 5.5.5.1) for descriptions of land that qualifies as
nonsampled.
Nonsampled land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5) may be subdivided into condition classes that are
based on differences in nonsampled reason.
If a subplot center (including subplot 1) is located in any nonsampled area, as described in CONDITION
NONSAMPLED REASON, the entire subplot is considered to be nonsampled. Record the attributes as
described in Subsection 5.5.5, Nonsampled Condition Class Attributes. Establish and measure other
subplots following normal procedures. A plot, subplot, or portion of a subplot is hazardous according to the
crew's judgment.
If an entire plot is nonsampled, record only one nonsampled condition: the condition at plot center.
If the center of a subplot is accessible, but there is a nonsampled area within the 24.0-foot fixed-radius
boundary:
•
Map the nonsampled area as a separate condition class.
•
Use normal procedures to map and measure other condition classes.
SECTION 5.3 DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION
CLASS STATUS
The first step in delineating condition classes is to recognize differences in CONDITION CLASS STATUS.
The most common difference is adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land. Adjacent accessible
forest land and nonforest land condition classes are recognized only if each of the two prospective
condition classes is at least 1.0 acre in size, and each is at least 120.0 feet in width. These size and width
minimums apply to both accessible forest land and nonforest land.
Within an accessible forest land condition class, unimproved roads, rock outcrops, and natural nonforest
openings less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width are considered forest land and are not
delineated as a separate nonforest land condition class.
Within a nonforest land condition class, forested areas or linear strips of trees less than 1.0 acre in size and
less than 120.0 feet in width are considered part of the nonforest land condition class.
Five exceptions to these size and width requirements apply:
Forest
StripStrip
<120.0
Forest
<120 Feet
ft wideWide
Improved Road, Development, or
R.O.W.
Right-of-Way
<120feet
ft wide
<120.0
wide
Accessible Forest Land Condition
Figure 5.4: Example with a
developed nonforest strip <120 feet
wide. Forest strip, while <120 feet
wide, is still part of the accessible
forest land condition.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
1. Developed nonforest land condition: human-caused
nonforest land condition classes such as homes or cabins
that are less than 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet in width
and are surrounded by forest land. There are three kinds of
developed nonforest land conditions that do not have to
meet area or width requirements. Developed nonforest
conditions less than 120 feet wide or less than an acre in
size cannot fragment an otherwise forested condition into
nonforest pieces (see Figure 5.4, Figure 5.5, and Figure
5.6).
pg.
42
Forest Strip <120 ft wide
Improved Road, Development, or
R.O.W.
>=120 ft wide
Accessible Forest Land Condition
Section 5.3: Delineating Condition Classes Differing in Condition Class Status
Figure 5.5: Example with a
developed nonforest strip ≥120 feet
wide. Forest strip is not part of the
accessible forest land condition.
A. Improved roads: paved roads, gravel
roads, or improved dirt roads regularly
Forest
maintained for long-term continuing use
>1acre and > 120.0 feet wide
by normal passenger vehicles.
Generally constructed using machinery.
Improved Road
The area where the original topography
has been disturbed by cutbanks and fill
Area <120.0 feet wide between switchbacks
is considered part of the road, if that
<120.0 feet wide
area is maintained. Unimproved traces
and roads created for skidding logs are
Area <120.0 feet wide between switchbacks
not considered improved roads.
B. Maintained rights-of-way: corridors
created for railroads, power lines, gas
lines, and canals that are periodically
Forest
treated to limit the establishment and
>1acre and > 120.0 feet wide
growth of trees and shrubs. Areas under
power lines are considered maintained
Figure 5.6: Example of a switchback road where the
rights-of-way even if no current
area between the switchbacks is still forest land.
vegetation treatment is evident.
C. Developments: structures and the
maintained area next to a structure, all less than 1.0 acre in size and surrounded by forest land.
Examples of developments are houses or trailers on very small lots, communication installations
in a small cleared area within forest land, and barns and sheds.
2. Distinct, alternating strips of forest and nonforest land: this situation occurs when a plot or subplot
samples a condition class that is less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width. The
condition class is one of a series of parallel strips of forest and nonforest land in which none of the
strips meet the minimum width requirement. This exception applies only to nonforest land conditions
that are not listed under exception number 1, e.g., improved roads, maintained rights-of-way, and
developments.
For many small intermingled strips, determine the total area that the alternating strips occupy, and
classify according to the CONDITION CLASS STATUS (forest land or nonforest land) that occupies
the greater area. If the area of alternating strips is so large or indistinct as to make a total area
determination impractical, then classify the sample as forest land.
43
pg.
For two alternating
strips of forest and
nonforest between two
qualifying areas of
nonforest land and
forest land, see Figure
5.7. This figure
delineates the boundary
between the forest and
nonforest land condition
classes for four different
examples. The plot
center defines the plot
condition for all strips
covered by the arrow.
Any subplot that falls in
the alternating strips
uses this rule. Any
subplot that falls in
assigned nonforest /
forest is assigned that
Figure 5.7: Example of alternating strips of forested and nonforested
type. Again, this
conditions. PC is the plot center (center of subplot 1).
exception applies only
to nonforest land
conditions that are not listed under exception number 1, e.g., improved roads, maintained rights-ofway, and developments.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
3. The 120.0-foot minimum width
for delineation does not apply
when a corner angle is 90
degrees or greater (see Figure
5.8).
4. Linear water features: natural
water features that are linear in
shape such as streams and
rivers. A linear water feature
must meet the definition for
Census or noncensus water to
be a separate condition class.
Therefore, a linear water
feature must be at least 30.0
feet wide and cover at least 1.0
acre. The width of a linear water
feature is measured across its
channel between points on
either side up to which water
prevents the establishment and
survival of trees (or other woody Figure 5.8: Illustration of the 90 degree corner rule. The dotted
lines do not create nonforest land conditions.
vegetation if the adjacent
condition is nonforest). To
determine whether a linear water feature qualifies as a separate condition class, rely on all available
information on hand such as aerial photos, topographic maps, past survey land calls, and ocular
estimates at the current survey visit. Linear water features that do not meet the definition for Census
or noncensus water should be classified as forest land only if bounded by forest land on both shores.
Crews are not expected to measure the length of a linear water feature to determine if it meets the
1.0 acre requirement; use professional judgment and common sense on any linear water feature. A
30-foot wide stream needs to be 1452 feet long to be an acre in size.
5. Nonsampled conditions within accessible forest land are delineated, regardless of size, as a
separate condition.
pg.
44
SECTION 5.4 DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE
FOREST LAND
Accessible forest land is subdivided into condition classes that are based on differences in RESERVED
STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, and TREE
DENSITY. Section 5.1, Determination of Condition Class, applies when delineating contrasting forest
condition classes. Specific criteria apply for each of the six attributes and are documented by attribute in
Item 5.5.2.1 (RESERVED STATUS) through Item 5.5.2.7 (TREE DENSITY). “Stands” are defined by the
plurality of stocking for all live trees that are not overtopped.
Additionally, each separate forest condition class recognized within accessible forest land must be at least
1.0 acre in size and at least 120.0 feet in width. If prospective contrasting forest land condition classes do
not each meet these minimum size and width requirements, the most similar prospective conditions should
be combined until these minimums are attained.
No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting condition classes within accessible forest
land. For each condition class recognized, many “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition will be
collected, but will not be used for delineation purposes (see Ancillary [Non-Delineating] Data Items,
Subsection 5.5.3).
General instructions for delineating condition classes within accessible forest lands:
Section 5.4: Delineating Condition Classes within Accessible Forest Land
1. Distinct boundary within a subplot, or microplot – Separate condition classes ARE recognized if,
within a subplot, or microplot, two (or more) distinctly different condition classes are present and
delineated by a distinct, abrupt boundary. The boundary is referenced (see Boundary References,
Chapter 7).
2. Indistinct boundary within a subplot – Separate condition classes are NOT recognized if the
prospective condition classes abut along an indistinct transition zone, rather than on an abrupt,
obvious boundary. Only one condition is recognized, and the subplot is classified entirely as the
condition it most resembles.
Example: The four subplots all sample only accessible forest land. Subplots 1, 3, and 4 sample
what is clearly a stand of large-diameter trees. Subplot 2 falls in the middle of a stand-size
transition zone. In the zone, the large-diameter stand phases into a sapling stand.
Subplot 2 must not be divided into two condition classes on the basis of stand size. Instead, it is
treated entirely as part of the large-diameter condition class or is assigned entirely to a new
condition class that is classified as a seedling-sapling stand. The latter occurs only if the crew
thinks the entire subplot is more like a stand of seedlings-saplings than a stand of large-diameter
trees; then the boundary between the large- and small-diameter stands is assumed to occur
between and not on the subplots.
3. A boundary or transition zone between fixed-radii plots that sample distinctly different condition
classes – Separate condition classes are recognized and recorded when a valid attribute obviously
differs between two fixed-radius plots, but a distinct boundary or indistinct transition zone exists
outside the sampled (fixed-radius) area of the subplots. In such cases, a boundary, if present, is not
referenced.
Example: The northernmost subplot (2) samples entirely accessible forest land. The other three
subplots (1, 3, and 4) fall clearly in a nonforest meadow. Between subplot 1 and 2 is a transition
zone; the number of trees present goes from none to what clearly represents at least 10-percent
tree stocking. Two condition classes are sampled: accessible forest land sampled on subplot 2,
and nonforest land sampled on the other subplots.
4. Riparian forest area – A riparian forest area is defined as a forest area between 30.0 and 120.0 feet
wide, and 1.0 acre or more in size (cumulative) and adjacent to but not necessarily present on both
sides of a naturally occurring or artificially created body of water or watercourse with continuous or
intermittent flow. Riparian forest areas may be associated with but not limited to streams, rivers,
lakes, sloughs, seeps, springs, marshes, bogs, beaver ponds, sink holes, cypress domes and ponds,
human-made ditches and canals. A riparian forest area must be associated “within forest” (i.e., must
be surrounded by forest on at least one side) and contain at least one distinct and obvious change in
a condition class delineation attribute from its adjacent accessible forest land condition class. Figure
5.9 through Figure 5.14 provide examples of when to delineate riparian forest area as a separate
45
pg.
condition class. This special size allowance for an accessible riparian forest land condition class only
applies if the riparian area would otherwise meet the definition for accessible forest land (i.e., the
riparian area meets stocking requirements and is not subject to nonforest land uses as described in
Subsection 5.5.4).
Note: When the width of forest adjacent to a stream is between 120.0 feet and 150.0 feet and the
width of the riparian forest is at least 30.0 feet wide, the rules for identifying the non-riparian forest (at
least 30.0 feet but less than 120.0 feet) need to be modified. The non-riparian forest can be between
30.0 feet and 120.0 feet and mapped as a separate condition as long as it meets the criteria for
delineating a separate condition class, otherwise it will be an inclusion in the riparian forest condition
class.
A riparian forest area (i.e., a band of alder trees along a creek within a Douglas-fir condition class) is
typically different from the surrounding forest because of forest type. However, a change in any of the
six condition class delineating variables may make it a candidate for a riparian area condition class.
An area 30 feet wide needs to be 1452 feet long to be an acre in size. An area 60 feet wide needs to
be 726 feet long, and an area 90 feet wide needs to be 484 feet long to be an acre in size.
Figure 5.10: (CORE) Forest type B is a separate
condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between
30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is ≥ 1.0 acre in size.
Figure 5.11: (CORE) If the stream is < 30.0 feet wide,
forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if
the sum of the two widths of the bands including the
stream falls between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide,
and is ≥ 1.0 acre in size.
Figure 5.12: (CORE) If the stream is > 30.0 feet wide,
forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if
either of the two widths of the bands falls between 30.0
feet and 120.0 feet wide and is ≥ 1.0 acre in size.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
Figure 5.9: (CORE) Forest type B is separate
condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between
30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is ≥ 1.0 acre in size.
pg.
46
Figure 5.13: (CORE) Forest type B is a separate
condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between
30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.
Figure 5.14: (CORE) In a nonforested area, a band of
forest type B that is < 120.0 feet wide is NOT
considered a riparian area. It is not a separate
condition class at all.
SECTION 5.5 CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
A CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and a classification for CONDITION CLASS STATUS are required for
every condition class sampled on a plot. For each condition class classified as accessible forest land, a
classification is required for each of the following attributes:
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
5.5.2.4
5.5.2.5
5.5.2.6
5.5.2.7
RESERVED STATUS
OWNER GROUP
FOREST TYPE
STAND SIZE CLASS
REGENERATION STATUS
TREE DENSITY
ATTRIBUTES WHERE A CHANGE CAUSES
A SEPARATE ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND
CONDITION CLASS
5.5.3.1
5.5.3.2
5.5.3.3
5.5.3.4
5.5.3.5
5.5.3.6
5.5.3.7
5.5.3.8
5.5.3.9
OWNER CLASS
ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE
PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES
AGE BASIS CODE
STAND AGE
PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS
DISTURBANCE (UP TO THREE CODED)
DISTURBANCE YEAR (ONE PER
DISTURBANCE)
ANCILLARY - CHANGES DO NOT
DELINEATE A NEW ACCESSIBLE FOREST
LAND CONDITION CLASS
5.5.3.14 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE (UP TO THREE
CODED)
5.5.3.15 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR (UP TO
THREE CODED)
5.5.3.20 TREATMENT (UP TO THREE CODED)
5.5.3.21 TREATMENT YEAR (ONE PER TREATMENT)
5.5.3.26 HISTORICAL TREATMENT (UP TO THREE
CODED)
5.5.3.27 HISTORICAL TREATMENT YEAR (ONE PER
TREATMENT)
When classifying CONDITION CLASS STATUS, OWNER GROUP, RESERVED STATUS, and PRESENT
NONFOREST LAND USE, base the classification on what is present within the area defined by the fixedradius plot (subplot, or microplot).
All other data items including: FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, STAND
AGE, TREE DENSITY, DISTURBANCE, TREATMENT, and PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS, should be
determined over the entire condition, including but not exclusive to what is encountered within the subplot/
microplot fixed-radius.
47
pg.
AK-Remeasurement plots: The downloaded condition class delineation data items should always be
reviewed and updated as necessary. If changes have occurred, reassess the condition class boundaries
mapped by the previous crew. On AK-Remeasurement plots use the mapping on the previous location
record (now called plot card) to review the previous condition class layouts and assess whether any change
has occurred. See Chapter 7, Boundary References, for further instruction regarding boundary mapping.
SUBSECTION 5.5.1 GENERAL CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES
General attributes such as CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and a classification for CONDITION CLASS
STATUS are required for every condition class sampled on a plot.
Item 5.5.1.1 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (CORE 2.4.1) [CONDID]
On a plot, assign and record a number for each condition class. The condition class at plot center (the
center of subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Number condition classes sequentially as encountered
going from subplot 1 through 4, numerically. For AK-Remeasurement plots retain the previous CONDITION
CLASS NUMBER assignments whenever possible, even if they were assigned in the wrong order.
When collected: All condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1 to 9
Item 5.5.1.2 CONDITION CLASS STATUS (CORE 2.4.2) [COND_STATUS_CD]
Record the code that describes the status of the condition. The instructions in Delineating Condition
Classes Differing in Condition Class Status (Section 5.3) and Condition Class Attributes (Section 5.5) apply
when delineating condition classes that differ by CONDITION CLASS STATUS.
When collected: All condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
1
Accessible forest land
2
Nonforest land
3
Noncensus water
4
Census water
5
Nonsampled
Item 5.5.1.3 PREVIOUS CONDITION CLASS STATUS (PNW) [PREV_COND_STATUS_CD_PNWRS]
Downloaded code indicating sampling status of the condition class recorded at the previous inventory. Do
not change the downloaded code.
SUBSECTION 5.5.2 ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND DELINEATING DATA ITEMS
Data items described in this subsection determine if accessible forest land qualifies to be subdivided into
separate condition classes, with the exception of PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP CORRECTED which
serves as a code to confirm changes in owner group. Section 5.1, Determination of Condition Class,
applies when delineating contrasting forest condition classes based on these data items.
Some of these data items are collected regardless of condition status (e.g., RESERVED STATUS and
OWNER GROUP are collected on nonforest conditions).
Chapter 5: Condition Class
When collected: Downloaded when PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
1
Accessible forest land
2
Nonforest land
3
Noncensus water
4
Census water
5
Nonsampled
pg.
48
Item 5.5.2.1 RESERVED STATUS (CORE 2.5.1) [RESERVCD]
Record the code that identifies the reserved designation for the condition. Reserved land is withdrawn by
law(s) prohibiting the management of land for the production of wood products (not merely controlling or
prohibiting wood-harvesting methods). Such authority is vested in a public agency or department, and
supersedes rights of ownership. The prohibition against management for wood products cannot be
changed through decision of the land manager (management agency) or through a change in land
management personnel, but rather is permanent in nature. Such areas include: Congressionally designated
wilderness areas, national parks, state parks, and other lands protected by law or deed.
Private owners such as The Nature Conservancy may have areas of land on which timber harvest is
prohibited by deed. Record land as reserved only if the landowner has verified this status or if somehow it is
otherwise clearly defined (e.g., posted sign).
Note: The value for this data item may be downloaded (at least for condition class 1) for all plots. However,
when field visited, check to be sure the value is correct for the condition.
When collected: All plots (CONDITION STATUS is not null)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
0
Not reserved
1
Reserved
Item 5.5.2.2 OWNER GROUP (CORE 2.5.2) [OWNGRPCD]
Record the OWNER GROUP code identifying the ownership of the land in the condition class. Separate
conditions because of changes in OWNER GROUP are recognized only where differences can be clearly
identified on the ground when visiting the plot (e.g., blazed trees or posted boundary signs). When federal
land is owned and administered by two separate entities (e.g., BLM and Forest Service), this data item
records the legal owner of the land, not the administrator.
Note: The value may be downloaded (at least for condition class 1 from the current field season review
tables); however, check to be sure it is correct.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) and
nonforest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS 2 or 5)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Value: Code Description
10
Forest Service
20
Other Federal
30
State and Local Government
40
Private
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
Item 5.5.2.3 PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP (PNW) [PREV_OWNGRPCD_PNWRS]
On AK-Remeasurement plots this item will be populated directly from the previous visits OWNER GROUP
data. Examine the PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP field and determine if it was correctly coded at the
previous visit. If the OWNER GROUP of the condition actually changed, do not update this field;
change will be captured by comparing OWNER GROUP at the prior visit to OWNER GROUP at the at the
current visit. If the OWNER GROUP recorded at the previous inventory (i.e., PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP)
was coded incorrectly use codes 10 through 40 to correct the downloaded code (indicating an error was
made at the previous visit). An update to this field requires an explanatory note in the electronic
CONDITION CLASS NOTES.
When collected: Downloaded when PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
49
pg.
Value:
Code
10
20
30
40
Description
PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP should be 10 (Forest Service)
PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP should be 20 (Other Federal)
PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP should be 30 (State and Local)
PREVIOUS OWNER GROUP should be 40 (Private)
Item 5.5.2.4 FOREST TYPE (CORE 2.5.3) [FLDTYPCD]
Record the code corresponding to the FOREST TYPE (see Appendix C, Forest Type Codes) that best
describes the species with the plurality of stocking for all live trees in the condition class that are not
overtopped.
If STAND SIZE CLASS is nonstocked, then FOREST TYPE is determined by the following hierarchy:
For AK-Remeasurement (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3) plots, record the FOREST TYPE of the condition at
the previous inventory.
For all other plots:
1. Evaluate any seedlings available to determine the FOREST TYPE.
2. If no seedlings exist, use adjacent stands and your best professional judgment to determine
FOREST TYPE.
The instructions in Section 5.1, Determination of Condition Class and Section 5.5, Condition Class
Attributes apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences
in FOREST TYPE.
Note: For AK-Remeasurement plots, FOREST TYPE is generated in the office based on periodic data, and
may not reflect the current FOREST TYPE. Field crews should update this information based on the current
condition.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors in group or type
Values: See Appendix C, Forest Type Codes
Item 5.5.2.5 STAND SIZE CLASS (CORE 2.5.4) [FLDSZCD]
Record the code that best describes the predominant size class of all live trees in the condition class.
The instructions in Section 5.1 and Section 5.5 apply when delineating, on accessible forest land,
contrasting conditions based on differences in STAND SIZE CLASS.
Within the sampled area on a microplot or subplot, recognize only very obvious contrasting stands of
different mean diameter with an abrupt boundary. Example: an obvious abrupt boundary exists within the
sampled (fixed-radius) area of a subplot and demarcates a STAND SIZE CLASS change. When in doubt,
do not split conditions. Use tree stocking of all live trees that are not overtopped to differentiate between
stand-size classes.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Chapter 5: Condition Class
pg.
50
Values:
Code
0
Stand Size Class
Nonstocked
1
< 4.9 inches
(seedling, sapling)
2
5.0 - 8.9 inches
(softwoods)
5.0 - 10.9 inches
(hardwoods)
3
9.0 - 19.9 inches
(softwoods)
11.0 - 19.9 inches
(hardwoods)
4
20.0 - 39.9 inches
5
40.0 + inches
6
(Office Use Only)
Cover trees (trees
not on species list,
used for plots
classified as
nonforest)
Definition
Meeting the definition of accessible forest land, and
the following applies:
Less than 10 percent stocked by trees of any size,
and not classified as cover trees (see Code 6)
At least 10 percent stocking in trees of any size; and
at least 2/3 of the crown cover is in trees less than 5.0
inches DBH/DRC
At least 10 percent stocking in trees of any size; and
at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than
5.0 inches DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown
cover is in softwoods between 5.0 - 8.9 inches
diameter and/or hardwoods between 5.0 - 10.9
inches DBH, and/or woodland trees 5.0 - 8.9 inches
DRC.
At least 10 percent stocking in trees of any size; and
at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than
5.0 inches DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown
cover is in softwoods between 9.0 - 19.9 inches
diameter and/or hardwoods between 11.0 - 19.9
inches DBH, and for woodland trees 9.0 - 19.9 inches
DRC.
At least 10 percent stocking in trees of any size; and
at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than
5.0 inches DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown
cover is in trees between 20.0 - 39.9 inches DBH
At least 10 percent stocking in trees of any size; and
at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than
5.0 inches DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown
cover is in trees > 40.0 inches DBH
(Office Use Only) Less than 10 percent stocking by
trees of any size, and greater than 5 percent crown
cover of species that comprise cover trees
Item 5.5.2.6 REGENERATION STATUS (CORE 2.5.5) [STDORGCD]
Record the code that best describes the artificial regeneration that occurred in the condition.
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
The instructions in Section 5.1 and Section 5.3 apply when delineating, within accessible forest land,
contrasting conditions based on differences in REGENERATION STATUS.
For a forest land condition to be delineated and/or classified as artificially regenerated, the condition must
show distinct evidence of planting or seeding. If it is difficult to determine whether or not a stand has been
planted or seeded, then use code 0. If no distinct boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on
any subplot, then do not recognize separate conditions. In many regions of the West, trees are not planted
in rows, and planted stands do not differ in physical appearance from natural conditions. In these cases,
there is no need to differentiate conditions based on stand origin.
Note: Plot records or verbal evidence from landowner are acceptable criteria for determining regeneration
status.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Regeneration Description
0
Natural
Present stand shows no clear evidence of artificial
regeneration. Includes unplanted, recently cut lands.
1
Artificial
Present stand shows clear evidence of artificial
regeneration.
51
pg.
Item 5.5.2.7 TREE DENSITY (CORE 2.5.6) [MAPDEN]
Record a code to indicate the relative tree density classification. Base the classification on the number of
stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition that are not overtopped,
compared to any other condition class TREE DENSITY recorded on the plot.
The instructions in Section 5.1 and Section 5.3 apply when delineating, within accessible forest land,
contrasting conditions based on differences in TREE DENSITY.
Codes 2 and higher are used ONLY when all other attributes used to delineate separate condition classes
are homogenous, i.e., when a change in density is the ONLY difference within what would otherwise be
treated as only one forest condition. Otherwise, code 1 for all condition classes. Codes 2 and higher are
usually, but not always, used to demarcate areas that differ from an adjacent area due to forest disturbance,
e.g., a partial harvest or heavy, but not total tree mortality due to a ground fire. Delineation by density
should only be done when the less-dense condition is 50 percent or less as dense as the more dense
condition.
Do not distinguish between low-stocked stands or stands of sparse and patchy forest.
In order to qualify as a separate condition based on density, there MUST be a distinct, easily observed
change in the density of an area's tree cover or basal area.
Examples of valid contrasting conditions defined by differences in tree density are:
•
the eastern half of an otherwise homogeneous, 20-acre stand has many trees killed by a bark beetle
outbreak
•
one portion of a stand is partially cut over (with 40 square feet basal area per acre) while the other
portion is undisturbed (with 100 square feet basal area per acre)
Note: In these examples, RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS,
and REGENERATION STATUS are the same.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
1
Initial density class
2
Density class 2 - density different than 1
3
Density class 3 - density different than 1 and 2
SUBSECTION 5.5.3 ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) DATA ITEMS
Item 5.5.3.1 OWNER CLASS (CORE OPTIONAL 2.5.7) [OWNCD]
Record the OWNER CLASS code that best corresponds to the ownership of the land in the condition class.
Conditions will NOT be delineated based on changes in OWNER CLASS. If multiple owner classes within
an OWNER GROUP occur on a single condition class, record the OWNER CLASS closest to the plot
center. Note: When federal land is owned and administered by two separate entities (e.g., BLM and Forest
Service), this data item records the legal owner of the land, not the administrator.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
pg.
52
The value for this field should be downloaded for condition class 1 and indicates the owner classification for
subplot 1 center (the pinpricked field grid location). However, check to be sure the value is correct for the
plot and update this code if incorrect.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) and
nonforest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS 2 or 5)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
Owner Classes within Forest Service lands (OWNER GROUP = 10):
11 National Forest
12 National Grassland
13 Other Forest Service
Owner Classes within Other Federal lands (OWNER GROUP = 20):
21 National Park Service
22 Bureau of Land Management
23 Fish and Wildlife Service
24 Departments of Defense/Energy
25 Other Federal
Owner Classes within State and Local Government lands (OWNER GROUP = 30):
31 State
32 Local (County, Municipality, etc.)
33 Other Non Federal Public
Owner Classes within Private lands (OWNER GROUP = 40):
41 Corporate
42 Non Governmental Conservation / Natural Resources Organization –
examples: Nature Conservancy, National Trust for Private Lands, Pacific
Forest Trust, Boy Scouts of America, etc.
43 Unincorporated Partnerships / Associations / Clubs – examples: Hunting
Clubs that own, not lease property, recreation associations, 4H, etc.
44 Native American (Indian) - within reservation boundaries
45 Individual
Item 5.5.3.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE (PNW) [ADFORCD]
Downloaded code identifying the administrative unit (Forest Service region and national forest/grassland/
management unit) in which the condition is located. The first two digits of the four digit code are for the
region number and the last two are for the administered national forest number. Verify the downloaded
code; update if incorrect.
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
Note: Additional measurements are taken when a condition class is located on the Chugach National
Forest (ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE = 1004).
When collected: Downloaded for all accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION STATUS
= 1) and nonforest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS 2 or 5)
located on Forest Service administered lands (OWNER GROUP = 10)
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1004 Chugach National Forest
1005 Tongass National Forest
Item 5.5.3.3 PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS (CORE 2.5.8) [FORINDCD]
Downloaded code identifying the status of the owner with regard to being considered industrial as
determined by whether or not they own and operate a primary wood processing plant. A primary wood
processing plant is any commercial operation which originates the primary processing of wood on a regular
and continuing basis. Examples include: pulp or paper mill, sawmill, panel board mill, post or pole mill, etc.
Cabinet shops, "mom & pop" home-operated businesses, etc., should not be considered as industrial
plants. If any doubt exists with the determination by the field crew about the owner's industrial status due to
name, commercial plant size, type plant, etc., choose code 0.
53
pg.
Note: FIA unit or state headquarters may have to maintain a list of recognized industrial owners within a
state for crews to use when making these determinations.
When collected: Downloaded for all accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) when the OWNER GROUP is private (OWNER GROUP = 40)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
0
Land is not owned by industrial owner with a wood processing plant
1
Land is owned by industrial owner with wood processing plant
Item 5.5.3.4 ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (CORE 2.5.9) [STDORGSP]
Record the species code of the predominant tree species for which evidence exists of artificial regeneration
in the stand. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting condition classes are never delineated based on
variation in this attribute.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) with
evidence of artificial regeneration (REGENERATION STATUS = 1)
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See Appendix D, Tree Species List
Item 5.5.3.5 AGE BASIS CODE (PNW) [AGE_BASIS_CD_PNWRS]
Record the code that indicates the method used to determine STAND AGE (Item 5.5.3.6).
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
Core Code
(office use only)
Stand is nonstocked
10
11
20
30
Weighted average of trees bored for age (on subplot)
Weighted average of trees bored for age (off subplot)
Whorl counted only (on or off subplot)
Mixed method of whorl-count and/or bored age (on or off
subplot)
Time since last inventory - years added to previously
n/a
recorded stand age
Age based on documentary evidence or landowner
n/a
discussion
Age based on crew call considering site and tree diameters
n/a
All trees in the condition are of a species which cannot be STAND AGE =
bored
998
Tree cores not counted in the field, but taken to field office STAND AGE =
to count
999
STAND AGE >997 years
STAND AGE =
997
40
50
51
60
70
80
STAND AGE =
000
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Item 5.5.3.6 STAND AGE (CORE 2.5.10) [FLDAGE]
Record the average total age, to the nearest year, of the overstory trees (plurality of all live trees not
overtopped) in the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition, determined using local procedures.
Record ”000” for non-stocked stands.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
00
pg.
54
An estimate of STAND AGE is required for every forest land condition class defined on a plot. Stand age is
usually highly correlated with stand size and should reflect the average age of all trees that are not
overtopped. Unlike the procedure for site tree age (TREE AGE AT DIAMETER), estimates of STAND AGE
should estimate the time of tree establishment (i.e., not age at the point of diameter measurement). Note:
For planted stands, estimate age based on the year the stand was planted (i.e., do not add in the age of the
planting stock).
This data item is typically calculated using age tree data collected for site trees (see Age Tree Selection,
Section 10.4). However, forested conditions that do not have available age trees for boring (i.e., seedling/
small sapling), also need to be estimated in the field by the crews. Use the following methods for
determining STAND AGE based on the availability of acceptable age trees:
For typical “tree size” forested conditions use the three age trees selected (see Age Tree Selection, Section
10.4) to get an average age for the condition. Make sure to add in the approximate number of years that
passed from germination until the tree reached the point of core extraction on the bole (DBH) to determine
the total age of the tree (use the guidelines below).
General regional guidelines for converting breast height age to total age by species:
Years to add:
(351) red alder, (746) quaking aspen, (747) black cottonwood: + 2
(375) paper birch: + 5
All other species: + 8
For seedling/sapling sized forested conditions count the number of whorls or branch nodes to help in
getting an estimate. Determine age by whorl count for the following species only: Douglas-fir; pines; and
true firs. This is only an acceptable practice in young, fast-growing stands (e.g., plantations, regenerating
clearcuts); it is almost never acceptable where the environment limits vigorous tree growth (e.g., subalpine
areas, bogs).
Use ancillary information that provides clues about STAND AGE, such as planting date estimates offered
by the landowner and disturbance dates implied by perusal of multi-date aerial imagery. If estimated age
can be determined for hardwoods not bored (for example, counting rings on a nearby stump) then use this
information to estimate STAND AGE.
For aspen, birch, poplar or cottonwood: if cores are needed to estimate STAND AGE for conditions where
these species are predominant in the overstory, collect age for one tree located outside the subplot
boundary from a tree of this species with similar diameter and length in a similar condition. Note age,
DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT, SPECIES, and CROWN CLASS in electronic CONDITION CLASS
NOTES. Other hardwoods (except red alder) are not cored in the PNW region due to the high probability of
damage to the tree.
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
Note: If tree cores are not counted in the field, but are collected and taken to the field office for counting,
leave values field blank (i.e., null).
When collected: When AGE BASIS CODE < 60
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10percent
Values: Null, 000 to 999
Item 5.5.3.7 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (CORE 2.5.23) [PHYSCLCD]
Record the code that best describes the PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS of the condition within the plot area;
land form, topographic position, and soil generally determine physiographic class.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1); or
measurable nonforest condition classes when NONFOREST LAND USE is rangeland,
other, naturally nonvegetated, or chaparral (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2,
ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE = 1004, and NONFOREST LAND USE = 20, 40, 41, or
45).
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
55
pg.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
Values: Xeric
Sites that are normally low or deficient in moisture available to support vigorous tree growth.
These areas may receive adequate precipitation, but experience a rapid loss of available
moisture due to runoff, percolation, evaporation, etc.
Code Physiographic class Description
Ridge tops with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to
11 Dry Tops
sun and wind.
Slopes with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to sun
12 Dry Slopes
and wind. Includes most mountain/steep slopes with a southern or
western exposure.
Sites with a deep, sandy surface subject to rapid loss of moisture
13 Deep Sands
following precipitation. Typical examples include sand hills, sites
along the beach and shores of lakes and streams and many
deserts.
All dry physiographic sites not described above. Describe in
19 Other Xeric
electronic CONDITION CLASS NOTES.
Mesic
Sites that have moderate but adequate moisture available to support vigorous tree growth except
for periods of extended drought. These sites may be subjected to occasional flooding during
periods of heavy or extended precipitation.
Code Physiographic class Description
Flat or fairly level sites outside flood plains. Excludes deep sands
21 Flatwoods
and wet, swampy sites.
Hills and gently rolling, undulating terrain and associated small
22 Rolling Uplands
streams. Excludes deep sands, all hydric sites, and streams with
associated floodplains.
Moist slopes and coves with relatively deep, fertile soils. Often
23 Moist Slopes and
Coves
these sites have a northern or eastern exposure and are partially
shielded from wind and sun. Includes moist mountain tops and
saddles.
24 Narrow Floodplains/ Flood plains and bottomlands less than 1/4-mile in width along
Bottomlands
rivers and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are
subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or
extended precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches, and
terraces within a 1/4 mile limit. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and
bogs
Flood plains and bottomlands 1/4 mile or wider in width along rivers
25 Broad Floodplains
and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are
subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or
extended precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches, and
terraces. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs with year-round
water problems.
All moderately moist physiographic sites not described above.
29 Other Mesic
Describe in electronic CONDITION CLASS NOTES.
Hydric
Sites that generally have a year-round abundance or over-abundance of moisture. Hydric sites
are very wet sites where excess water seriously limits both growth and species occurrence.
Code Physiographic class Description
Low, wet, flat forested areas usually quite extensive that are
31 Swamps/Bogs
flooded for long periods of time except during periods of extreme
drought. Excludes cypress ponds and small drains.
Narrow, stream-like, wet strands of forest land often without a well32 Small Drains
defined stream channel. These areas are poorly drained or flooded
throughout most of the year and drain the adjacent higher ground.
Bays
and
Wet
Low, wet, boggy sites characterized by peaty or organic soils. May
33
Pocossins
be somewhat dry during periods of extended drought. Examples
include the Carolina bays in the southeast US.
34 Beaver Ponds
35 Cypress Ponds
All other hydric physiographic sites. Describe in electronic
39 Other Hydric
CONDITION CLASS NOTES.
pg.
56
Item 5.5.3.8 DISTURBANCE 1 (CORE 2.5.11) [DSTRBCD1]
Record the code corresponding to the presence of the following disturbances. Disturbance can connote
positive or negative effects. The area affected by any natural or human-caused disturbance must be at least
1.0 acre in size. Record up to three different disturbances per condition class from most important to least
important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never
delineated based on variation in this attribute.
For initial forest plot establishment (initial grid activation of the annual inventory or newly forested plots), the
disturbance must be within the last 5 years. For AK-remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3)
recognize only those disturbances that have occurred since the previous inventory.
The following disturbance codes require "significant threshold" damage, which implies mortality and/or
damage to 25 percent of all trees in a stand or 50 percent of an individual species' count. Additionally, some
disturbances affect forests but initially may not affect tree growth or health (e.g., grazing, browsing,
flooding). In these cases, a disturbance should be coded when at least 25 percent of the soil surface or
understory vegetation has been affected.
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
Use the general disturbance codes (i.e., 10, 20, etc) only if one of the more specific codes (i.e., 41, 42, etc)
does not apply. When coding fire (30), it is important to distinguish ground fire (31) from crown fire (32)
where possible. Code “00” if no DISTURBANCE 1 is observed.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Disturbance Definition
00 None
No observable disturbance
10 Insect damage
11 Insect damage to understory vegetation
12 Insect damage to trees, including seedlings and saplings
20 Disease Damage
21 Disease damage to understory vegetation
22 Disease damage to trees, including seedlings and saplings
30 Fire
Crown or ground fire, either prescribed or natural
31 Ground fire
32 Crown fire
40 Animal Damage
41 Beaver – Includes flooding caused by beaver
42 Porcupine
43 Deer/Ungulate
44 Bear
45 Rabbit
46 Domestic animal or livestock – Includes grazing
50 Weather
51 Ice
52 Wind – Includes hurricane, tornado
53 Flooding – weather induced
54 Drought
60 Vegetation
Suppression, competition, vines
70 Unknown/
Describe in electronic CONDITION CLASS NOTES
unsure/other
80 Human
Any significant threshold of human caused damage not described in the
caused
DISTURBANCE codes listed or in the TREATMENT codes listed. Must
damage
include a an electronic CONDITION CLASS NOTE to describe further.
90 Geological Disturbances
91 Landslide
92 Avalanche Track
93 Volcanic Blast Zone
94 Other Geologic Event
95 Earth movements/avalanches
57
pg.
Item 5.5.3.9 DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (CORE 2.5.12) [DSTRBYR1]
Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 1 occurred. If the disturbance occurs continuously over a period
of time, record 9999.
When collected: When DISTURBANCE 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years
Values: Year that is the same as or since the previous inventory plot visit, or within the past 5
years for plots visited for the first time; 9999
Item 5.5.3.10 DISTURBANCE 2 (CORE 2.5.13) [DSTRBCD2]
If a stand has experienced more than one disturbance, record the second disturbance here. See
DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions. Code “00” if no DISTURBANCE 2 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.11 DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (CORE 2.5.14) [DSTRBYR2]
Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 2 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.
Item 5.5.3.12 DISTURBANCE 3 (CORE 2.5.15) [DSTRBCD3]
If a stand has experienced more than two disturbances, record the third disturbance here. See
DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions. Code “00” if no DISTURBANCE 3 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.13 DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (CORE 2.5.16) [DSTRBYR3]
Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 3 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.
Item 5.5.3.14 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 1 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBCD1_PNWRS]
Record the corresponding disturbance code for disturbances which occurred more than 5 years prior to the
installation of the annual inventory plot. If the plot has been measured previously as a periodic plot, use
previous plot write-ups and records as guides to code the important historical disturbances affecting the
current stand (including those which originated the stand). Use the same procedures and codes used for
DISTURBANCE 1.
Note: Null is erroneous for this data item; code “00” if no HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 1 is observed.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See DISTURBANCE 1 (Item 5.5.3.8)
Item 5.5.3.15 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBYR1_PNWRS]
Record the year in which HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 1 occurred.
Item 5.5.3.16 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 2 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBCD2_PNWRS]
If a stand has experienced more than one historical disturbance, record the second disturbance here. Use
the same procedures and codes used for HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 1. Code “00” if no HISTORICAL
DISTURBANCE 2 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.17 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBYR2_PNWRS]
Record the year in which HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 2 occurred. Use the same procedures and codes
used for HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 1.
Chapter 5: Condition Class
When collected: When HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years
Values: Year that is prior to the previous plot visit, or > 5 years ago for plots visited for the
first time
pg.
58
Item 5.5.3.18 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 3 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBCD3_PNWRS]
If a stand has experienced more than two historical disturbances, record the third disturbance here. Use the
same procedures and codes used for HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 1. Code “00” if no HISTORICAL
DISTURBANCE 3 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.19 HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (PNW) [HIST_DSTRBYR3_PNWRS]
Record the year in which HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE 3 occurred. Use the same procedures and codes
used for HISTORICAL DISTURBANCE YEAR 1.
Item 5.5.3.20 TREATMENT 1 (CORE 2.5.17) [TRTCD1] (PFSL) [TRTCD1_PNWRS]
Forestry treatments are a form of disturbance. These human caused disturbances are recorded separately
here for ease of coding and analysis. The term treatment further implies that a silvicultural application has
been prescribed. This does not include occasional stumps of unknown origin or sparse removals for
firewood, Christmas trees, or other miscellaneous purposes. The area affected by any treatment must be at
least 1.0 acre in size (codes 14 and 15 may not seem to meet this area size requirement, yet almost always
reflect a localized treatment applied or allowed across a large enough landscape to qualify). If a tree on the
plot has been cut (removed or not) there should be a corresponding “best fit” code for a condition class
treatment. Record up to three different treatments per condition class from most important to least
important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never
delineated based on variation in this attribute.
For initial installations (PNW PLOT KIND = 1 or 5) and AK-Remeasurement (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3)
plots, treatments must be within the last five years.
Code the general treatment codes (i.e., 10, 20, etc) only if one of the more specific codes (i.e., 11, 12, etc)
does not apply. Code “00” if no TREATMENT 1 is observed.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Treatment
Description
Core codes
(office use only)
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
00 None
10 Cutting
No observable treatment.
The removal of one or more trees from a
stand.
11 Clearcut
Residual trees of all sizes have < 25
percent crown cover.The residual trees
usually are cull trees and low-value
hardwoods. Not a firewood or local use
harvest.
12 Partial cut
Remaining trees comprise > 25 percent
(heavy) (>20
crown cover and >20 percent of the trees
percent removed) live and 5.0 inches DBH/DRC or larger
were harvested. The residual stand usually
consists of commercially desirable
trees.Not a firewood or local use harvest.
13 Partial cut (light) Remaining trees comprise > 25 percent
(<20 percent
crown cover and < 20 percent of the trees
removed)
live and 5.0 inches DBH/DRC or larger
were harvested. The residual stand usually
consists of commercially desirable
trees.Not a firewood or local use harvest.
14 Firewood or local The harvest of trees for firewood, or the
use cut
harvest of trees for products manufactured
and used locally by “do-it-yourselfers”,
often on the ownership of origin, for
improvements such as buildings, bridges
and fences. This code does not require a
1.0-acre minimum size.
00
10
10
10
10
10
59
pg.
15 Incidental cut
10
10
10
20
30
30
30
30
40
50
50
50
60
Chapter 5: Condition Class
Includes 1) the haphazard, seemingly
random harvest of occasional trees in an
otherwise undisturbed stand, or 2) any
harvest activity that does not qualify as
another kind of disturbance. Trees may
have been cut and left on site or cut and
transported off site.This code does not
require a 1.0-acre minimum size.
16 Precommercial An intermediate harvest in which excess
thin
growing stock are cut but not removed.
17 Improvement cut Cutting of commercial-sized, unsalable
trees to free crop trees from competition.
Improvement cutting differs from a
commercial thinning in that the trees cut are
not marketable.
20 Site preparation Clearing, slash burning, chopping, disking,
bedding, or other practices clearly intended
to prepare a site for either natural or
artificial regeneration.
30 Artificial
Following a disturbance or treatment
regeneration
(usually cutting), a new stand where at
least 50 percent of the live trees present
resulted from planting or direct seeding.
31 Planting through- Planting the area to establish a
out the stand
manageable stand.
Planting of nonstocked openings to fill-in or
32 Planting within
nonstocked holes create a manageable stand
in the stand
33 Underplanting
Planting under a sawtimber overstory.
40 Natural
Following a disturbance or treatment
regeneration
(usually cutting), a new stand where at
least 50 percent of the live trees present (of
any size) were established through the
growth of existing trees and/or natural
seeding or sprouting.
50 Other silvicultural The use of fertilizers, herbicides, girdling,
treatment
pruning or other activities (not already listed
above) designed to improve the
commercial value of the residual stand, or
chaining, which is a practice used on
woodlands to encourage wildlife forage.
51 Stand conversion Killing of low-value or unmarketable treesoften hardwoods-and planting of the area to
establish a manageable stand. Most
commonly, low-value hardwood stands are
converted to conifer stands.
52 Clean and
Killing or suppression of undesirable,
release
competing vegetation-usually brush or
hardwoods-from a manageable stand. A
herbicide treatment in young, regenerated
stands is one method of clean and release.
60 Chaining
Removal or killing of undesired woody
species, not a silvicultural treatment.
pg.
60
Item 5.5.3.21 TREATMENT YEAR 1 (CORE 2.5.18) [TRTYR1]
Record the year in which TREATMENT 1 occurred.
When collected: When TREATMENT 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years
Values: Year that is the same or since the previous inventory plot visit, or within the past five
years for plots visited for the first time
Item 5.5.3.22 TREATMENT 2 (CORE 2.5.19)” [TRTCD2] (PFSL) [TRTCD2_PNWRS]
If a stand has experienced more than one treatment, record the second treatment here. See TREATMENT
1 for coding instructions. Code ”00” if no TREATMENT 2 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.23 TREATMENT YEAR 2 (CORE 2.5.20) [TRTYR2]
Record the year in which TREATMENT 2 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.
Item 5.5.3.24 TREATMENT 3 (CORE 2.5.21) [TRTCD3] (PFSL) [TRTCD3_PNWRS]
If a stand has experienced more than two treatments, record the third treatment here. See TREATMENT 1
for coding instructions. Code ”00” if no TREATMENT 3 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.25 TREATMENT YEAR 3 (CORE 2.5.22) [TRTYR3]
Record the year in which TREATMENT 3 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.
Item 5.5.3.26 HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1 (PNW) [HIST_TRTCD1_PNWRS]
Record the corresponding treatment that occurred more than 5 years prior to the installation of the annual
inventory plot If the plot has been measured previously as a periodic plot, use previous plot write-ups and
records as guides to code the important historical treatments affecting the current stand (including those
which originated the stand). Note: Null is erroneous for this variable. Code “00” if no HISTORICAL
TREATMENT 1 is observed.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Use the same procedures and codes used for TREATMENT 1 (Item 5.5.3.20)
Item 5.5.3.27 HISTORICAL TREATMENT YEAR 1 (PNW) [HIST_TRTYR1_PNWRS]
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
Record the year in which HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1 occurred.
When collected: When HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years
Values: >5 years prior to current date
Item 5.5.3.28 HISTORICAL TREATMENT 2 (PNW) [HIST_TRTCD2_PNWRS]
If the stand has experienced more than one historical treatment, record the second treatment here. Use the
same procedures and codes used for HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1. Code “00” if no HISTORICAL
TREATMENT 2 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.29 HISTORICAL TREATMENT YEAR 2 (PNW) [HIST_TRTYR2_PNWRS]
Record the year in which HISTORICAL TREATMENT 2 occurred. Use the same procedures and codes
used for HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1.
61
pg.
Item 5.5.3.30 HISTORICAL TREATMENT 3 (PNW) [HIST_TRTCD3_PNWRS]
If the stand has experienced more than two historical treatments, record the third treatment here. Use the
same procedures and codes used for HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1. Code “00” if no HISTORICAL
TREATMENT 3 is observed.
Item 5.5.3.31 HISTORICAL TREATMENT YEAR 3 (PNW) [HIST_TRTYR3_PNWRS]
Record the year in which HISTORICAL TREATMENT 3 occurred. Use the same procedures and codes
used for HISTORICAL TREATMENT 1.
SUBSECTION 5.5.4 DETERMINING CONDITION CLASSES ON NONFOREST LAND
Nonforest land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2) may be subdivided into condition classes that are based
on differences in nonforest land uses. See Subsection 5.2.2, Nonforest Land, for information on plots that
are entirely nonforest.
Item 5.5.4.1 PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (CORE 2.5.24) [PRESNFCD_PNWRS]
Record the PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE for all nonforest conditions (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 2). In addition, nonforest nonsampled conditions (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5,
ESTIMATED NONSAMPLED LAND COVER TYPE = 2) should have an estimated PRESENT
NONFOREST LAND USE. Use the codes and classifications listed below.
If a subplot has an accessible forest land condition class present within the 24.0-foot radius, map each
nonforest land condition class present. Do not combine nonforest condition classes. Use normal
procedures to map and measure other condition classes (i.e., Census water, noncensus water, and
nonsampled conditions, CONDITION STATUS = 3, 4, or 5).
Example: If accessible forest land, nonforest urban land, and nonforest cropland are all present within a
24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the forest land condition and map each nonforest land use as a
separate condition class (size and width requirements for condition class delineation must be met, or
one of five exceptions to the delineation rules must apply).
If there is no accessible forest land condition class present within a subplot’s 24.0-foot radius, then the only
nonforest condition class delineated will be the one present at the subplot center ignoring any other
nonforest condition classes that may be present. Use normal procedures to map and measure other
condition classes (i.e., Census water, noncensus water, and nonsampled conditions, CONDITION STATUS
= 3, 4, or 5).
Example: If nonforest urban land and nonforest cropland make up the entirety of a 24.0-foot fixed-radius
macroplot, record only the condition class which occupies the subplot center.
When collected: All nonforest conditions and nonsampled nonforest conditions (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 2 or 5 and ESTIMATED NONSAMPLED LAND COVER TYPE = 2)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Core Codes
Values: Code Land Use
Definition
(office use
only)
10
Agricultural land
12 Pasture
13 Idle farmland
14 Orchard
15 Christmas tree
plantation
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chapter 5: Condition Class
11 Cropland
Land managed for crops, pasture, or other
agricultural use; the area must be at least 1.0
acre in size and 120.0 feet wide. Use code 10
only for cases not better described by one of
the following:
i.e., mint, wheat, rye, corn, planted berry
fields
Improved through cultural practices such as
grading and mowing
pg.
62
20
30
Section 5.5: Condition Class Attributes
40
Rangeland
(Grass/Forb/
Shrub land)
Land primarily composed of grasses, forbs, or
shrubs. This includes lands vegetated
naturally or artificially to provide a plant cover
managed like native vegetation and does not
meet the definition of pasture, vegetated
wetlands or chaparral. The area must be at
least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide
Developed
Land used primarily by humans for purposes
other than forestry or agriculture. Use the
code 30 only for land not better described by
one of the following:
31 Cultural or
Business, residential, and other places of
Urban:
intense human activity
32 Rights-of-way: Improved roads, railway, power lines,
maintained canal
33 Recreation:
Parks, skiing, golf courses
Other
Land parcels greater than 1.0 acre in size and
greater than 120.0 feet wide, that do not fall
into one of the uses described above or
below. Examples include undeveloped
beaches, barren land (rock, sand), marshes,
bogs, ice, and snow. Use code 40 only for
land not better described by codes 41, 42, or
45.
41 Naturally
Barren rock, sand, lava, glaciers (ice),
nonvegetated: undeveloped beaches, glacial outwash
42 Vegetated
Vegetated lands where at some period in the
Wetlands
year, the water table is usually at or near the
surface, or the land is covered by shallow
water. Includes: swamps, peatlands (bogs,
fens, muskegs), marshes, and tidal flats
45 NonforestAreas covered with heavily branched dwarfed
chaparral:
trees or shrubs, usually evergreen, the crown
canopy of which currently covers greater than
10 percent of the ground. The principal
species are dwarf Quercus, Cercocarpus,
Garrya, Ceanothus, Arctostaphylos,
Baccharis, and Adenostoma. Areas in which
the predominant cover is Artemisia, Purshia,
Gutierrezia, Opuntia, or semi-desert species
are considered rangeland (code 20).
20
30
31
32
33
40
40
40
40
SUBSECTION 5.5.5 NONSAMPLED CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES
Nonsampled land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5) may be subdivided into condition classes that are
based on differences in nonsampled reason. See Subsection 5.2.5, Nonsampled, for information on plots
that are entirely nonsampled.
When encountering an area where CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (Item 5.5.5.1) is constant but
attributes differ, record attributes that apply to the greater part of the area within the nonsampled condition
class.
Example: subplot center is accessible forestland, but there is a hazardous area delineated on the subplot:
RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, GROUND LAND CLASS, estimated LAND COVER TYPE, and
estimated FOREST TYPE will be recorded for the nonsampled condition. If there is an ownership boundary
between two OWNER GROUPS on plot within the nonsampled area, the difference in OWNER GROUP is
ignored and the OWNER GROUP is assigned based on the condition that covers more area on the subplot.
63
pg.
Item 5.5.5.1 CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (CORE 2.4.3)
[COND_NONSAMPLE_REASN_CD_PNWRS]
For portions of plots that cannot be sampled (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5), record one of the
following reasons.
When collected: When CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Nonsampled Reason
01
Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes beyond the
U.S. border.
02
Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which
access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only
reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or
width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access.
Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future, it
remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to
determine if access is available.
03
Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on plot that
cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs,
quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water,
etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous
condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion
to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or
width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous
condition.
10
Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not
sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons listed. An
electronic CONDITION CLASS NOTE is required to describe the situation.
Item 5.5.5.2 ESTIMATED NONSAMPLED LAND COVER TYPE (PNW) [EST_NON_SAMP_LCT_PNWRS]
Record the land cover type best representing the condition class, as determined from the air, ground, or
some form of remote sensing. Use your best judgment in estimating which cover type is present. This
estimation should be based on the plurality of the cover type present for the entire condition class. When
land cover type is inferred using remote sensing, include the type and date of imagery used in the electronic
CONDITION CLASS NOTES.
When collected: When CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, or 10
Field width: 1 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
1
Forest land
2
Nonforest land
3
Noncensus water
4
Census water
When the ESTIMATED NONSAMPLED LAND COVER TYPE appears to be forest land, further describe it
by determining the forest type.
When collected: When ESTIMATED NONSAMPLE LAND COVER TYPE = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See Appendix C, Forest Type Codes
Chapter 5: Condition Class
Item 5.5.5.3 NONSAMPLED FOREST TYPE (PNW) [FLDTYPCD_NON_SAMP_PNWRS]
pg.
64
SECTION 5.6 CONDITION CLASS NOTES
SUBSECTION 5.6.1 CONDITION CLASS NOTES
Item 5.6.1.1 CONDITION CLASS NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular condition class being
defined.
Section 5.6: Condition Class Notes
When collected: All plots, use when clarification is needed
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences
65
pg.
CHAPTER 6 SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Each subplot is described by a series of area parameters relating to topographic features and existing
cover type. These data also relate to the microplot, since the microplot is contained within the subplot
perimeter. This information is used for a variety of topics, including: identifying potential limits to
management (e.g., topography), and relating physical site features to forest composition and productivity.
SECTION 6.1 RECORDING SUBPLOT INFORMATION
SUBSECTION 6.1.1 SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Item 6.1.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 3.1) [SUBP]
Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.
When Collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values:
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
Item 6.1.1.2 SUBPLOT STATUS (CORE 3.2) [SUBP_STATUS_CD]
Indicate whether or not this subplot currently has at least one accessible forest land condition class.
Examples for coding SUBPLOT STATUS, SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON, SUBPLOT CENTER
CONDITION, and CONDITION CLASS STATUS coding follow:
2
3
4
Sampled – no accessible forest land condition present on subplot
Nonsampled – possibility of forest land
Sampled – QA crew only measured condition, boundary and some subplot
level data. For use only on check plots (QA STATUS = 2 through 6). Not a
legal entry on production plots (QA STATUS = 1 or 7).
Chapter 6: Subplot Information
1. If the condition at subplot center is Census or noncensus water, do not install the point, even if it can
be occupied safely. Do not delineate any other conditions on the subplot, and code as follows:
• SUBPLOT STATUS = 2 (sampled, no accessible forest condition present on subplot)
• SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION = n (arbitrary condition class number)
• CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 3 for noncensus water or CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 4
for Census water
2. If the subplot center cannot be safely occupied because of a hazard (e.g., over edge of cliff), do not
install the point and do not delineate any other conditions. The entire area of the subplot is assigned
to a nonsampled condition (hazardous).
• SUBPLOT STATUS = 3 (nonsampled)
• SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 3 (hazardous)
• SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION = n (arbitrary condition class number)
• CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5 (nonsampled)
• CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 3 (hazardous)
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Sampled – at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot
pg.
66
Item 6.1.1.3 SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (CORE 3.3) [POINT_NONSAMPLE_REASN_CD]
For entire subplots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons.
When collected: When SUBPLOT STATUS = 3
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
01
Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes beyond the
U.S. border.
02
Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which
access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only
reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or
width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access.
Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future, it
remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to
determine if access is available.
03
Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on a plot that
cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs,
quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water,
etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous
condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to
determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width
requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.
04
Time limitation – This code applies to full subplots that cannot be sampled
due to a time restriction. This code is reserved for areas with limited
access, and in situations where it is imperative for the crew to leave before
the plot can be completed (e.g., scheduled helicopter rendezvous). Use of
this code requires notification to the field supervisor. This code should not
be used for an entire plot (use code 8 [skipped visit] when an entire plot is
skipped; see Item 4.3.4.2, PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON).
05
Lost data – The plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after a panel
was completed and submitted for processing. This code is assigned to
entire plots or full subplots that could not be processed, and is applied at
the time of processing after notification to the region. Note: This code is for
office use only.
10
Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not
sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons already
listed. An electronic SUBPLOT NOTE is required to describe the situation.
Section 6.1: Recording Subplot Information
Item 6.1.1.4 PREVIOUS SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION (PNW) [PREV_SUBPCOND_PNWRS]
Downloaded code indicating the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the subplot center
recorded at the previous visit.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1 to 9
Item 6.1.1.5 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION (CORE 3.4) [SUBPCOND]
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the subplot center.
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1 to 9
67
pg.
Item 6.1.1.6 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION CLASS STATUS CHANGE (PNW)
[SUBCOND_CHG_PNWRS]
This data item is used to describe why a change occurs in the CONDITION CLASS STATUS of the subplot
center between inventories. It distinguishes physical change from differences attributed to procedural
change when CONDITION STATUS changes from forest land to nonforest land, Census or noncensus
water, and vice versa. Record the code which describes the cause of the change.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: PREVIOUS CONDITION CLASS STATUS at
subplot center = 1 and the current CONDITION CLASS STATUS at subplot center =
2, 3 or 4; or
When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: PREVIOUS CONDITION CLASS STATUS at
subplot center = 2, 3, or 4 and current CONDITION CLASS STATUS at subplot
center = 1
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION has been changed to reflect a physical
change in the condition, resulting in a difference from the subplot condition
previously recorded.
2
SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION has been changed to correct an error
from previous crew.
3
SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION has been changed to reflect a change in
data item definition.
Item 6.1.1.7 SUBPLOT CONDITION LIST (CORE 3.9) [CONDLIST]
This is a listing of all condition classes located within the 24.0-foot radius around the subplot center. A
maximum of four conditions is permitted at any individual subplot (a maximum of nine condition classes can
be recorded on a plot). If a condition class has already been defined at a previously completed subplot, use
the same condition class number whenever that condition is encountered. Define new condition classes as
they are encountered. If more than one condition class is listed here, boundary data are required. If only
one condition class is listed, this condition is automatically assigned to the subplot center and microplot
center. If fewer than four condition classes occur on this subplot, complete the remainder of this field with
zeros. For example, if condition 1 is the only condition class on a subplot, record 1000.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1000 to 9876
Item 6.1.1.8 MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (CORE 3.5) [MICRCOND]
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the microplot center.
Chapter 6: Subplot Information
When collected: All microplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1 to 9
pg.
68
Item 6.1.1.9 SUBPLOT SLOPE (CORE 3.6) [SLOPE]
Record the angle of slope across the 24.0-foot radius subplot to the nearest 1-percent. SUBPLOT SLOPE
is determined by sighting the clinometer along a line parallel to the average incline (or decline) of each
subplot. This angle is measured along the shortest pathway down slope before the drainage direction
changes. To measure SUBPLOT SLOPE, Observer 1 should stand at the uphill edge of the subplot and
sight Observer 2, who stands at the downhill edge of the subplot. Sight Observer 2 at the same height as
the eye-level of Observer 1. Read the slope directly from the percentage scale of the clinometer:
•
If slope changes gradually across the subplot, record an average slope.
•
If slope changes across the subplot but the slope is predominantly of one direction, code the
predominant slope percentage rather than the average.
•
If the subplot falls directly on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the average
slope of the side hill(s).
If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side hill,
code the slope of the side hill where most of the area lies.
When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition class present on
subplot (SUBPLOT STATUS = 1); or
All subplots with at least one measurable nonforest condition class present on the
subplot (CONDITION CLASS STATUS=2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE =
1004)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 percent
Values: 000 to 155
Item 6.1.1.10 SUBPLOT ASPECT (CORE 3.7) [ASPECT]
Section 6.1: Recording Subplot Information
Record the aspect across the 24.0-foot radius subplot, to the nearest 1 degree. SUBPLOT ASPECT is
determined along the direction of slope for land surfaces with at least 5-percent slope in a generally uniform
direction. SUBPLOT ASPECT is measured with a hand compass along the same direction used to
determine slope.
•
If aspect changes gradually across the subplot, record an average aspect.
•
If aspect changes across the subplot but the aspect is predominately of one direction, code the
predominate direction rather than the average.
•
If the subplot falls on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the aspect of the ridge
line or canyon bottom.
•
If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side
hill, code the aspect of the side hill.
When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition class present on
subplot (SUBPLOT STATUS = 1); or
All subplots with at least one measurable nonforest condition class present on the
subplot (CONDITION CLASS STATUS=2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE =
1004)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
Values: Code Definition
000 no aspect, slope < 5-percent
001 1 degree
002 2 degrees
.....
.................
360 360 degrees, due north
69
pg.
Item 6.1.1.11 SNOW/WATER DEPTH (CORE 3.8) [WATERDEP]
Record, to the nearest 0.1 foot, the average approximate depth of water or snow covering the 24.0-foot
radius subplot at the time of data collection. This data item is used to indicate subplots where some data
items (e.g., seedling count, total lengths) may be measured with less certainty because of conditions at the
time of measurement.
This item is intended for water/snow/ice which covers substantial portions of subplots. Record “00” for
streams contained within their banks and not affecting any measurements.
When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition class present on
subplot (SUBPLOT STATUS = 1); or
All subplots with at least one measurable nonforest condition class present on the
subplot (CONDITION CLASS STATUS=2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE =
1004)
Field width: 2 digits (x.y)
Tolerance: +/- 0.5 feet
Values: 0.0 to 9.9
Item 6.1.1.12 SUBPLOT NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation encountered on the subplot.
When collected: All plots: as needed
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences
Chapter 6: Subplot Information
Section 6.1: Recording Subplot Information
pg.
70
71
pg.
CHAPTER 7 BOUNDARY REFERENCES
SECTION 7.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Boundary reference data are used to compute the area for the condition classes sampled on a plot and to
remeasure plots. Record all boundaries between condition classes that occur within the sampled (fixedradius) area on subplots and microplots. Boundaries outside sampled (fixed-radius) areas are not
referenced.
In addition to using the recording procedures described herein, sketch maps of condition class boundaries
onto the pre-printed plot diagrams on the plot card, accurately representing the shape of each boundary as
it is on the ground (boundary data recorded in the PDR should represent the condition class area, but may
not accurately represent the shape).
SECTION 7.2 REFERENCE PROCEDURE
Within the sampled area on each microplot and subplot, reference the approximate boundary of each
condition class that differs from the condition class at the center. Trees selected on these fixed-radius plots
are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary
delineated.
Boundary referencing is done by recording azimuths and distances from subplot or microplot center to the
reference points (Figure 7.1 and Figure 7.2). Each boundary is marked by a maximum of three points –- two
where the boundary intersects the respective fixed-radius plot circumference, and one "corner" point
between the two end points, if necessary. Only the corner point requires a distance, since the distance from
the center to the circumference is always equal to the fixed plot radius.
Figure 7.2: How to measure a boundary with a corner
on a fixed-radius plot.
Microplot boundaries are referenced to the microplot center. Note that the larger the fixed-radius plot, the
greater likelihood of a need for a boundary corner to record boundaries that are not straight lines.
Refer to Section 5.1 and Section 5.3 for general condition class delineation guidelines. The following
additional rules apply when referencing a boundary within a fixed-radius plot:
1. When a boundary between accessible forest land and nonforest land or between two contrasting
accessible forest land condition classes is clearly marked, use that feature to define the boundary.
Examples of clear demarcation are a fence line, plowed field edge, sharp ridge line, defined stem
line, and water's edge along a stream course, ditch, or canal.
2. When a boundary between forest land and nonforest land is not clearly marked by an obvious
feature, the boundary should follow the nonforest side of the stems of the trees at the forest edge.
Chapter 7: Boundary References
Figure 7.1: How to measure a straight boundary on a
fixed-radius plot.
pg.
72
3. When a boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is not clearly marked, map
along the stems of the contrasting condition. When the boundary between two contrasting forest land
condition classes is separated by a narrow linear inclusion (creek, fire line, narrow meadow,
unimproved road), establish the boundary at the far edge of the inclusion relative to subplot center.
4. Although individual tolerances are specified for the azimuths and distances, in practice a crew will be
considered ‘correct’ when the difference in areas as mapped by the original crew and by the QA crew
is less than-10 percent of the fixed-radius plot area. This allows for slight variations in azimuths or
distances due to the approximate nature of mapping procedures.
SUBSECTION 7.2.1 BOUNDARIES ON AK-REMEASUREMENT PLOTS
When a plot is remeasured, the crew will examine the boundaries referenced at last inventory and reassess
the condition class delineating data items. If no change has occurred, the current crew will retain the
boundary data that were recorded at last inventory. If a boundary has changed, a new boundary is present,
a procedural change has altered the boundary, or the previous crew made an obvious error; record new or
updated boundary data. Record the reason for the change in PERIODIC TO ANNUAL BOUNDARY
CHANGE (Item 7.2.2.3). Delete boundaries that are no longer distinct. If in doubt about whether or not a
boundary change has occurred, leave boundary as delineated at the previous inventory.
Section 7.2: Reference Procedure
SUBSECTION 7.2.2 BOUNDARY DATA
Record the appropriate values for each boundary mapped on the subplot or microplot as follows:
Item 7.2.2.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 4.2.1) [SUBP]
Generated code corresponding to the number of the subplot.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values:
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
73
pg.
Item 7.2.2.2 PLOT TYPE (CORE 4.2.2) [SUBPTYP]
Record the code to specify whether the boundary data are for a subplot or microplot.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Plot Type
null
No boundaries are recorded for the subplot
1
Subplot boundary
2
Microplot boundary
Item 7.2.2.3 PERIODIC TO ANNUAL BOUNDARY CHANGE (AFSL) [BNDCHG_2PA]
Record the appropriate code to indicate the relationship between previously recorded boundary information
from the periodic inventory and the current boundary information.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: All boundaries.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values:
0
No change - boundary is the same as indicated on plot map or data
collected by a previous crew.
1
New boundary, or boundary data has been changed to reflect a physical
change (i.e., on-the-ground) resulting in a difference from the boundaries
recorded.
2
Boundary has been changed to correct an error from previous crew.
3
Boundary has been changed to reflect a change in variable definition.
Item 7.2.2.4 CONTRASTING CONDITION (CORE 4.2.4) [CONTRAST]
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class that contrasts with the condition class
located at the subplot center (for boundaries on the subplot) or at the microplot center (for boundaries on
the microplot), i.e., the condition class present on the other side of the boundary line.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1 to 9
Item 7.2.2.5 LEFT AZIMUTH (CORE 4.2.5) [AZMLEFT]
Record the azimuth from the subplot, or microplot center to the farthest left point (facing the contrasting
condition) where the boundary intersects the circumference.
Item 7.2.2.6 CORNER AZIMUTH (CORE 4.2.6) [AZMCORN]
Record the azimuth from the subplot, or microplot center to a corner or curve in a boundary. If a boundary is
best described by a straight line between the two circumference points, then record 000 for CORNER
AZIMUTH (000 = none).
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
Values: 000 to 360
Chapter 7: Boundary References
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
Values: 001 to 360
pg.
74
Item 7.2.2.7 CORNER DISTANCE (CORE 4.2.7) [DISTCORN]
Record the horizontal distance, to the nearest 1 foot, from the subplot or microplot center to a boundary
corner point.
When collected: All boundaries when CORNER AZIMUTH > 000
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 foot
Values: Plot Type
Values for Corner Distance
microplot
001 to 007 feet (actual limiting distance is 6.8 feet)
subplot
001 to 024 feet
Item 7.2.2.8 RIGHT AZIMUTH (CORE 4.2.8) [AZMRIGHT]
Record the azimuth from the subplot, or microplot center to the farthest right point (facing the contrasting
condition) where the boundary intersects the circumference.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
Values: 001 to 360
Item 7.2.2.9 BOUNDARY NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]
Record electronic BOUNDARY NOTES, if needed, to clarify or explain a special situation in the boundary
being defined.
Section 7.2: Reference Procedure
When collected: As needed
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences
75
pg.
CHAPTER 8 TREE AND SAPLING DATA
This chapter describes how and where to tally live trees, standing dead trees (snags), and saplings.
Determining which measurements are required is based on tree size, tree status, condition class status, as
well as land ownership. Tree and sapling data yield information on tree volume, growth, mortality, and
removals; wildlife habitats; forest structure and composition; biomass; and carbon sequestration.
This chapter also describes how to record witness trees/stumps/objects. Witness information is recorded
alongside the tree tally information (as witness trees and tally trees can be one in the same). Witness
information assists the next field crew in relocating the center of a previously established plot/subplot.
SECTION 8.1 DEFINITIONS
Trees meeting specific criteria for diameter at breast height (DBH) are included in the sample. General
definitions are listed below, followed by a table containing specific requirements.
Tree: An individual tree is categorized as a live tree, a standing dead tree (snag), or a sapling based on
specific criteria listed in the table below. When the word “tree” is used in the field guide with no additional
descriptors it applies to live trees, snags, and saplings. Applicable species are listed in Appendix D, Tree
Species List.
Live tree: Trees are alive if they have any living parts (leaves, buds, cambium) at or above DBH. Trees that
have been temporarily defoliated are still alive.
Standing dead tree (snag): To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be at least 5.0 inches
in diameter, have a bole which has an unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than
45 degrees from vertical as measured from the base of the tree to 4.5 feet. Dead standing tally trees, and
partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not have to be self-supported. They may be supported by
other trees, branches, or their crown. Standing dead trees, recorded at the previous inventory, that shrink
below minimum diameter and length requirements maintain dead tree status. Portions of boles on dead
trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or below 4.5 feet), are considered severed.
Sapling: Trees ≥1.0 inch but <5.0 inches DBH that meet a minimum length requirement are tallied on the
microplot.
Tally trees: ‘Tally trees’ are defined as all live and standing dead trees in accessible forest land condition
classes encountered on the subplot the first time a subplot is established, and all trees that grow into a
subplot thereafter. ‘Tally saplings’ are defined as all live saplings encountered the first time a microplot is
established, and all saplings that grow into each microplot thereafter, and are included until they grow to 5.0
inches or larger, at which time they are tallied on the subplot and referenced (new AZIMUTH and
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE taken) to the subplot center.
Live tree
Diameter
≥ 5.0 inches DBH
Standing dead tree
≥ 5.0 inches DBH
Sapling
1.0 inch to 4.9 inches DBH
SECTION 8.2 SELECTING TALLY TREES
SUBSECTION 8.2.1 WHERE TO TALLY
Determining whether a tree qualifies as a "tally tree" depends upon a combination of the following:
• STATE
• CONDITION CLASS STATUS
• TREE SPECIES (must be listed on the Tree Species List found in Appendix D)
• DIAMETER (DBH) of the tree
• TREE STATUS
• TREE LENGTH
• HORIZONTAL DISTANCE from the fixed-radius plot center
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
Length
≥ 4.5 feet in length with living parts at or
above DBH
≥ 4.5 feet in length (leaning less than 45
degrees from vertical)
≥ 4.5 feet in length with living parts at or
above DBH
pg.
76
Trees on the subplot and microplot are tallied according to the following rules. If a tree is located in an area
that does not meet the criteria below, it is not a tally tree.
Table 8.1: Where to tally trees in Alaska
ALASKA [STATE = 02]
CONDITION CLASS
OWNERSHIP TYPE:
All lands outside of the Chugach Chugach National Forest land
National Forest [ADMINISTRATIVE [ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE =
FOREST CODE = null or 1005]
1004]
TREES ARE TALLIED IN:
Accessible forest land condition
Accessible forest land and nonforest
classes [CONDITION CLASS
land condition classes [CONDITION
STATUS = 1]
CLASS STATUS = 1 or 2]
MICROPLOT (6.8-foot radius) All live saplings (1.0 inches to 4.9 inches DBH) on the microplot are tallied
and referenced to the microplot center
SUBPLOT (24.0-foot radius)
All live trees and snags ≥ 5.0 inches DBH on the subplot are tallied and
referenced to the subplot center
SUBSECTION 8.2.2 WITHIN PLOT AREA CRITERIA
Trees and saplings are selected for tally (measurement) only when the HORIZONTAL DISTANCE from the
microplot/subplot center to the bole center at the ground is less than or equal to the radius of that microplot/
subplot. Trees must be selected for tally within the appropriate fixed-radius area without error. The
tolerances for HORIZONTAL DISTANCE to trees (Item 8.4.1.11) do not apply when determining whether a
tree is tallied within the specified plot area.
Note: The method for determining whether or not a tree was selected for measurement in the previous
(periodic) inventory was different than current annual procedures. Previously, a tree was selected for
measurement if the bole center of the tree at DBH was at or within the fixed-radius plot. In this inventory, a
tree will be selected if the bole center at the ground is at or within the fixed-radius plot (8.1).
Section 8.2: Selecting Tally Trees
Note: During the previous inventory, the microplot was located at subplot center, rather than at its current
location (90 degrees and 12.0 feet from subplot center).
Figure 8.1: Horizontal distance from plot center criteria for determining tally trees.
77
pg.
SECTION 8.3 CONDUCTING THE TREE TALLY
Begin tallying trees at an azimuth of 001 degrees from subplot center and continue clockwise around the
subplot. Work outward from subplot center to subplot perimeter. Repeat this sequence for trees on the
microplot. Select, record, and tag subplot witness trees/stumps/objects while recording tree tracking data
on the subplot.
SUBSECTION 8.3.1 SUBPLOT WITNESS TREES/OBJECTS
Each of the four subplot center pins should be referenced by a minimum of two subplot witness trees/
objects. Use the following procedures to select and record witnesses. Refer to Table 3.1: Subplot witness
monumentation, for specific monumentation guidelines.
A. Selecting witnesses: Select two trees/objects near the subplot center which form, as closely as
possible, a right angle with the center marker. Trees within six feet of the subplot center are preferable.
If live trees are not available, use sound snags, stumps, or objects. On subplots established previously,
reuse the previous witness trees, unless better trees are available.
B. Monumenting witnesses: Monumentation procedures vary depending on the subplot being witnessed;
plot center (PC, center of subplot 1) has different monumentation than subplots 2 through 4. Refer to
Table 3.1: Subplot witness monumentation, for specific monumentation guidelines.
C. Recording witness data (all subplots on the standard layout): Identify witness trees/snags/stumps/
objects in the data recorder (PDR) using the procedures listed below:
•
Tally tree/snag (a trackable tree record): Record SUBPLOT TALLY TREE WITNESS FLAG = Y
(Item 8.4.1.6) to mark tally trees/snags as witnesses.
•
Non-tally tree/snag: Enter a new record for the tree/snag; record PRESENT TREE STATUS = 8,
witness non-tally tree (Item 8.4.1.5).
•
Stump: Enter a new record for the stump; record PRESENT TREE STATUS = 7, witness stump
(Item 8.4.1.5). Note: When recording stumps as witnesses, use the guidelines listed in Subsection
8.5.2 (Diameter on Stumps) to measure diameter.
•
Shrub or object: Enter a new record for the shrub or object; record PRESENT TREE STATUS = 9,
witness-only object (Item 8.4.1.5). Note: Record the shrub species name in TREE NOTES (Item
8.9.1.1).
In addition, record the following information for each witness:
•
SPECIES - If applicable (Item 8.4.1.9)
•
AZIMUTH - Subplot center to tree (Item 8.4.1.10)
•
SLOPE DISTANCE TO WITNESS TREE OR OBJECT - From the subplot stake/pin where it enters
the ground to the head of the top nail affixing the basal tag (Item 8.4.1.12)
•
DIAMETER (Item 8.5.3.2)
Note: For witnesses, distance is always recorded as a slope distance from the subplot center to the tag
at the base of the tree, rather than as a horizontal distance to the center of the tree collected for tally
trees.
This subsection provides information about recording tree data on subplots with special circumstances.
•
If all accessible forest condition classes within subplot 1 have no tally trees present, two records are
required to witness subplot center. These witness records can represent sound stumps or snags,
but live trees are preferable.
•
If the plot is entirely nonforest and it was ground visited, record two witness records for subplot 1.
•
If the plot is entirely nonforest and it is on Chugach National Forest land, record two witness records
for each subplot.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
SUBSECTION 8.3.2 SUBPLOTS/CONDITIONS WITHOUT TALLY TREES
pg.
78
SECTION 8.4 TREE TRACKING
SUBSECTION 8.4.1 TREE TRACKING DATA ITEMS
Item 8.4.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 5.1) [SUBP]
A 1-digit code, generated for each tree record entered into the PDR, regardless of the status of the tree
record (live tree, snag, witness-only tree, etc.).
When Collected: All tree records
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
Item 8.4.1.2 TREE RECORD NUMBER (CORE 5.2) [TREE]
A 3-digit code, assigned by the PDR, to uniquely and permanently identify each tree on a given subplot.
TREE RECORD NUMBERS may be updated by the crew, but they must be unique within a subplot – being
unique is more important than being sequential. In general, work clockwise from azimuth 001 to 360, and
work outwards from subplot center to subplot perimeter. On AK-Remeasurement plots, use the previously
assigned TREE RECORD NUMBER. Saplings tallied on microplots will retain their initially assigned TREE
RECORD NUMBER if they grow to tree size. Missed trees will be assigned the next available TREE
RECORD NUMBER. Do not renumber all plot trees in order to assign a more “correct” TREE RECORD
NUMBER to a missed tree. Numbers assigned to trees that are subsequently found to be extra will be
dropped and not reused. TREE RECORD NUMBERS will be "written" on tally trees with paint stick or
marking crayon, and should face plot center if possible. Note: Although witness-only trees/objects will be
assigned a TREE RECORD NUMBER by the PDR, it should not be written on the tree.
On new installations (PNW PLOT KIND = 1 or 5), TREE RECORD NUMBER will start at 001 with the first
tree and continue in sequence.
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), TREE RECORD NUMBER will be downloaded
from the previous visit. If there is a gap in the numbering sequence of downloaded trees (e.g., jumps from 1
to 5), do not insert TREE RECORD NUMBERS for new trees, they will be automatically assigned by the
PDR. Do not change newly assigned numbers unless the "new" tree was clearly tallied in the previous
inventory (HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, AZIMUTH, SPECIES, DIAMETER all match, and/or the old tree
number is visible). This may occur on trees with current diameters just over 5.0 inches; the conversion from
metric to English units resulted in previously tallied trees just under 5.0 inches being dropped from the data
set.
When Collected: All tree records
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 001 to 999
Section 8.4: Tree Tracking
Item 8.4.1.3 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (CORE 5.3) [CONDID; PREVCOND; PREV_CONDID_P2A]
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER in which each tree is located. Often, a referenced boundary is
approximate, and trees selected for tally are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of
the recorded approximate boundary (8.2).
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), the previous CONDITION CLASS NUMBER is
downloaded and displayed on the PDR for each AK-Remeasurement tree. If necessary, change the
CONDITION CLASS NUMBER to reflect current condition classes and boundaries.
When Collected: All tally trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1 to 9
79
pg.
Figure 8.2: Ragged condition class boundary and tree condition class designation
Item 8.4.1.4 PREVIOUS TREE STATUS (AFSL) [PREV_STATUSCD_P2A]
A downloaded code for all trees tallied at the previous inventory. This code is used to track the status of
sample trees over time, correct even if the tree no longer qualifies as a tally tree. Add PREVIOUS TREE
STATUS if null and tree was not tallied at the previous inventory because of a definition or procedural
change (RECONCILE = 10); see Appendix A (Historical Inventory Information) for periodic inventory
procedures.
When Collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: downloaded for all previously tallied trees ≥ 1.0
inch DBH. Update when null and RECONCILE = 10.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
1
Live Tree – alive at the previous inventory
2
Dead tree – standing dead tree at the previous inventory
Item 8.4.1.5 PRESENT TREE STATUS (CORE 5.7) [STATUSCD_PNWRS; Regional codes 7, 8, 9 loaded in
NON_TALLY_TREE_PNWRS]
Record a PRESENT TREE STATUS for each tallied tree; this code is used to track the status of sample
trees over time: as they first appear, as ingrowth, as they survive, and when they die or are removed.
Witness-only trees/stumps/objects are also assigned a PRESENT TREE STATUS.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 1 or 5: all new live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inches DBH; all new
dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH; and witness non-tally trees, witness stumps, and
witness-only objects.
When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all previously tallied trees.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code
Tree Status Description
0
No Status
AK-Remeasurement plots only. Tree is not presently in the
sample. Tree was incorrectly tallied at the previous
inventory or currently is not tallied due to definition or
procedural change, or is not tallied due to natural causes
(e.g., moved beyond the radius of the plot by small earth
movement, hurricane, etc). Requires RECONCILE code =
5-9
1
Live Tree
Any live tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth)
pg.
80
2
3
7
8
Dead Tree
Any dead tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth) regardless
of cause of death. Includes all previously standing dead
trees that no longer qualify as standing dead, as well as
trees killed by silvicultural or land clearing activity, and are
assumed not to have been utilized. Includes: previously
dead standing, now down, and previously dead standing
that no longer meet diameter and length requirements.
Removed
AK-Remeasurement plots only. A tree that has been cut or
removed by direct human activity related to harvesting,
silvicultural activity or land clearing. The tree is assumed
to have been utilized.
Witness Stump A subplot witness that is a stump*.
Witness NonTally Tree
Witness-Only
Object
A non-tally live or dead tree that is to be used for a
subplot witness.
9
A subplot witness that is not a tree. It may be a shrub,
rock, or other; TREE NOTES are required to describe the
witness.
*Refer to Subsection 8.5.2, Diameter on Stumps, for stump diameter measurement guidelines.
Item 8.4.1.6 SUBPLOT TALLY TREE WITNESS (PNW) [SUBP_WITNESS_FLAG_PNWRS]
Use this data item to mark the current tally tree (live or dead) as a witness. See Subsection 3.3.2, Witness
Trees/Objects, for witness monumentation instructions. Note: The default for this item is “N”; update the
field to “Y” to record a witness.
When collected: When PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1; or when PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and
STANDING DEAD = 1
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
N
current record is not a tally tree witness
Y
current record is a tally tree witness
Item 8.4.1.7 STANDING DEAD (CORE 5.7.2) [STANDING_DEAD_CD]
Record the code that describes whether or not a tree qualifies as standing dead. Standing dead trees must
be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole which has an unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5
feet, and lean less than 45 degrees from vertical as measured from the base of the tree to 4.5 feet. See 8.3
through 8.5.
“Unbroken” is defined as at least 50 percent attached to the original source of growth. The degree of lean
on dead trees with partially separated (i.e., 1 to 50 percent) boles is measured from the base of the tree to
the top of ACTUAL LENGTH.
Portions of boles on dead trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or below 4.5 feet),
are considered severed and are not included in any tree measurements.
Section 8.4: Tree Tracking
Live and dead standing tally trees, and partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not have to be selfsupported. They may be supported by other trees, branches, or their crown.
81
pg.
Figure 8.3: Example of an unbroken bole to 4.5 feet
Figure 8.4: Example of an unbroken bole of <1.5 feet
When Collected: All dead tally trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
0
No – tree does not qualify as standing dead.
1
Yes – tree does qualify as standing dead.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
Figure 8.5: Other examples of dead trees
pg.
82
Item 8.4.1.8 RECONCILE (AFSL) [RECONCILECD_P2A]
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3) only, record a RECONCILE code for any new
tally tree that was not tallied in the previous inventory, and for all no status remeasurement trees
(PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0). This code is used to identify the reason a new tree appeared in the
inventory, and to identify the reason a remeasurement tree no longer qualifies as a tally tree.
Section 8.4: Tree Tracking
Code “5” is used to indicate live trees that shrink below the diameter threshold on the microplot/subplot. For
example, if a live remeasurement tree shrinks below the 5.0 inch DBH/DRC, then record the following
combination of codes: PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0, RECONCILE = 5. If
a live measured tree shrinks below the 5.0 inch threshold on the subplot and is currently greater than or
equal to 1.0 inch on the microplot, then record PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS
= 1. Record all required items for a tally sapling. Use the Tree Coding Guide in Appendix E to determine the
coding method for AK-Remeasurement trees.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all new live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH (PRESENT
TREE STATUS = 1 and no PREVIOUS TREE STATUS); all new dead tally trees ≥
5.0 inch (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and no PREVIOUS TREE STATUS); all no
status trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0).
Field width: 2 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Ingrowth or
Either a new tally tree not qualifying as through
Codes 1 - 4 and
reversions
growth or a new tree on land that was formerly
10 are valid for
nonforest and now qualifies as forest land (includes
new trees on the
reversion or encroachment).
plot:
2
Through growth
New tally tree 5.0 inches DBH/DRC and larger, within
the microplot, which was not missed at the previous
inventory.
3
Missed live
A live tree missed at previous inventory and that is
live or dead now.
4
Missed dead
A dead tree missed at previous inventory that is dead
now.
10
Procedural change A tree not tallied at the previous inventory but
included in the tree tally now because of a definition
or procedural change. See Appendix A (Historical
Inventory Information) for periodic inventory
procedures.
5
Shrank
Live tree that shrank below threshold diameter on
Codes 5 - 9 are
microplot/subplot.
valid for AKRemeasured
6
Moved
Tree was correctly tallied in previous inventory, but
trees that no
has now moved beyond the radius of the plot due to
longer qualify as
natural causes (i.e., small earth movement,
tally:
hurricane). Tree must be either live before and still
alive now or dead before and dead now. If tree was
live before and now dead, this is a mortality tree and
should have PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 (not 0).
7
Cruiser error
Erroneously tallied at previous inventory.
8
Procedural Change Tree was tallied at the previous inventory, but is no
longer tallied because of a definition or procedural
change.
9
Sampled before
Tree was sampled before, but now the area where
the tree was located is nonsampled. All trees on the
nonsampled area have RECONCILE = 9.
83
pg.
Item 8.4.1.9 SPECIES (CORE 5.8) [SPCD; PREV_SPCD_PNWRS]
Record the SPECIES code from the Tree Species List in Appendix D. If you encounter a species not listed
in Appendix D, it should not be tallied. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the tree, but
bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to the office for identification. If possible, collect
samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the SPECIES code later.
Genus-only codes should not be used for live trees and are not included in Appendix D. In the case of
standing dead trees on newly established plots, use the sample collections procedures described earlier in
this paragraph.
Note: The Tree Species List appendix contains all tree species designated as “Core” on the national list
and all additional species tallied in PNW during the current inventory. Code “999” is not a valid species
code for PNW.
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), previous SPECIES information will be
downloaded and displayed in the current SPECIES field in the PDR for each AK-Remeasurement tree.
Correct the SPECIES code if the SPECIES was incorrectly identified even if the tree is no longer a valid
tally tree (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0).
When Collected: All trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0-8)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See TREE SPECIES LIST, Appendix D
Item 8.4.1.10 AZIMUTH (CORE 5.4) [AZIMUTH; PREV_AZM_PNWRS]
Sight the AZIMUTH from the subplot center (for trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH) or the microplot center (for live
trees ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches DBH) to the center of the base of the tree. Record AZIMUTH to the
nearest degree. Use 360 for north.
•
For pistol butt trees, record the AZIMUTH to the pith where the pith intersects the ground (Figures 8.6
through 8.8 below).
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), previous AZIMUTH will be downloaded into the
current AZIMUTH field. The current crew is responsible for verifying downloaded data and updating when it
is out of tolerance.
•
For live trees on the subplot that shrink to become saplings on the microplot at AK-Remeasurement,
crews must collect new AZIMUTH from the microplot center.
Note: At the previous inventory, AZIMUTH was measured to the center of bole at DBH. The current
inventory measures AZIMUTH to the center of bole at the base of the tree. When necessary, update
previous AZIMUTH using current procedures for all new and AK-Remeasurement trees.
Measure DISTANCE & AZIMUTH to the point where the pith intersects the ground
Figure 8.8: Pistol butt on flat ground
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH, standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH, and
witness-only trees/stumps/objects. When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3, downloaded
previous AZIMUTH must be verified.
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: Tally trees: +/- 10 degrees
Witness-only trees/stumps/objects: +/- 4 degrees
Values: 001 to 360
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
Figure 8.6: Pistol butt on sloped ground Figure 8.7: Krummholtz situation
pg.
84
Item 8.4.1.11 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (CORE 5.5) [DIST; PREV_HORIZ_DIST_PNWRS]
Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from the subplot center (for trees
≥ 5.0 inches DBH) or microplot center (for live trees ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches DBH) to the pith of the tree
at the base.
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), previous HORIZONTAL DISTANCE will be
downloaded into the current HORIZONTAL DISTANCE field. The current crew is responsible for verifying
downloaded data and updating when it is out of tolerance. There is no tolerance for added or missed trees
regardless of the previous crew's downloaded data.
•
For live trees on the subplot that shrink to become saplings on the microplot at AK-Remeasurement,
crews must collect new HORIZONTAL DISTANCE from the microplot center.
Note: At the previous inventory, HORIZONTAL DISTANCE was measured to the center of bole at DBH.
The current inventory measures HORIZONTAL DISTANCE to the center of bole at the base of the tree.
When necessary, update previous HORIZONTAL DISTANCE using current procedures for all new and AKRemeasurement trees.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH, standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inch DBH. When
PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3, downloaded previous DISTANCE must be verified.
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance: Microplot: +/- 0.2 feet
Subplot: +/- 1.0 feet
Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 06.8
Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0
Item 8.4.1.12 SLOPE DISTANCE TO WITNESS TREE OR OBJECT (PNW)
[SLOPE_DIST_TO_WITNESS_PNWRS]
Record the SLOPE DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from the base of the subplot center pin, to the head
of the nail that affixes the basal tag or other witness object. If more than one nail is used to affix the basal
tag, measure to the head of the top nail. If a basal tag cannot be attached to the witness object, or if in
national parks where basal tags cannot be used, measure from the base of the subplot to the front of the
tree/object at the base.
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), previous SLOPE DISTANCE will be downloaded
into the current SLOPE DISTANCE field. The current crew is responsible for verifying downloaded data and
updating when it is out of tolerance.
When Collected: All witness trees, stumps, or objects (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 or 2 and
SUBPLOT TALLY TREE WITNESS FLAG = Y; or PRESENT TREE STATUS = 7, 8,
or 9). When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: previous SLOPE DISTANCE must be
verified.
Field width: 4 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance: +/- 0.2 feet
Values: 00.1 to 99.9
SECTION 8.5 DIAMETER
Section 8.5: Diameter
Diameters are measured at breast height (DBH). Trees with diameters between 1.0- and 4.9-inches are
measured on the 6.8-foot radius microplot, those with diameters of 5.0-inches and larger are measured on
the 24-foot radius subplots.
Diameters are used in calculating volume, growth, average stand diameter, and stocking-related estimates
such as forest type and stand size.
Unless one of the special situations listed in Subsection 8.5.3 is encountered, measure DBH at 4.5 feet
above the ground line on the uphill side of the tree. On trees with the root collar above ground level, DBH
should be taken at 4.5 feet above the highest point of the root collar.
85
pg.
SUBSECTION 8.5.1 MARKING CURRENT DIAMETER:
1. Marking saplings < 3.0 inches DBH:
•
Mark location of diameter measurement with a grease pencil.
2. Marking live trees ≥ 3.0 inches DBH, or snags ≥ 5.0 inches DBH, tallied for the first time:
•
Set an aluminum nail at the point of diameter measurement. Place the nail on the side of the tree
facing subplot/microplot center. On steep slopes, where placing the nail towards subplot/microplot
center is not possible, place the nail on the uphill side of the bole. The nail should be driven in only as
far as is necessary to firmly anchor it in the wood.
•
Use caution to avoid damaging trees.
3. Additional instructions for marking diameter on trees ≥ 32.0 inches:
If a live tree or snag (new or AK-Remeasured) is 32.0 inches DBH or larger, affix an additional nail, and
for every additional 12 inches of diameter add another nail, distributing the nails evenly around the
circumference of the bole (e.g., a 44.3 inch tree would have three nails around the circumference of the
tree at DBH – ideally, one on the uphill side of the tree and the other two about 1/3 of the way around the
tree on each side). Set these nails while the diameter tape is wrapped around the tree at the point of
diameter.
4. Marking DBH on trees previously marked:
The DBH location on previously tallied trees ≥ 3.0 inches was marked with an aluminum nail.
Remeasure diameter at the location of the previous crew’s nail if appropriate using the rules below:
•
For live trees: Reset the old nail enough so that as much of the old nail is exposed as possible. If the
old nail cannot be pulled out to meet this requirement, set a new nail at the same location.
•
For dead trees: Pound the nail flush with the bole.
•
For live and dead trees: If the previous location is no longer accessible (e.g., covered by a landslide),
there is an abnormality at the PREVIOUS DIAMETER measurement point, or it is more than 12
inches away from where the diameter should be measured according to current protocols (either
because protocols have changed or the previous crew made a mistake) move the point of
measurement and the nail, and assign a DIAMETER CHECK code of “2”.
•
•
•
If the point of DBH measurement is being moved (on live or dead trees), follow the instructions
outlined in PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (Item 8.5.3.1) to estimate a new
PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT.
If the old nail marks a point of diameter measurement not used at the current inventory, remove it
if possible; otherwise pound it in flush with the tree.
If the previous nail falls within the range of tolerance outlined above, do not pull it out of the tree just
because it is not facing the subplot center. Keep original placement of nails at all times unless there
is an obvious error.
5. The following apply at AK-Remeasurement:
If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as two separate trees but should have been
recorded as one tree, delete one tree by giving it a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0 and RECONCILE
= 7 or 8 (depending on whether it was an error or a procedural change), and remove the nail. Correct
the PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (Item 8.5.3.1) for the remaining tree, relocate the
nail, and assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 or 2 with DIAMETER CHECK = 2. Record an
explanation in TREE NOTES.
•
If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as one tree but should have been recorded as two
separate trees, correct the PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT for the remeasured tree to
represent one tree, and add the other fork as a missed tree. Use the existing tree data line to
represent one of the stems; PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 or 2, DIAMETER CHECK = 2, and a
TREE NOTE. The second stem would get PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 or 2, RECONCILE = 3 or 4,
and a TREE NOTE.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
•
pg.
86
SUBSECTION 8.5.2 DIAMETER ON STUMPS
Diameter on stump < 4.5 feet tall: Use a logger's tape, cloth tape or ruler to measure the longest and
shortest axes across the top of the stump. Record diameter as the average of the two measurements.
SUBSECTION 8.5.3 DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT
Special DBH situations:
1. Forked tree: In order to qualify as a fork, the stem in question must be at least 1/3 the diameter of the
main stem and must branch out from the main stem at an angle of 45 degrees or less. Forks originate at
the point on the bole where the piths intersect. Forked trees are handled differently depending on
whether the fork originates below 1.0 feet, between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, or above 4.5 feet.
A. Trees forked below 1.0 foot: Trees forked below 1.0 foot (see 8.9)
are treated as distinctly separate trees. Distances and azimuths are
measured individually to the center of each stem where it splits from
the stump. DBH is measured for each stem at 4.5 feet above the
ground. When stems originate from pith intersections below 1 foot, it
is possible for some stems to be within the limiting distance of the
microplot or subplot, and others to be beyond the limiting distance.
If stems originating from forks that occur below 1.0 foot fork again
between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, the rules in the next paragraph apply.
Figure 8.9: Trees forked below
1.0 foot
B. Trees forked between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet: Trees
forked between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet (see 8.10) are also
tallied as separate trees, but the same distance and
azimuth (to the central stump) is recorded for each stem.
Although a single azimuth and distance applies to all,
multiple stems should be recorded as they occur in
clockwise order (from front to back when one stem is
directly in front of another). The DBH of each fork is
measured at a point 3.5 feet above the pith intersection.
When forks originate from pith intersections between 1.0
and 4.5 feet, the limiting distance is the same for all forks
– they are either all on, or all off the plot.
•
Section 8.5: Diameter
•
Multiple forks are possible if they all originate from
Figure 8.10: Forked between
approximately the same point on the main stem. In
1.0 and 4.5 feet
such cases, measure DBH on all stems at 3.5 feet
above the common pith intersection.
Once a stem is tallied as a fork that originated from a pith intersection between 1.0 and 4.5 feet,
do not recognize any additional forks that may occur on that stem. Measure the diameter of such
stems below the base of stem separation (i.e., do not move the point of diameter the entire 3.5
feet above the first fork).
Figure 8.11: Where to measure DBH on trees forked above 1.0 feet.
87
pg.
C. Trees forked at or above 4.5 feet: Trees forked at or
above 4.5 feet count as one single tree (Figure 8.12:
One tree). If a fork occurs at or immediately above 4.5
feet, measure diameter below the fork just beneath
any swelling that would inflate DBH.
2. Stump sprouts: Stump sprouts originate between
ground level and 4.5 feet on the boles of trees that have
died or have been cut. Stump sprouts are handled the
same as forked trees, with the exception that stump
sprouts are not required to be 1/3 the diameter of the
Figure 8.12: One tree
dead bole. Stump sprouts originating below 1.0 feet are
measured at 4.5 feet from ground line. Stump sprouts
originating between 1.0 feet and 4.5 feet are measured at 3.5 foot above their point of occurrence. As
with forks, rules for measuring distance and azimuth depend on whether the sprouts originate above or
below 1.0 feet.
3. Tree with butt-swell or bottleneck: Measure these trees 1.5 feet above the end of the swell or
bottleneck if the swell or bottleneck extends 3.0 feet or more above the ground (Figure 8.13: Bottleneck
tree, butt swell).
4. Tree with irregularities at DBH: On trees with swellings, bumps, depressions, and branches at DBH,
diameter will be measured immediately above the irregularity at the place it ceases to affect normal stem
form (8.13 through 8.15).
Figure 8.13: Bottleneck tree, butt Figure 8.14: Tree with a
swell
swell at 4.5 feet
Figure 8.15: Tree with a branch at 4.5
feet
5. Tree on slope: Measure diameter at 4.5 feet from the ground along the bole on the uphill side of the
tree (Figure 8.16: Tree on a slope).
6. Leaning tree: Measure diameter at 4.5
feet from the ground along the bole. The
4.5 foot distance is measured along the
underside face of the bole (Figure 8.17:
Leaning tree).
Figure 8.16: Tree on a slope Figure 8.17: Leaning tree
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
7. Turpentine tree: On trees with
turpentine face extending above 4.5 feet,
estimate the diameter at 10.0 feet above
the ground and multiply by 1.1 to
estimate DBH outside bark.
pg.
88
8. Independent trees that grow together: If two or more
independent stems have grown together at or above the
point of DBH (8.18), continue to treat them as separate
trees. Set two diameter nails at DBH halfway around the
tree's circumference from each other (after placing 1st nail,
stand back from bole; take azimuth to nail; on opposite side
of bole, place nail where the back azimuth of the first nail
lines up). Measure the distance between the nails with a
diameter tape. Multiply the measurement by 2 and record
the result as the current diameter. Example: Distance
measured = 12.8 inches (12.8 X 2) = 25.6 inches. Set the
DIAMETER CHECK code to “7”.
•
If unable to use the “Double Nail Method” estimate the Figure 8.18: Independent trees growing
diameter of each, set the “DIAMETER CHECK” code to together
“1“, and explain the situation in TREE NOTES.
9. Missing wood or bark: Do not
reconstruct the DBH of a tree that is
missing wood or bark at the point of
measurement (8.19). Record the
diameter, to the nearest 0.1 inch, of
the wood and bark that is still attached
to the tree. If a tree has a localized
abnormality (gouge, depression, etc.)
at the point of DBH, apply the
procedure described for trees with
irregularities at DBH.
10.Live windthrown tree: Measure from
the top of the root collar along the
length to 4.5 feet (8.20).
Figure 8.19: Tree with
missing wood or bark
Figure 8.20: Live wind-thrown
tree
11. Down live tree with tree-form branches growing vertical from main bole: When a down live tree,
touching the ground, has vertical (less than 45 degrees from vertical) tree-like branches coming off the
main bole, determine whether or not the pith of the main bole (averaged along the first log of the tree) is
above or below the duff layer.
A. If the pith of the main bole is above the duff layer, use the same forking rules specified for a forked
tree, and take all measurements accordingly.
Section 8.5: Diameter
•
If the pith
intersection of the
main down bole and
vertical tree-like
branch occurs
below 4.5 feet from
the stump along the
main bole, treat that
branch as a
separate tree, and
measure DBH 3.5
feet above the pith
intersection for both
the main bole and
the tree-like branch
(8.21).
Figure 8.21: Down tree above duff
89
pg.
•
If the intersection
between the main
down bole and the
tree-like branch
occurs beyond the
4.5 foot point from
the stump along the
main bole, treat that
branch as part of
the main down bole
(8.22).
Figure 8.22: Branch beyond 4.5 feet from stump
B. If the pith of main tree
bole is below the duff
layer, ignore the main
bole, and treat each
tree-like branch as a
separate tree; take
DBH and length
measurements from the
ground, not necessarily
from the top of the
down bole (8.23).
However, if the top of
the main tree bole
curves out of the
ground towards a
Figure 8.23: Down tree below duff
vertical angle, treat that
portion of that top as an
individual tree originating where the pith leaves the duff layer.
12.Tree with curved bole (pistol butt tree): Measure along the bole on the uphill side (upper surface) of
the tree (8.24).
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
Figure 8.24: Tree with curved bole (pistol butt tree)
pg.
90
Item 8.5.3.1 PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (AFSL) [PREV_DIA_P2A]
The DBH assigned at the periodic inventory has been downloaded. Any change made to this field signifies
a procedural change or an error at the time of the previous inventory.
Downloaded data should be verified, and updated if one of two situations occurs:
1. The current diameter measurement point is moved to correspond with the corrected location (either
procedural change or previous crew error). DIAMETER CHECK should be set to “2”; an explanation is
required in the electronic TREE NOTES.
2. It is clear that there was a typo or a poorly estimated PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT.
Estimate the new value for PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT by doing one of the following:
•
Take an increment core at the location of the previous diameter measurement: From the cambium,
count back the number of growth rings since the previous visit. Measure this increment to the nearest
1/20 inch and subtract it from the current diameter at previous location. This will provide you with an
estimate to correct the PREVIOUS DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT from the same location.
•
Measure the diameter at both the correct diameter location and at the previous diameter location.
Determine the difference between these two diameters. Add or subtract this value (the difference) to
the downloaded value of the PREVIOUS DIAMETER. This will provide an estimate of PREVIOUS
DIAMETER corresponding to the corrected location.
•
Estimate the correct PREVIOUS DIAMETER based on the "best" information at hand (e.g., the
PREVIOUS DIAMETER of similar sized nearby trees of the same species).
When collected: Downloaded when PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all previously tallied trees ≥ 1.0 inch
DBH.
Field width: 5 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: N/A
Values: 001.0 to 999.9
Item 8.5.3.2 DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (CORE 5.9.2) [DIA]
Unless one of the special situations listed in Subsection 8.5.3 (Diameter at Breast Height; Special DBH
Situations) is encountered, measure DBH at 4.5 feet above the ground line on the uphill side of the tree. On
trees with the root collar above ground level, DBH should be taken at 4.5 feet above the highest point of the
root collar. Round each measurement down to the last 0.1 inch. For example, a reading of 3.68 inches is
recorded as 3.6 inches.
Section 8.5: Diameter
When collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inches DBH, standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH,
witness-only trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1, 2 or 8); and witness stumps*
(PRESENT TREE STATUS = 7)
Field width: 5 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: Live trees and dead trees
+/- 0.1 inches per 20.0 inches increment of measured
with DECAY CLASS 1, 2
diameter.
Dead trees with DECAY
+/- 1.0 inches per 20.0 inches increment of measured
CLASS 3, 4, 5
diameter.
Values: 001.0 to 999.9
*Note: Although stumps do not meet DBH criteria, their DIAMETERS are recorded in this data item.
91
pg.
Item 8.5.3.3 SNAG ESTIMATED DIAMETER (PNW) [DIA_EST_PNWRS]
When DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT of a snag appears to be less than 75 percent of the DIAMETER AT
BREAST HEIGHT when the tree was alive, because of breakage or rot, record an estimate of the
DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT of tree when it was alive (see 8.25).
This data item is complimentary to the ROTTEN/MISSING CULL data item, and is used to calculate the
total volume of the snag before breakage or rot occurred.
Figure 8.25: How to estimate SNAG ESTIMATED DIAMETER
When collected: All snags (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2) when DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT
appears to be less than 75 percent of DBH when the tree was alive (see 8.25)
Field width: 5 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: +/- 5.0 inches per 20 inches of live DBH
Values: null, 005.0 to 999.9
Item 8.5.3.4 DIAMETER CHECK (AFSL) [DIACHECK_P2A]
If diameter is estimated because of moss/vine/obstruction, record an estimate of the diameter without the
obstruction. Do not remove moss, lichens, or vines.
If diameter at the current inventory is measured at a different location than at the previous inventory, record
DIAMETER CHECK = 2 and remove the d-nail(s) from the previous inventory. If the previous point diameter
measurement cannot be found on a live tree (i.e., nail fell out) also record code “2”.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inches DBH and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
Record this code to identify any irregularities in diameter measurement positions (e.g., abnormal swellings,
diseases, damage, new measurement positions, etc.) that may affect use of this tree in diameter growth/
change analyses. If both code 2 and code 1, 5, 6, or 7 apply, diameter is both estimated and moved, use
code 2 and change the PREVIOUS DIAMETER if necessary.
pg.
92
Values:
PNW
Code
0
1
2
5
6
7
Description
Diameter measured accurately at correct location
Diameter estimated, for any reason other than moss,
vines, or the double nail method
Diameter measured at different location than previous
measurement (remove original d-nail): no old nail found,
or previous diameter was obviously incorrect; value has
been updated
Diameter estimated because of moss
Diameter estimated because of vines
Diameter estimated (double nail diameter)
Core Code
(office use only)
0
1
0
1
1
1
SECTION 8.6 TREE GROWTH
Item 8.6.0.1 10-YEAR INCREMENT (PNW) [INC10YR_PNWRS]
This is a 3-digit code recording bored radial increment for all conifer species and red alder. Measurement is
taken to the nearest 1/20th inch, for a 10-year period. 10-YEAR INCREMENT is recorded for one tree in
each 2-inch DBH class (ex. 6-inch class = 5.0" - 6.9") per species combination on new plots and for new
trees on AK-Remeasurement plots.
Do not collect increment for any hardwood species except red alder, on or off of the plot.
To obtain a radial increment:
Step 1. Bore the tree just below the point where diameter measurement was taken (to avoid
impacting the diameter measurement), on the side of the tree facing subplot center; if
impossible, bore the tree on the side opposite subplot center. If neither of these locations will
suffice, bore the tree just below the point of diameter measurement at any accessible location on
the tree’s circumference.
Step 2. Count back 10 growth rings from the cambium end of the core starting from the first fully-formed
ring (and skipping this year's summer growth). See diagram below:
Section 8.6: Tree Growth
Figure 8.26: Bored tree core showing where to measure 10-year radial increments.
Step 3. Measure the length of this segment of the core to the nearest 1/20th inch to get radial increment.
Enter this radial increment as the number of twentieths, e.g., 18/20 is recorded "18" and 27/20 is
recorded "27".
When collected: On new plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 1 or 5): one tree per 2” DBH class per species per
condition for all live conifer species and red alder ≥ 5.0” DBH.
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3): one tree per 2” DBH class
per species per condition for new live trees (in-growth, through-growth, or missed
previously).
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: 1/20th per 1 inch of increment
Values: 001 to 999
93
pg.
SUBSECTION 8.6.1 TREE LENGTH
Item 8.6.1.1 PREVIOUS ACTUAL LENGTH (PNW) [PREV_ACTUALHT_PNWRS]
This is the actual tree length measured by the field crew during the previous visit. It has been downloaded
from the periodic inventory and will be editable by the current field crew. These data are provided to help
ensure quality of tree length data through comparison of the previous length versus the currently measured
length, and to assist in estimation of current tree length, if estimation is necessary due to lean, dead top,
etc.
Editing or otherwise overwriting the PREVIOUS ACTUAL LENGTH is restricted to the following scenarios:
1. Obvious error: Correct PREVIOUS ACTUAL LENGTH if error appears to be greater than twenty percent
of the PREVIOUS ACTUAL LENGTH.
2. Data entry error: Correct PREVIOUS ACTUAL LENGTH if error is diagnosable as a typographical error.
Any change made to this field signifies an error at the time of the previous inventory.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all downloaded live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH; and
standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inch DBH with a measured (not estimated) ACTUAL
LENGTH at the previous inventory.
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: N/A
Values: 005 to 400
Item 8.6.1.2 ACTUAL LENGTH (CORE 5.15) [ACTUALHT]
The ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree is recorded from ground level (measured from the uphill side of a tree on
a slope) to the highest remaining portion of the tree still present and attached to the bole. For trees with
missing tops (top on live trees is completely detached; top on dead trees is greater than 50 percent
detached from the tree), record the ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level
to the break. Use the length to the break for ACTUAL LENGTH until a new leader qualifies as the new top
for TOTAL LENGTH; until that occurs, continue to record ACTUAL LENGTH to the break. Trees with
previously broken tops are considered recovered (i.e., ACTUAL LENGTH = TOTAL LENGTH) when a new
leader is 1/3 the diameter of the broken top at the point where the top was broken (not where the new
leader originates from the trunk). Account for lean (see Figure 8.27: Measuring height of leaning tree), but
do not add length for crooks and sweeps. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.
ACTUAL LENGTH should only differ from TOTAL LENGTH if the tree has a broken or missing top.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 5 percent of true length for live trees < 60 feet
+/- 10 percent of true length for live trees ≥ 60 feet and all dead trees
Values: 001 to 400
Item 8.6.1.3 PREVIOUS TOTAL LENGTH (PNW) [PREV_HT_PNWRS]
Editing or otherwise overwriting the PREVIOUS TOTAL LENGTH is restricted to the following scenarios:
1. Obvious error: Correct PREVIOUS TOTAL LENGTH if error appears to be greater than twenty percent
of PREVIOUS TOTAL LENGTH.
2. Data entry error: Correct PREVIOUS TOTAL LENGTH if error is diagnosable as a typographical error.
Any change made to this field signifies an error at the time of the previous inventory.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
This is the total tree length recorded by the field crew during the previous visit. It has been downloaded from
the periodic inventory and will be editable by the current field crew. These data are provided to help ensure
quality of tree length data through comparison of the previous TOTAL LENGTH to the currently measured
TOTAL LENGTH, and to assist in estimation of current tree length, if estimation is necessary due to lean,
dead top, etc.
pg.
94
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all downloaded live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH; and
standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inch DBH with a recorded TOTAL LENGTH at the
previous inventory.
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: N/A
Values: 005 to 400
Item 8.6.1.4 TOTAL LENGTH (CORE 5.14) [HT]
Record the TOTAL LENGTH of the tree, to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the top of the tree. For
trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree.
If the tree has a missing top (top is broken and completely detached from the tree), estimate what the total
length would be if there were no missing top. Account for lean (see 8.27), but do not add length for crooks
and sweeps. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.
Height on leaning trees: Measure or estimate total
normally-formed bole length (from the base to the
tip of the tree), and not the perpendicular from the
ground to the tip. To measure heights of leaning
trees using a clinometer, follow these steps:
Step 1. Move to a point along a line (point D) that is
perpendicular to the plane in which the tree
is leaning.
Step 2. Using a clinometer, measure the height of
point A above point B.
Step 3. By standing at the base of the tree and
sighting up the bole with your clinometer,
measure the slope of the bole in degrees
(Angle E in the diagram above).
Step 4. Subtract the degrees of lean (step 3) from
90 degrees. This gives you the degrees of
angle F.
Step 5. By sighting through your clinometer, convert
the angle calculated in step 4 to a
percentage.
Step 6. Use the slope correction table in Appendix B
to determine the expansion factor for the
Figure 8.27: Measuring height of leaning tree
percent slope determined in step 5. Multiply
the expansion factor by the measured distance from point A to point B (step 2). This gives the
length of the bole (point A to point C).
Section 8.6: Tree Growth
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inch DBH
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 percent of true length
Values: 001 to 400
95
pg.
Item 8.6.1.5 LENGTH METHOD (CORE 5.16) [HTCD]
Record the code that indicates the method used to determine tree length.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description:
1
Total and actual lengths are field measured with a measurement
instrument (e.g., clinometer, relascope, tape)
2
Total length is visually estimated, actual length is measured with an
instrument
3
Total and actual lengths are visually estimated (not measured)
Item 8.6.1.6 PREVIOUS LENGTH METHOD (PNW) [PREV_HTCD_PNWRS]
Downloaded code indicating the method used to determine tree length at the previous visit. This field
cannot be updated by the field crew.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description:
1
Total and actual lengths are field measured with a measurement
instrument (e.g., clinometer, relascope, tape)
2
Total length is visually estimated, actual length is measured with an
instrument
3
Total and actual lengths are visually estimated (not measured)
SUBSECTION 8.6.2 TREE LIVE CROWN MEASUREMENTS
Item 8.6.2.1 COMPACTED CROWN RATIO (CORE 5.19) [CR]
Record the COMPACTED CROWN RATIO for each live tally tree, 1.0 inch and larger, to the nearest one
percent. COMPACTED CROWN RATIO is that portion of the tree supporting live foliage (or in the case of
extreme defoliation should be supporting live foliage) and is expressed as a percentage of the ACTUAL
TREE LENGTH (include dead tops but not missing tops in the ratio). To determine COMPACTED CROWN
RATIO, ocularly transfer lower live branches to fill in large holes in the upper portion of the tree until a full,
even crown is visualized.
Do not over-compact trees beyond their typical full crown structure. For example, if tree branches tend to
average 2 feet between whorls, do not compact crowns any tighter than the 2-foot spacing (8.28). Include
epicormic branches with a 1-inch diameter or greater.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
pg.
96
Figure 8.28: Examples of COMPACTED CROWN RATIO
Note: Crown ratio is based on the ratio of foliage, not where the limbs attach to the tree bole.
Crown ratio is an indicator of a tree's vigor. In data analysis, trees with a crown ratio of 30 percent or less
are considered less vigorous. For this reason, be particularly careful when deciding between codes
greater or less than "30". It is preferable to use a laser or clinometer to measure live crown ratios on these
trees.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 inch DBH
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 percent
Values: 00 to 99
Item 8.6.2.2 CROWN CLASS (CORE 5.17) [CCLCD]
Section 8.6: Tree Growth
Rate tree crowns in relation to the sunlight received and proximity to neighboring trees (8.29). Base the
assessment on the position of the crown at the time of observation. Example: a formerly overtopped tree
which is now dominant due to tree removal is classified as dominant. Crown classifications are easily
applied in even-aged stands. Classifications are more difficult to assign in uneven-aged stands or in plots
where more than one age class is present. In these situations, classify the tree based on its immediate
environment. In other words, base your classification on how much light the tree's crown is receiving, not its
position in the canopy. This data item is used to predict tree growth. The intermediate and overtopped
crown classes are meant to include trees seriously affected by direct competition with adjacent trees.
97
pg.
Figure 8.29: Examples of CROWN CLASS by code definitions (numbers are CROWN CLASS codes)
Crown class describes a tree's "social" position in the stand and may indicate how well the tree is
competing for light.
For example, a young, vigorous tree that is considerably shorter than other trees in the stand – but that is
not overtopped by other trees and that receives full light from above and partly from the side – is classified
as dominant. The same principle applies to two-storied stands: understory trees should only be assigned
subordinate crown classes if they are adjacent to overtopping trees. In plots with scattered residual
overstory trees over younger trees, a considerable portion of the understory trees will be classified as
dominant or codominant.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥1.0 inch DBH
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
1
Open Grown – trees with crowns that received full light from above and
from all sides throughout most of its life, particularly during its early
developmental period.
2
Dominant – trees with crown extending above the general level of the
crown canopy and receiving full light from above and partly from the sides.
These trees are taller than the average trees in the stand and their crowns
are well developed, but they could be somewhat crowded on the sides.
Also, trees whose crowns have received full light from above and from all
sides during early development and most of their life. Their crown form or
shape appears to be free of influence from neighboring trees.
3
Co-dominant – trees with crowns at the general level of the crown canopy.
Crowns receive full light from above but little direct sunlight penetrates
their sides. Usually they have medium-sized crowns and are somewhat
crowded from the sides. In stagnated stands, co-dominant trees have
small-sized crowns and are crowded on the sides.
4
Intermediate – trees that are shorter than dominants and co-dominant, but
their crowns extend into the canopy of co-dominant and dominant trees.
They receive little direct light from above and none from the sides. As a
result, intermediate trees usually have small crowns and are very crowded
from the sides.
5
Overtopped – trees with crowns entirely below the general level of the
crown canopy that receive no direct sunlight either from above or the sides.
pg.
98
SECTION 8.7 TREE DAMAGE
SUBSECTION 8.7.1 RECORDING DAMAGE
Item 8.7.1.1 ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (CORE 5.13) [CULL_FLD]
Record the percentage of rotten or missing cubic-foot cull for all live tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH and
missing cubic-foot cull on all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH. Record the percentage of rotten
and missing cubic-foot volume, to the nearest 1 percent.
When estimating volume loss (tree cull), only consider the cull on the merchantable bole/portion of the tree,
from a 1-foot stump to a 4-inch top. Do not include any cull estimate above ACTUAL LENGTH.
Rotten and missing volume loss is often difficult to estimate. Refer to supplemental disease and insect
pests field guides and local defect guidelines as an aid in identifying damaging agents and their impact on
volume loss. Be alert to such defect indicators as the following:
•
Cankers or fruiting bodies
•
Swollen or punky knots
•
Dull, hollow sound of bole (use regional standards)
•
Large dead limbs, especially those with frayed ends
•
Sawdust around the base of the tree
If a live tree is physically missing some of its volume (below ACTUAL LENGTH), use the volume estimation
tables (Table 8.2: Percentage of tree cubic foot volume distribution by 16-foot logs from tree total length or
tree height in logs for a tree of average dimensions) below to estimate the missing percentage. Broken tops
occur above ACTUAL LENGTH and are not included in ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (the volume of the
broken top is obtained in the office by comparing ACTUAL LENGTH vs. TOTAL LENGTH).
If a snag is physically missing some of its volume, use the estimated diameter of the tree when it was alive
to aid in calculating the percentage of MISSING CULL of the remaining portion of the snag (i.e., if a snag is
8 feet in length, calculate the percentage of MISSING CULL of the 7-foot section remaining above
merchantable height).
Use Table 8.2 as a guideline to estimate the missing portion of a live tree because of cull. It shows the
percentage of volume in typical trees of varying number of logs and heights. Use either the tree height in
logs (divide the length to a 4-inch top – diameter inside bark [DIB] – by 16) or the measured TOTAL
LENGTH to estimate what percentage of volume is estimated in each 16-foot log. Multiply each percentage
in that log section times the percentage of rotten or missing volume. Then sum the values to get the total
percentage of the tree that is rotten or missing.
•
Example: A 9-log tree (measured at 160 feet TOTAL LENGTH) has a missing section that is about 1/
3 of both the second and third logs. Table 8.2 shows the second log has about 18 percent of the
volume in the tree, and the third log has about 16 percent of the volume in the tree.
Section 8.7: Tree Damage
•
Calculate the percentage of cull in each log and sum to estimate the total percentage of cull for
the tree (about 11 percent):
• (0.18 X 0.33) + (0.16 X 0.33) = 0.06 + 0.05 = 0.11.
99
pg.
Table 8.2: Percentage of tree cubic foot volume distribution by 16-foot logs from tree total length or
tree height in logs for a tree of average dimensions
Avg
Tree
Log1 Log2 Log3 Log4 Log5
Total Height in
Length LOGS
28
1
100
48
2
70
30
64
3
54
32
14
80
4
43
30
19
8
96
5
36
27
20
12
5
111
6
31
24
20
14
8
127
7
28
22
18
14
10
143
8
25
20
17
14
11
158
9
24
18
16
13
11
176
10
22
17
15
13
11
194
11
20
15
14
12
11
212
12
20
14
13
12
11
Log6 Log7 Log8 Log9 Log10 Log11 Log12
3
6
8
8
9
9
9
2
4
6
7
7
8
1
3
4
5
6
1
1
4
4
1
2
2
1
1
0
When Collected: For all live tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH/DRC: record ROTTEN/MISSING CULL. For
standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH/DRC: record MISSING CULL only.
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 percent
Values: 00 to 99
SECTION 8.8 MISCELLANEOUS TREE MEASURED DATA ITEMS
SUBSECTION 8.8.1 LIVE TREE MEASURED DATA ITEMS
Item 8.8.1.1 TREE CLASS (AFSL) [TREECLCD_PNWRS]
Record the TREE CLASS code that best describes the general quality of the tree or sapling. Use the
definitions for each of the codes provided to help in determining tree or sapling quality.
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
When Collected: All live trees ≥ 1.0 inches DBH, and all dead trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH qualifying as
standing dead (STANDING DEAD = 1).
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
2
Growing stock: A live sapling (1.0 - 4.9 inches DBH) with minor or no
evidence of form defects, insects, or disease, that is expected to become a
sound tree 5.0 inches DBH or larger with good form and vigor.
A live tree, 5.0 inches DBH or larger, that has less than 75% of the
merchantable volume cull, and contains at least one solid 8-foot section
reasonably free from form defect, on the merchantable bole.
3
Rough cull: Trees that do not have, now or prospectively, at least one
solid 8 foot section (reasonably free of form defect) on the merchantable
bole OR have 75% or more of the merchantable volume cull: AND more
than half of this cull is due to sound dead wood cubic-foot loss or severe
form defect volume loss.
4
Rotten cull: Trees with 75% or more of the merchantable volume cull,
AND more than half of this cull is due to rotten or missing cubic-foot
volume loss.
pg.
100
SUBSECTION 8.8.2 STANDING DEAD OR REMOVED
Item 8.8.2.1 CAUSE OF DEATH (AFSL) [AGENTCD_P2A]
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), record a CAUSE OF DEATH for all trees that
have died or been cut since the previous survey. If CAUSE OF DEATH cannot be reliably estimated, record
unknown/not sure/other.
When Collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1 and PRESENT
TREE STATUS = 2 or 3; or PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and RECONCILE = 1, 2,
3, or 10
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
10
Insect
20
Disease
30
Fire
40
Animal
50
Weather
51
Flood
52
Wind (direct cause only; use 71 if killed by falling tree)
53
Avalanche (snow & ice)
54
Landslide (soil & rock)
55
Severe and/or extended drought
60
Vegetation (suppression, competition, vines/kudzu)
70
Unknown/not sure/other - includes death from human activity not related to
silvicultural or landclearing activity (accidental, random, etc.). TREE
NOTES required.
71
Hit or knocked over by falling object (tree, snag, rock, etc.)
80
Silvicultural or landclearing activity (death caused by harvesting or other
silvicultural activity, including girdling, chaining, etc., or to landclearing
activity.
Section 8.8: Miscellaneous Tree Measured Data Items
Item 8.8.2.2 MORTALITY YEAR (AFSL) [MORTYR_PNWRS]
On AK-Remeasurement plots (PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3), record the estimated year that AK-Remeasured
trees died or were cut. For each AK-Remeasured tree that has died or been cut since the Periodic
inventory, record the 4-digit year in which the tree died. Mortality year is also recorded for trees on land that
has been converted to a nonforest land use, if it can be determined that a tree died before the land was
converted.
When Collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1 and PRESENT
TREE STATUS = 2 or 3; or PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and RECONCILE = 1, 2,
3, or 10.
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 year for remeasurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for remeasurement cycles of > 5 years
Values: YEAR OF PREVIOUS INVENTORY or higher
Item 8.8.2.3 DECAY CLASS (CORE 5.23) [DECAYCD]
Record for each standing dead tally tree, 5.0 inches in diameter and larger, the code indicating the tree’s
stage of decay.
When standing dead trees have characteristics from more than one DECAY CLASS stage, record the best
overall stage of the snag (e.g., new dead with no fine limbs left because it broke below the crown, should be
coded as "1").
Rarely will a DECAY CLASS 5 tree be recorded; by the time a dead tree has reached DECAY CLASS 5 it
will be unlikely to meet the definition of standing dead.
101
pg.
Snag characteristics are for Douglas-fir. Snags of other species may vary; use this table as a guide.
Rate the overall snag
DECAY
Limbs and
Percent bark Sapwood presence
CLASS
Top
Heartwood condition*
branches
remaining
and condition*
stage (code)
1
2
All present
Pointed
Few limbs, no May be
fine branches broken
3
Limb stubs
only
Broken
4
Few or no
stubs
Broken
5
None
Broken
100
Variable
Intact; sound,
incipient decay,
hard, original color
Sloughing;
advanced decay,
fibrous, firm to soft,
light brown
Sloughing; fibrous,
soft, light to reddish
brown
Sound, hard, original color
Sound at base, incipient
decay in outer edge of
upper bole, hard, light to
reddish brown
Variable
Incipient decay at base,
advanced decay
throughout upper bole,
fibrous, hard to firm,
reddish brown
Variable
Sloughing; cubical, Advanced decay at base,
soft, reddish to dark sloughing from upper
brown
bole, fibrous to cubical,
soft, dark reddish brown
Less than 20 Gone
Sloughing, cubical, soft,
dark brown, OR fibrous,
very soft, dark reddish
brown, encased in
hardened shell
When Collected: All standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: +/- 1 class
Values: 1-5
Chapter 8: Tree and Sapling Data
Figure 8.30: Douglas-fir decay class characteristics (use only as a guide)
pg.
102
Item 8.8.2.4 SNAG REASON FOR DISAPPEARANCE (PNW) [SNAG_DIS_CD_PNWRS]
On AK-Remeasurement, record a code to indicate the reason for disappearance of a tree previously tallied
as standing dead.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: All standing dead trees tallied at the previous
inventory which no longer qualify as standing dead (PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 2,
PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2, and STANDING DEAD = 0)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No Errors
Values: Code Description
2
Fell over "naturally" (wind, decay, etc.) or no longer self-supported; still
present.
3
Fell over "naturally;" removed from the site, or not discernible by crew.
4
Cut down or pushed over; still present.
5
Cut down or pushed over; removed from the site, or not discernible by
crew.
6
DBH and/or height no longer meet minimum for tally (snag "shrank" to less
than 5.0 inches DBH or less than 4.5 feet tall).
Item 8.8.2.5 CULTURALLY KILLED (PNW) [CULTURALLY_KILLED_PNWRS]
A 1-digit code to identify cut trees that have been killed by direct human intervention, but not utilized
(removed from plot).
Note: When CULTURALLY KILLED = 1, a TREATMENT (Item 5.5.3.20) must be recorded.
When collected: When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: All trees with PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1 and
PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Description
0
Any tree that does not meet the criteria listed in code 1.
1
Any tree that was killed by direct human cause (girdled, cut, knocked over,
sprayed with herbicide, etc.) which has not been removed from plot (a
TREATMENT must be recorded).
SECTION 8.9 TREE NOTES
SUBSECTION 8.9.1 TREE NOTES
Item 8.9.1.1 TREE NOTES (CORE 5.27) [NOTES]
Record notes pertaining to an individual tree as called for to explain or describe another data item.
Section 8.9: Tree Notes
When Collected: All trees, as needed
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases and numbers
103
pg.
CHAPTER 9 SEEDLING DATA
SECTION 9.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Stocking and regeneration information are obtained by counting live seedlings within the 6.8-foot radius
microplot located 90 degrees and 12.0 feet from each subplot center within each of the four subplots.
Seedlings are counted in groups by species and condition class. Only count seedlings occurring in
accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1), or measurable nonforest
condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE = 1004),
using the guidelines listed below.
SUBSECTION 9.1.1 SEEDLING DATA ITEMS
Item 9.1.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE 6.1) [SUBP]
This is a generated code corresponding to the number of the subplot (see Item 6.1.1.1).
When Collected: All seedling count records
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
Item 9.1.1.2 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (CORE 6.3) [CONDID]
Use the same procedures described in Chapter 5 to assign the appropriate CONDITION CLASS NUMBER
to the seedlings rooted in the respective condition.
When Collected: All seedling count records
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1-9
Item 9.1.1.3 SPECIES (CORE 6.2) [SPCD]
Record the SPECIES code from the Tree Species List in Appendix D. Use the same procedures described
in Item 8.4.1.9.
If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the seedling, but bring branch samples, foliage,
flowers, bark, etc. to the office for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the subplot from similar
specimens and make a note to correct the SPECIES code later.
When Collected: All seedling count records
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors for genus, no errors for species
Values: Appendix D
On each microplot, record the number of live tally seedlings, by SPECIES and CONDITION CLASS.
Conifer seedlings must be at least 6.0 inches in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH to qualify for counting.
Hardwood seedlings must be at least 12.0 inches in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify
for counting.
General seedling count rules:
•
•
Count all live seedlings with their bases inside the microplot boundary regardless of vigor,
damage, or closeness to other trees.
Count all live seedlings, regardless of substrate (e.g. suspended logs) or life expectancy.
Chapter 9: Seedling Data
Item 9.1.1.4 SEEDLING COUNT (CORE 6.4) [TREECOUNT]
pg.
104
•
•
•
•
Multiple “suckers” that originate from the same location, and stump sprouts are considered one
seedling.
Measure seedling length, not “height”. Length is measured along the main stem from ground level
to the dominant apical leader.
Do not tally or count “layers” (undetached tree branches partially or completely covered by soil
and/or organic materials, usually at the base) as seedlings.
Do not tally any seedlings that sprout from a live tally tree.
When Collected: Each accessible forest land condition class (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) on
each microplot; and each measurable nonforest land condition class (CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE = 1004) on each
microplot.
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors for 5 or fewer per species; +/-20 percent over a count of 5
Values: 001 through 999
Item 9.1.1.5 SEEDLING NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]
Record notes to clarify or explain a special situation in the SEEDLING NOTES.
Section 9.1: General Instructions
When Collected: As needed
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences
105
pg.
CHAPTER 10 SITE TREE INFORMATION
SECTION 10.1 OVERVIEW
Site index is a measure of a forest’s potential productivity and is defined as the height of the dominant or codominant trees at a specified age in a stand. It is calculated in an equation using the tree’s length and age.
Site index can help predict timber productivity and the potential growth rate of a forest. For PNW-FIA, the
site index is used primarily as input to the mean annual increment (MAI) equations. Site index equations
differ by tree species and region.
Trees must meet specific selection criteria before being used to calculate site index. In Alaska, the
PRIMARY SELECTION METHOD and the SITE TREE SELECTION HIERARCHY are used in tandem to
collect and assess the quality of site tree data.
SECTION 10.2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
If suitable site trees are available, site tree data are required for every accessible forest land condition class
defined on a plot. An individual site tree may be used for more than one condition class where differences in
condition classes are not the result of differences in site productivity. For example, when different condition
classes are caused solely due to differences in reserved status, owner class, and/or disturbance-related
differences in density (e.g., heavily thinned vs. unthinned), a site tree may be used for more than one
condition class. When in doubt, do not use a site tree for more than one condition class.
Select at least one site tree for each accessible forest land condition class where no previous site tree data
exist. The absence of site tree data may occur because:
•
This is the first visit to the site
•
On the previous visit no suitable site tree could be found for the condition
•
Since the last visit there has been a change in condition class that renders the previous data
incompatible with the current conditions
If a site tree is needed; select tree from a species common to the condition class being sampled, based on
the criteria listed below. Select trees outside the subplot boundary where possible. Use only trees that have
remained in a dominant or co-dominant crown position throughout their entire life span. If possible, trees
should be 5.0 inches in diameter, or larger, and at least 15 years old at breast height. Trees that are visibly
damaged, trees with ring patterns that exhibit signs of suppression, and trees with rotten cores should be
rejected.
PNW requires at least three site trees for each accessible forest land condition class; each tree collected as
a site tree must meet the selection criteria in Section 10.3, Site Tree Selection Hierarchy. When the
selection criteria cannot be met for an accessible forest land condition class, only one site tree is required
for that condition class. Not all of the site trees need to be from the current inventory.
If no suitable site trees are available from the plot area, the field crew will consider all trees within a 400-foot
radius of plot center. If appropriate site trees have still not been found, crews may select trees more than
400 feet away from plot center. Site trees collected off plot should be from an area best representing the
conditions found on the plot (e.g., aspect, slope, elevation, substrate, moisture regime, etc.).
If no suitable site trees can be found on or off plot, or if the required number of trees within the desired site
index range cannot be met, a detailed explanation must be given in the electronic PLOT NOTES (Item
4.3.5.5) explaining the circumstances. Important note: “No suitable site trees” is not acceptable! Please
explain why there were no suitable site trees. Examples: storm damage, disease, or evidence of
suppression throughout stand; or, the stand is too young.
Chapter 10: Site Tree Information
When choosing a site tree, select from a species representative of the stand being sampled. Generally, the
preferred site tree species coincides with the FOREST TYPE. FOREST TYPE is a classification of forest
land based on the trees or tree communities representing the plurality of stocking for all live trees not
overtopped in the condition (see FOREST TYPE, Item 5.5.2.4). For PNW, “representative of the stand”
means a species defining the FOREST TYPE.
pg.
106
When no site trees are collected, additional PLOT NOTES should include general topography, moisture
regime, and substrate material in order to aid analysts in creating a reasonable site index for the plot. Using
your best professional judgement describe the general characteristics of the site. You may include slope,
aspect, water availability (e.g., droughty or boggy), and soil type (e.g., rocky, loamy, or clayey). General
descriptors like "boggy black spruce area" or "shallow rocky soil" or "cold alpine area" are helpful. For
younger plantations with no previous site tree data and no current tree tally include total height and current
age at breast height and/or height growth for saplings.
The field crew should delete new site tree records not considered within the tolerable site index range only
when the minimum number of trees has been met for the selection method.
SUBSECTION 10.2.1 PLOTS WITH SITE TREES COLLECTED PREVIOUSLY
In Alaska, site tree information was collected for each forested condition class. Crews should confirm
previous site trees represent the current condition class being sampled.
Generally, additional site trees are needed when site index information is incomplete, absent, or unreliable.
In the field, the crew should evaluate the validity of previous site trees by checking age, length, species,
and site index in the PDR or on old print outs. When possible, crews should confirm downloaded data by
comparing it to the actual tree. Do not delete or make changes to downloaded site tree records; if
SPECIES, DIAMETER, SITE TREE LENGTH, TREE AGE AT DIAMETER, and SITE TREE SELECTION
METHOD appears to be grossly incorrect, enter the correct data as a new record. In this situation, the SITE
TREE STATUS of the downloaded tree should be changed to "I" (invalid). Explain why the old site trees are
no longer valid in SITE TREE NOTES, Item 10.5.1.21. Updating the CONDITION CLASS LIST on
downloaded site trees is permissible.
When using previous site trees they should be between 15-250 years old at breast height when they were
measured and a species currently representative of the stand. If the previous site trees do not meet those
criteria or better site trees are available (e.g., between the ages of 35-80), the crew should collect a new
set. For stands less than 35 years old (i.e., young plantations) crews should review the previous site tree
data to see if they are between 35-80 years old. If the previous site trees are greater than 80 years old then
the crew should try to collect new site trees between 15-35 years old at breast height if possible.
Section 10.3: Site Tree Selection Hierarchy
In addition, a new set of site trees should be collected if:
•
there has been an on the ground change in condition class or FOREST TYPE
•
a treatment has occurred affecting the site’s productivity (e.g., clearcut harvest, heavy thinning,
irrigation, fertilization, etc.)
•
the previous site index looks suspicious (e.g., too low, too high, or has a wide range)
•
the current crew has noticed discrepancies in previous tree measurements (e.g., tree lengths are
consistently less at current visit than at previous visit due to previous crew errors)
•
the previous crew coded the downloaded trees as not meeting the selection criteria
(QUESTIONABLE SITE TREE FLAG = 1), and better site trees can be found
SUBSECTION 10.2.2 PRIMARY SELECTION METHOD
The primary selection method now includes several different site equations. Follow guidelines 1 through 3
below while referring to Section 10.3 (Site Tree Selection Hierarchy) when choosing suitable site trees.
1. Select three site trees evenly distributed across the condition class area.
2. Do not mix tree species.
3. All Alaskan species are associated with a 100-year site equation and the site index should not vary
by more than 30.
SECTION 10.3 SITE TREE SELECTION HIERARCHY
When crews are experiencing difficulty acquiring a reasonable set of site trees on and off the plot some
selection criteria may be compromised. In order to satisfy the requirements first compromise the site tree
species. If sufficient site tree data still cannot be collected then compromise the age range. Finally, as a last
resort, collect one site tree that may be older than 250 years old, have damages other than evidence of top
breakage, or have an extrapolated age. Reject all trees with evidence of top breakage, showing clear signs
of suppression, or are less than 15 years old.
107
pg.
1. First choice:
a. Representative of the stand and found in Table 10.1: Group A, below
b. Within the preferred age range of 35-80 years old at breast height
c. Dominant or co-dominant with no history of suppression
d. No damages
2. Second choice:
a. Not representative of the stand and found in Table 10.1: Group A, below
b. And b, c, & d above
3. Third choice:
a. Representative of the stand and found in Table 10.2: Group B, below
b. And b, c, & d above
4. Fourth choice:
a. Not representative of the stand and found in Table 10.2: Group B, below
b. And b, c, & d above
5. Fifth choice:
a. Work through 1-4 above expanding the age range to 15-250 years old at breast height
6. Last resort (collect only one site tree if no other trees are available; requires QUESTIONABLE SITE
TREE FLAG = 0):
a. Any acceptable site tree species from Table 10.1: Group A, and Table 10.2: Group B
b. May be greater than 250 years old
c. May have damages not appearing to substantially reduce height growth (for example, dead or
broken tops clearly affect height growth, so trees with these damages should not be used)
d. Trees with extrapolated ages
e. Trees showing signs of suppression or with rotten cores should not be used
If a “last resort” tree is collected, explain why it is a last resort in the SITE TREE NOTES. Never combine a
“last resort” tree with any other site tree. Record the appropriate QUESTIONABLE SITE TREE FLAG (Item
10.5.1.4) = 0 “Site tree does not meet selection criteria” for all last resort trees.
For PNW, “representative of the stand” means the species defining the forest type. “Not representative of
the stand” means a species found in the condition, but it is not the species defining the forest type. Do not
collect any species not in the following tables.
When in a hardwood stand incapable of growing suitable conifers, choose one or three hardwood trees
depending on species. When in a stand of red alders, select three site trees as normal. For all other
hardwood species, if no suitable conifers or red alder are present, select one hardwood tree to meet the
national requirement. All quaking aspens, balsam poplar, paper birch or black cottonwoods should be bored
outside the subplot boundaries.
Table 10.1: Group A
Common name
Pacific silver fir
Subalpine fir
Sitka spruce
Lodgepole pine
Western red cedar
Western hemlock
Mountain hemlock
Red alder
Forest type
264
268,266
305
281
304
301
270
911
Chapter 10: Site Tree Information
Species code
11
19
98
108
242
263
264
351
pg.
108
Table 10.2: Group B
Species code
42
94
95
375
741
746
747
Common name
Alaska yellow-cedar
White spruce
Black spruce
Paper birch
Balsam poplar
Quaking aspen
Black cottonwood
Forest type
271
122
125
902
901
703
SECTION 10.4 ALASKA AGE TREE SELECTION
Select three live age trees per accessible forested condition. Each tree should represent plurality (majority)
of the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition. In uneven aged stands, use the tree age that
represents plurality of tree composition in the stand. Age trees are used to compute stand age for any
sampled accessible forest land conditions. Do not select aspen, birch or cottonwood less than 12 inches
DBH (sensitive species) unless they are outside the subplot boundary.
AK-Remeasurement plots: if the forest type has changed from the initial visit, collect additional age trees as
needed so that, including previously measured age trees, a total of three age trees exist for each accessible
forest condition.
Section 10.4: Alaska Age Tree Selection
Determining breast height age of large trees: Large tree size is not a valid reason for bypassing a tree
for boring. To determine the age of a tree whose radius is greater than the length of the increment borer,
use the following procedure. This procedure is available as a "pop-up" menu on the data recorder.
Step 1. Bore into the tree as far as possible, extract the core (do not discard the bark), and count the
rings.
Step 2. Count the number of rings in the inner 2 inches of the core closest to the center of the tree.
Step 3. Measure the total length of the extracted core to the nearest 0.1 inch. (include the entire
thickness of bark at point of measurement, even though some of it may not be in the core
because it crumbled or the tree was cored in a bark furrow)
Step 4. Divide the tree's diameter by 2 to determine the radius in inches.
Step 5. Subtract #3 (length of the extracted core) from #4 (the radius in inches). The result is the
length in inches that the extracted core is short of reaching the tree center.
Step 6. Divide #5 (inches from the core to tree center) by 2 inches. The result equals the number of 2
inch lengths to the tree center.
Step 7. Multiply #6 by the number of rings in the inner 2 inches (#2) to determine the number of rings
from the inner end of the extracted core to the tree center.
Step 8. Add #7 to the total number of rings in the extracted core (#1). This is the tree's estimated age
at breast height (i.e., number of rings in the entire radius).
Step 9. Record an extrapolated age for AGE DETERMINATION METHOD (Item 10.5.1.14).
Example: Determine the age of a 59.6-inch western hemlock. The core has 110 rings, and has 10 rings
in the inner 2 inches. 0.8 inches of the 16.4-inch-long increment borer did not penetrate the tree and 1
inch of bark within the core fell off when it was extracted from the borer, resulting in a 14.6 inch core.
Each number below is associated with its corresponding step above:
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Step 4.
Step 5.
Step 6.
Step 7.
Step 8.
Step 9.
110 rings counted
10 rings in the inner 2 inches of the core
14.6 inches of core was extracted + 1 in of bark that fell out of the core = 15.6
59.6 inches is the tree's diameter and you then divide by 2 = 29.8 inches to center of tree
(pith)
29.8 inches (true center) - 15.6 inches (measured core) = 14.2 inches short of reaching the
pith
14.2 inches / 2 = 7.1 (2 inches) lengths short
7.1 (from step 6) x 10 (from step 2) = 71 rings not counted
110 rings counted (step 1) + 71 rings not counted (step 7) = 181 years old at breast height
Record an extrapolated age for AGE DETERMINATION METHOD (Item 10.5.1.14).
109
pg.
SECTION 10.5 SITE TREE DATA ITEMS
SUBSECTION 10.5.1 SITE TREE DATA ITEMS
Item 10.5.1.1 SITE TREE NUMBER (CORE) [TREE]
The data recorder will automatically assign a number to each new site tree. On previously visited plots
numbers will be assigned to downloaded site trees.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 0001-9999
Item 10.5.1.2 SUBPLOT NUMBER (CORE OPTIONAL 7.2.7) [SUBP]
Record the subplot number to which the site tree is referenced.
Use the same procedures described in SUBPLOT NUMBER (Item 6.1.1.1). Record a 1-digit code indicating
the number of the subplot which a site tree is on or near. Subplot numbers for site trees previously collected
will be downloaded/printed if on file.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
Item 10.5.1.3 SITE TREE STATUS (PNW) [SITE_AGE_TREE_STATUS_PNWRS]
This data item is used to determine if this site tree is new “N”, old “O”, or invalid old “I”. New site tree
records, copied from the tree screen or entered manually (as a non-tally site tree), will have a status “N”.
Downloaded tree records from the previous visit have status of “O”. If information for an old site tree (“O”) is
copied into a new site tree record and updated with current information, change the SITE TREE STATUS
code from “O” to “N”. If an old site tree is determined to be previously collected in error, or a crew does not
feel it best represents the forest condition and can replace it with a better representative tree, change the
SITE TREE STATUS code from “O” to “I” (explain why the old site trees are no longer valid in SITE TREE
NOTES, Item 10.5.1.21).
Chapter 10: Site Tree Information
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
N
New site tree (copied from previous inventory and updated, copied from
current tree tally, or entered manually as non-tally site tree)
O
Old site tree (downloaded from previous plot visit)
I
Invalid “Old” site tree (only to be used for procedural differences or
previous crew selection error or if better stand representative site trees are
now available)
pg.
110
Item 10.5.1.4 QUESTIONABLE SITE TREE FLAG (PNW) [QUESTION_SITE_AGE_TREE_PNWRS]
Record a code to identify whether or not the current site tree meets the selection criteria as outlined above
(all last resort site trees, choice 6 under Section 10.3, will be assigned a “0”). Any site tree with a
QUESTIONABLE SITE TREE FLAG = 0 require an electronic SITE TREE NOTE (Item 10.5.1.21)
describing why it does not meet the selection criteria.
Downloaded site trees with SITE TREE STATUS = O (old) and QUESTIONABLE SITE FLAG = 0 should be
replaced with a new site tree meeting the selection criteria if possible. If a questionable "Old" site tree is
replaced with a "New" tree, the "Old" tree should be marked with a SITE TREE STATUS of "Invalid" (explain
why the old site tree is no longer valid in SITE TREE NOTES).
When collected: When SITE TREE STATUS = N or O
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
0
Site tree does not meet selection criteria
1
Selection criteria met
2
Age tree does not meet selection criteria
3
Tree does not meet selection criteria for site or age
Item 10.5.1.5 SITE/AGE TREE TYPE (AFSL) [SITE_AGE_TREE_TYPE_PNWRS]
Downloaded code indicating the type of tree this record represented during the periodic inventory: site, age,
or combination site/age. This data item cannot be updated by the field crew.
When collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
1
Site tree
2
Age tree
3
Site and age tree
Item 10.5.1.6 CONDITION CLASS LIST (CORE 7.2.1) [CONDLIST]
List all CONDITION CLASS NUMBERS that the site index data from this tree represent.
If there is a change in the numbering of condition classes from the previous visit, it is important “old” site
trees have their CONDITION CLASS LIST updated to reflect the changes.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1000 to 9876
Section 10.5: Site Tree Data Items
Item 10.5.1.7 TREE RECORD NUMBER (PNW) [TALLY_TREE_NBR_PNWRS]
This number is automatically recorded when the site tree is copied from tally tree record, or it is a
downloaded “old” site tally tree (from previous inventory). Record “000” for all “new” site trees not tallied in
the tree data screen (i.e., non-tally site trees).
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 000 to 999
pg.
111
Item 10.5.1.8 AZIMUTH (CORE OPTIONAL 7.2.8) [AZIMUTH]
Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center; sight the center of the base of each tree with a compass.
Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
Values: 001 to 360
Item 10.5.1.9 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (CORE OPTIONAL 7.2.9) [DIST]
Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 feet, from the subplot center to the pith
of the tree at the base.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: +/- 5 feet
Values: 000.1 to 999.9
Item 10.5.1.10 SPECIES (CORE 7.2.2) [SPCD]
Record for new site trees. Only use SPECIES codes found in Table 10.1: Group A, and Table 10.2: Group
B above. SPECIES is downloaded for site trees previously collected.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 000 to 999
Item 10.5.1.11 DIAMETER (CORE 7.2.3) [DIA]
Use the same procedures described in Section 8.5 (Diameter). DIAMETER is downloaded for site trees
previously collected. Record for new site trees.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: +/- 0.1 inches per 20.0 inches increment of measured diameter
Values: 001.0 to 999.9
Item 10.5.1.12 SITE TREE LENGTH (CORE 7.2.4) [HT]
With a clinometer or other approved instrument, measure the total length of the site tree from the ground to
the top of the tree. Record to the nearest 1.0 foot. SITE TREE LENGTH must be measured; no estimates
are permitted on site trees. Refer to TOTAL LENGTH (Item 8.6.1.4) when measuring SITE TREE LENGTH.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: less than 60 feet +/- 5 percent of true length
greater than 60 feet +/- 10 percent of true length
Values: 005 to 999
Chapter 10: Site Tree Information
SITE TREE LENGTH is downloaded for site trees previously collected. If updating a downloaded site tree,
measure the tree's current length and enter it in the new record for the tree (be sure to also enter a current
age at breast height (BH) in the new record and mark the old tree record with a SITE TREE STATUS of
"Invalid").
pg.
112
Item 10.5.1.13 TREE AGE AT DIAMETER (CORE 7.2.5) [AGEDIA]
Record the tree age as determined by an increment sample. Bore the tree about one inch below the point of
diameter measurement (DBH) with an increment borer. Count the rings between the outside edge of the
core and the pith. Do not add years to get total age.
This is a downloaded for site trees previously collected. If updating a downloaded site tree, determine the
number of years elapsed since the tree was taken as a site tree, add this number to the downloaded age
and enter the sum in the new (second) record for the tree (be sure also to measure and enter the current
height in the new record and mark the old tree record with a SITE TREE STATUS of "Invalid").
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 5 years
Values: 001 to 999
Item 10.5.1.14 AGE DETERMINATION METHOD (AFSL) [AGE_DETERMINATION_METHOD_PNWRS]
Record the code that best describes how the age was determined in the field.
When collected: All site/age trees.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
0
Bored age.
1
Extrapolated age.
Item 10.5.1.15 NUMBER OF RINGS (AFSL) [RING_COUNT_PNWRS]
When TREE AGE AT DIAMETER is extrapolated (AGE DETERMINATION METHOD = 1), record the total
NUMBER OF RINGS counted.
When collected: When AGE DETERMINATION METHOD = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10%
Values: 001 to 999
Item 10.5.1.16 NUMBER OF RINGS IN INNER 2 INCHES (AFSL)
[RING_COUNT_INNER_2INCHES_PNWRS]
When TREE AGE AT DIAMETER is extrapolated (AGE DETERMINATION METHOD = 1), record the
number of rings counted in the inner 2 inches of the core closest to the center of the tree.
Section 10.5: Site Tree Data Items
When collected: When AGE DETERMINATION METHOD = 1
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10%
Values: 01 to 99
Item 10.5.1.17 LENGTH OF MEASURED CORE (AFSL) [CORE_LENGTH_PNWRS]
When TREE AGE AT DIAMETER is extrapolated (AGE DETERMINATION METHOD = 1), measure and
record the total length of the extracted core to the nearest 0.1 inch (include the entire thickness of bark at
point of measurement, even though some of it may not be in the core because it crumbled or the tree was
cored in a bark furrow).
When collected: When AGE DETERMINATION METHOD = 1
Field width: 5 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: +/- 0.2 inch
Values: 000.1 to 999.9
113
pg.
Item 10.5.1.18 SITE INDEX (PNW) [FLD_SITREE_PNWRS]
This code is downloaded for site trees previously collected. For new site trees, the data recorder will
calculate site index after SPECIES, SITE TREE LENGTH, TREE AGE AT DIAMETER, and SITE INDEX
EQUATION NUMBER (PDR generated) are entered.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: N/A
Values: 001 to 999
Item 10.5.1.19 SITE INDEX EQUATION BASE AGE (PNW) [SIBASE]
The SITE INDEX EQUATION BASE AGE is used to define the acceptable range for the calculated site
index. It is determined by the PDR after SPECIES, SITE TREE LENGTH, TREE AGE AT DIAMETER, and
SITE INDEX EQUATION NUMBER (PDR generated), are entered. Site trees with a base age of 50 should
have a site index within 20. Site trees with a base age of 100 should be with in 30.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Definition
50
50 year base age, site index should be within 20
100 100 year base age, site index should be within 30
Item 10.5.1.20 SITE INDEX EQUATION NUMBER (PNW) [SITREE_EQU_NO_PNWRS]
This code is generated by the PDR for all site trees. The SITE INDEX EQUATION NUMBER identifies
which site index equation was used to calculate site index. This data item cannot be updated by the field
crew.
When collected: Generated for all site trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See list in Appendix F (Site Index Equation Numbers)
Item 10.5.1.21 SITE TREE NOTES (CORE 7.2.6) [NOTES]
Record notes pertaining to an individual site tree.
When collected: All site trees as necessary
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases and numbers
Chapter 10: Site Tree Information
Section 10.5: Site Tree Data Items
pg.
114
115
pg.
CHAPTER 11 VEGETATION PROFILE
Information on the abundance, structure, and species composition of understory plant communities has
many uses. These data are used to evaluate wildlife habitat suitability, forage availability, grazing potential,
species richness and abundance, fire hazard, abundance of non-timber forest products, and potential site
productivity. The data also support identification of plant community types (“associations”), which allows
users to predict plot characteristics not actually measured by FIA. Accurately representing the species
present on a site and their change in abundance in response to forest development, disturbance, or
management is therefore important to a wide variety of users.
SECTION 11.1 VEGETATION SAMPLING
With the installation of the national FIA plot design on all lands, vegetation will be measured on each 24-foot
radius subplot on which accessible forest land condition classes make up 50 percent or more of the subplot
(Census water, noncensus water, and nonsampled condition classes are considered not accessible).
Vegetation on Chugach National Forest land (ADMINISTRATIVE FOREST CODE = 1004) will be
measured when accessible forest land and measurable nonforest land condition classes make up 50
percent or more of the subplot. It is important to measure the vegetation before plants are trampled in the
course of installing the rest of the plot.
Vegetation will be assessed over the entire subplot area, regardless of the presence of two or more
condition classes. If vegetation on inaccessible condition classes cannot be examined closely (e.g.,
hazardous or denied access areas), estimate vegetation on those areas from the best vantage points
available. All covers are expressed as the proportion of the entire subplot, regardless of the portion of the
subplot that is actually measured. All vegetation and plant parts that are or were alive (i.e., senesced)
during the current growing season are included in cover estimates (e.g., brown oak fern in late summer is
counted, live buds on willow in late fall are used to estimate crown).
Species are classified in two ways: first by “lifeform group” and second by “growth habit”. Lifeform is a
categorical descriptor assigned to a species and represents its physical potential in an ecosystem. Within
each lifeform a species may display different growth habits caused by environmental conditions and stages
of development. For example, the lifeform of dwarf Oregon grape (Mahonia nervosa, MANE2) is always a
“shrub” – meaning the code is entered in the shrub profile in the vegetation profile data. The code MANE2
will be invalid if entered into any other lifeform. Conversely, Mahonia nervosa can be classified as a shrub
or subshrub for growth habit (PLANTS 2000). The plant species books produced by FIA identify which
lifeform each species belongs to; field crews assign growth habits based on their observations on plot.
SUBSECTION 11.1.1 SPECIES RECORDS
Tree species are listed in Appendix D, and for these species, cover is estimated only for trees less than one
inch DBH/DRC and greater than or equal to half a foot in length for conifers or a foot in length for
hardwoods. All other species (non-trees) are recorded using cover estimates, regardless of their diameter
or height.
Chapter 11: Vegetation Profile
Individual records are entered for vascular plant species and species groups on each subplot. Mosses and
lichens are not measured. The three most abundant species of each tree, shrub, forb, and graminoid
lifeform group, and any additional species with cover greater than or equal to 3 percent, are recorded
individually. Each record is identified by growth habit, species name, height, and cover. For tree species,
only tally tree species seedlings (Appendix D, Tree Species List) are included in the vegetation cover
estimates (i.e., less than one inch DBH/DRC and greater than or equal to half a foot in length for conifers or
a foot in length for hardwoods). For graminoids, plants can be lumped into annual or perennial groups if
their species or genus is not known. Any additional species within a lifeform collectively having cover
greater than or equal to 3 percent, but which individually have cover less than 3 percent, are recorded with
the corresponding “grouped species code” (see Item 11.1.1.3, SPECIES), and overall cover and height is
estimated.
pg.
116
Item 11.1.1.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (PFSL) [SUBP]
This is a generated code indicating the subplot number.
When collected: All subplots when accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot; or when measurable nonforest land
condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE
FOREST CODE = 1004) and forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code
Description
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
Item 11.1.1.2 SPECIES GROWTH HABIT (PNW) [GROW_HAB_CD]
Each individual species record is assigned a growth habit based on field observation. If a species has more
than one growth habit on the subplot and does not have enough cover to be split into two separate height
groups (see Item 11.1.1.5, SPECIES HEIGHT, for height definitions), only record the predominant growth
habit on the subplot for the species. Do not split species records on the sole basis of differences in growth
habit. Species combined into lifeform groups do not get a growth habit code. Valid growth habit codes for
the FIA inventory are derived from the PLANTS database (USDA, NRCS. 2000. The PLANTS database
[http://plants.usda.gov/plants]. National Plant Data Center, Baton Rouge, LA 70874-4490) and are listed
below.
Note: When assessing the most abundant species in each lifeform group, woody vines are assigned to the
shrub lifeform group, and species with a subshrub growth habit can be assigned to either the forb or the
shrub lifeform group.
Section 11.1: Vegetation Sampling
When collected: All subplots when accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot; or when measurable nonforest land
condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE
FOREST CODE = 1004) and forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot.
Field width: 2 letters
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Growth Habit Description
PLANTS Definition
Lifeform
Code
Group
Assignment
FB
Forb/Herb Vascular plant without significant woody tissue
Forb
GR
SH
above or at the ground. Forbs and herbs may be
annual, biennial, or perennial but always lack
significant thickening by secondary woody
growth and have perennating buds occurring at
or below the ground surface. Federal
Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) definition
includes graminoids, forbs, and ferns; in
PLANTS, graminoids are separated.
Graminoid Grass or grass-like plant, including grasses
(Poaceae), sedges (Cyperaceae), rushes
(Juncaceae), arrow-grasses (Juncaginaceae),
and quillworts (Isoetes). An herb in the FGDC
classification.
Perennial, multi-stemmed woody plant usually
Shrub
less than 13 to 16 feet in height. Shrubs typically
have several stems arising from or near the
ground, but may be taller than 16 feet or singlestemmed under certain environmental
conditions. Includes succulents (e.g., cacti).
Graminoid
Shrub
117
pg.
SS
VI
TR
UN
Subshrub Low-growing shrub usually under 1.5 feet tall
(never exceeding 3 feet tall) at maturity. A dwarfshrub in the FGDC classification. Includes
succulents (e.g., cacti).
Twining/climbing plant with relatively long
Vine
stems, can be woody or herbaceous. FGDC
classification considers woody vines to be
shrubs and herbaceous vines to be herbs.
Perennial, woody plant with a single stem
Tree
(trunk), normally greater than 13 to 16 feet in
height; under certain environmental conditions,
some tree species may develop a multistemmed or short growth form (less than 13 feet
in height).
Unknown Growth form is unknown.
Shrub or
Forb
Shrub
Tree
Item 11.1.1.3 SPECIES (PNW) [VEG_FLD_SPCD]
Each SPECIES record must have a SPECIES code recorded. Valid SPECIES codes are listed in the FIA
plant guide, which is derived from the PLANTS database (USDA, NRCS. 2000. The PLANTS database
[http://plants.usda.gov/plants]. National Plant Data Center, Baton Rouge, LA 70874-4490). If you cannot
identify a species while in the field, collect a specimen for later identification (see Section 11.2, Collection
and Identification of Unknown Plants). If the species of the plant cannot be identified, record the code for its
genus if possible. If not, record one of the following generic codes:
Unknown Species Code
--SHRUB1
FORB1
AAGG1
PPGG1
Lifeform
Trees
Shrubs
Forbs (and ferns)
Annual grasses
Perennial grasses
Grouped Species Code
TREES
SHRUBS
FORBS
AAGGS
PPGGS
If another species of the same life form cannot be identified, it is labeled with the lifeform followed by the
number “2” (SHRUB2, FORB2, etc.). Up to five unknowns of each lifeform may be recorded.
Note: Unknown tree species is not an option (but a genus record using the correct PLANTS code is
acceptable in rare instances).
A “grouped species code” is entered when, in addition to the most abundant and over 3-percent cover
species listed individually, a group of trees, shrubs, forbs, annual grasses, or perennial grasses covers 3 or
more percent on a subplot. Example: Six species of forbs are present: one species covers 10 percent, and
the other five species each cover 1 percent. Four records are entered: one record each for the three most
abundant species (the one at 10 percent plus the next two most abundant with 1 percent) and a fourth
generic FORBS record for the other three species which collectively cover 3 percent.
Chapter 11: Vegetation Profile
When collected: All subplots when accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot; or when measurable nonforest land
condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE
FOREST CODE = 1004) and forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot.
Field width: 6 alphanumeric characters
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See tables and PLANTS citation above
pg.
118
Item 11.1.1.4 SPECIES LIFEFORM (PNW) [VEG_TYPE_CD]
Downloaded code indicating the SPECIES LIFEFORM category.
When collected: All species records
Field width: 7 characters
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Category
Tree
Shrub
Forb
Grasses
Item 11.1.1.5 SPECIES HEIGHT (PNW) [HT]
Record a 2-digit height for each species recorded. The entry indicates the average total height above the
ground at which a species occurs. If a species occurs at substantially different heights in a subplot
(requirements listed below) plants can be grouped into a maximum of two different height groups as long as
the cover estimates of each are greater than or equal to 3 percent. A species can be in more than one
height group by repeating the SPECIES code on an additional line. Heights are recorded to the nearest
foot. Note: A species can only count towards one of the top three most abundant, even if it is separated into
more than one height group.
Guidelines for recognizing separate heights for a species:
• Graminoid: Canopy heights must differ by at least 2 feet
• Forb: Canopy heights must differ by at least 2 feet
• Shrub: Canopy heights must differ by at least 4 feet
• Tree: Seedling heights must differ by at least 4 feet
When collected: All subplots when accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot; or when measurable nonforest land
condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2 and ADMINISTRATIVE
FOREST CODE = 1004) and forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 1) total ≥ 50 percent of the subplot.
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: Grass and forbs:  1 feet
Shrubs and trees:  3 feet
Values: 1 to 99 (recorded to the nearest foot)
Section 11.1: Vegetation Sampling
Item 11.1.1.6 SPECIES COVER (PNW) [CVR_PCT]
Estimate the cover of each SPECIES recorded in its respective height group. Cover is estimated to the
nearest 1 percent for each species, as the proportion of the fixed-radius plot obscured by all plants of the
species if viewed from directly above, regardless of condition class boundaries or nonforest inclusions.
Plants do not have to be rooted in the subplot to be recorded. For each plant, cover is based on a vertically
projected polygon described by the outline of the live foliage of each plant (or foliage previously live during
the current growing season for senescing plants), and ignoring any normal spaces occurring between the
leaves of a plant (Figure 11.1) (Daubenmire 1959). This best reflects the plant’s above and below ground
zone of dominance.
Base the percentage of cover estimate on the current year’s growth present at the time of the plot visit.
Include both living and dead material from the current year. If herbs or shrubs have already dried out,
dropped leaves, or senesced, estimate the cover of foliage previously live during the current growing
season (i.e., on plots done early in the year, do not estimate based on the previous growing season’s
growth). Do not include dead branches of shrubs and trees in the cover polygons. Do not adjust the percent
for the time of year during which the visit was made (i.e., if the plants are immature and small because the
plot is being completed early in the growing season, do not project a plant’s potential growth).
Overlap of plants of the same species is ignored. Visually group plants in a species together and estimate a
percentage of cover. There will often be overlap of plants of different species. Therefore, total cover for a
subplot may exceed 100 percent. Species on the indicator list with cover less than 1 percent are recorded
as 1 percent (0 percent cover is only used for annual to annual remeasurement [SAMPLE KIND = 2], to
indicate a species is no longer present). Several approaches can be used to improve the accuracy and
119
pg.
repeatability of plant cover estimates. Cover can be “added up” across a plot, keeping in mind a cover of 3
percent on a 24-foot radius plot = 54 feet2, or a square 7.4 feet on a side (Table 11.1: Area represented by
different cover estimates, and length of a square with that area). Plants can be visually aggregated into
multiple 1 percent cover squares to arrive at a total cover. For species of moderate cover, it may be easiest
to estimate cover of each quadrant of the subplot separately and then add them together, or to imagine
crowding all the plants into a portion of a plot and estimate the proportion of the plot that would be covered.
The cover scatterplots in Figure 11.2 may also be useful in developing estimates.
Table 11.1: Area represented by different cover estimates, and length of a square with that area
Subplot radius = 24 feet
Cover
1%
3%
5%
10%
15%
20%
25%
Subplot area = 1,809 feet2
Area (feet2) Length on a side (feet)
18
54
90
181
271
362
452
4.3
7.4
9.5
13.4
16.5
19.0
21.3
Chapter 11: Vegetation Profile
Figure 11.1: Illustration of cover method based on polygon outline of plants using a rectangular "Daubenmire plot".
Notice plant E has no foliage over the plot but its outline does cover a portion of the plot. Polygon outlines and cover
estimates added to drawing scanned from Daubenmire (1959, Figure 8-2).
120
Section 11.1: Vegetation Sampling
pg.
Figure 11.2: Reference scatterplots for cover estimation (from Terry and Chilingar 1955)
When collected: Recorded for all SPECIES
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes:
1-5% 6-10%
11-20%
21-40%
41-60%
61-80%
81-100%
Values: 0 to 100 (estimated to the nearest 1 percent)
121
pg.
SUBSECTION 11.1.2 LIFEFORM AND TOTAL VEGETATION RECORDS
Individual records are entered for each lifeform/cover category and for all vascular plants, and cover
estimated for each. Species are defined by lifeform, although some plants can be measured as trees or
shrubs depending on their SPECIES GROWTH HABIT (Item 11.1.1.2). Enter the percentage of cover for
each of the following lifeform/cover categories even if there are no plants in that lifeform present
(Item 11.1.2.1 through Item 11.1.2.4).
Estimate a percentage of cover for each lifeform and for all vegetation on the subplot. Cover is estimated as
the proportion of the fixed-radius plot, regardless of condition class boundaries, obscured by all plants in
the lifeform if viewed from directly above. Total percentage of cover for a lifeform cannot exceed 100
percent, and cannot exceed the sum of the percentage of cover recorded for all individual species records
of that lifeform (see Item 11.1.1.6, SPECIES COVER). However, total percentage of cover for a lifeform can
be, and usually is, less than the sum of cover for all individual species within the lifeform; this happens
because of overlap between layers and species. If cover is greater than zero but less than 1-percent, enter
"01”. If no plants of the lifeform are present, enter “00”.
Item 11.1.2.1 PERCENT TREE SEEDLING COVER (PNW) [PCT_TREE_CVR_PNWRS]
Estimate the percentage of cover, to the nearest 1 percent, of tally tree species seedlings on the subplot
(see Appendix D, Tree Species List, for a list of species). If cover is greater than zero but less than 1
percent, enter "01". If no plants of the lifeform are present, enter “00”.
When collected: All subplots where a vegetation profile is recorded
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes
1-5%
6-10%
11-20%
21-40%
41-60%
61-80%
81-100%
Values: 000 - 100
Item 11.1.2.2 PERCENT SHRUB COVER (PNW) [PCT_SHRUB_CVR_PNWRS]
Estimate the percentage of cover, to the nearest 1 percent, of shrubs on the subplot. If cover is greater than
zero but less than 1 percent, enter "01". If no plants of the lifeform are present, enter “00”.
When collected: All subplots where a vegetation profile is recorded
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes
1-5%
6-10%
11-20%
21-40%
41-60%
61-80%
81-100%
Values: 000 - 100
Item 11.1.2.3 PERCENT FORB COVER (PNW) [PCT_FORB_CVR_PNWRS]
Estimate the percentage of cover, to the nearest 1 percent, of forbs on the subplot. If cover is greater than
zero but less than 1 percent, enter "01." If no plants of the lifeform are present, enter “00”.
Chapter 11: Vegetation Profile
When collected: All subplots where a vegetation profile is recorded
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes
1-5%
6-10%
11-20%
21-40%
41-60%
61-80%
81-100%
Values: 000 - 100
pg.
122
Item 11.1.2.4 PERCENT GRAMINOID COVER (PNW) [PCT_GRASS_CVR_PNWRS]
Estimate the percentage of cover, to the nearest 1 percent, of graminoids on the subplot. If cover is greater
than zero but less than 1-percent, enter "01". If no plants of the lifeform are present, enter “00”.
When collected: All subplots where a vegetation profile is recorded
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes
1-5%
6-10%
11-20%
21-40%
41-60%
61-80%
81-100%
Values: 000 - 100
SUBSECTION 11.1.3 VEGETATION PROFILE NOTES
Item 11.1.3.1 VEGETATION PROFILE NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation encountered with the vegetation profile.
When collected: All plots: as needed
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences
SECTION 11.2 COLLECTION AND IDENTIFICATION OF UNKNOWN PLANTS
Section 11.2: Collection and Identification of Unknown Plants
To improve the quality of vegetation profile data, a formal procedure is followed to identify more of the
unknown plant species tallied.
While on the plot, the crew should not spend an inordinate amount of time trying to identify an unknown
plant. If the plant can be keyed out quickly using a plant guide, identification should be attempted. If the
crew is confident the plot can be completed in one day, more time can be spent trying to identify unknown
plants while on the plot. In most cases, though, it will be more effective to collect unknown plants for later
identification. If the plant cannot be identified and qualifies for tally as a generic lifeform record (shrub, forb,
grass), enter the record. Gather as much of the complete plant as is feasible. Include roots, flowers, and
seed-heads if possible. Write a brief description of the site from which the plant was collected, the plant
community of which it was a member, and any other information, which may assist in identification. Try to
identify the collected specimens the same day the plot was visited. Use all available plant guides. Other
field team members who might be familiar with the species, or who are good at plant identification, may be
consulted. Twenty minutes is the recommended maximum amount of time to spend on one plant. If the
specimen cannot be identified, collect and press the plant. The plant is labeled with the PLOT NUMBER
and the unknown plant code used; an electronic VEGETATION PROFILE NOTE containing the unknown
plant code used, and any other helpful descriptors for processing the plant at a later date, must also be
recorded. If no attempt can be made to key out a plant the same day it is collected, keep it in the plant press
until it can be identified. Contact a botanist for help with identification. Get plants identified as soon as
possible.
If a plant is successfully identified, the vegetation profile data should be updated before the plot files are
submitted.
SECTION 11.3 LITERATURE CITED
Daubenmire, R. 1959. A canopy-coverage method of vegetational analysis. Northwest Science 33(1):
43–64.
Terry, R.D., and G. V. Chilingar. 1955. Summary of “Concerning some additional aids in studying
sedimentary formations” by M.S. Shvetsov. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 25:229–234
123
pg.
CHAPTER 12 INVASIVE PLANT SPECIES
The objectives of the Phase 2 (P2) invasive plants protocol are to document abundance and monitor
changes in abundance of selected species over time. Combined with other plot data and other datasets,
these data can be used to predict the future spread of selected species. Invasive plant species are having
tremendous economic and ecological impacts on our nation’s forests, and the impacts are increasing over
time. Providing accurate, statistically valid estimates of the distribution and abundance of some of the most
damaging species will give managers and policy-makers a better understanding of the problem than they
would otherwise have.
The invasive species protocol will be followed for all accessible ground visited plots in the Alaska Coastal
Annual unit. At each subplot a quick search will be conducted to identify all targeted plants, regardless of
cover, that are either rooted or overhang within the 24.0-foot radius. If invasive plants are detected, an
estimate of the percentage of cover within the subplot will be made.
Invasive plant data collection will occur on all accessible subplots, regardless of whether the condition is
forest or nonforest. Invasive plant species data are not collected when a condition class is hazardous,
access denied, out of unit, or water (Census or noncensus).
Occasionally, invasive species data and vegetation diversity and structure (i.e., P3 Vegetation Profile) data
will be collected on a plot in addition to the P2 Vegetation Profile. In this case, all crew members involved in
vegetation measurements should work closely to capture the full list (if any) and percentage of cover of all
invasives encountered on the 24.0-foot radius plot.
Item 12.0.0.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER (PNW) [SUBP]
This is a generated code corresponding to the number of the subplot.
When collected: All subplots when INVASIVES PLANT SAMPLING STATUS = 1 or 2
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Subplot location
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
Item 12.0.0.2 SPECIES (PNW) [VEG_FLDSPCD]
Record the accepted NRCS species code for any species, included on the Invasive Species List in
Appendix G, that is found on the subplot. If a plant is suspected of being invasive and cannot be identified
to species in the field, enter the code for an unknown plant, 2PLANT, and collect a voucher specimen.
Note: Collect a voucher specimen for all recorded species found on a remote plot or any unknown species.
Item 12.0.0.3 UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER (PNW) [UNIQUE_SP_NBR]
When any SPECIES code is entered for the first time on a plot, the UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER
automatically assigned is “1”. If more than one unidentified species is recorded and described by the
“2PLANT” unknown code, the next sequential number is assigned. If a previously-recorded unidentified
species is encountered again elsewhere on the plot, the UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER that corresponds to
the earlier encountered specimen must be entered. For example, an unknown thistle and unknown
hawkweed would both be given a species code of “2PLANT” but would need to be given different UNIQUE
SPECIES NUMBERs when measured.
When collected: All species records
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
Values: 1-99, assigned in sequential numbers
Chapter 12: Invasive Plant Species
When collected: All accessible subplots where listed species are observed
Field width: 10 alpha-numeric characters
Tolerance: No errors
Values: See Appendix G (Invasive Species List) for species codes
pg.
124
Item 12.0.0.4 SPECIES CANOPY COVER (PNW) [SUBP_(1,2,3,4)_SP_CANOPY_CVR_TTL_PNWRS]
A rapid canopy cover estimate is made for each invasive species and for all invasive species foliage across
all layer heights. Canopy cover is based on a vertically-projected polygon described by the outline of the
foliage, ignoring any normal spaces occurring between the leaves of the plant (Daubenmire 1959). Canopy
cover is estimated as a percentage of the entire 24-foot radius subplot. In cases where the subplot is not
fully accessible (access denied, hazardous, water, etc.), record the percentage of cover on the accessible
portions as if the subplot was entirely accessible. That is, if cover is about equal to a circle with a radius of
5.3 feet, enter 5 percent, as you would for a fully forested subplot, on any partially forested subplot. This
situation applies when portions of a plot are inaccessible.
If percentage of cover is greater than zero but less than 1 percent, enter “T” for trace. For species of
moderate cover, it may be easiest to divide the subplots into quarters, estimate canopy cover of each
quarter separately, and then add them together. The following area-cover sizes may be useful in developing
estimates for an entirely forested subplot:
Subplot radius = 24.0 feet, Subplot area = 1809 feet2
Length of a side of a
Radius of circular
Cover
Area
2
square
(feet)
area (feet)
(feet )
1%
18
4.3
2.4
3%
54
7.4
4.1
5%
90
9.5
5.3
10%
181
13.4
7.6
20%
362
19.0
10.7
When collected: All species records
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- one class based on the following canopy cover classes: trace, 1%, 2-5%, 6-10%,
11-25%, 26-50%, 51-75%, 76-95%, and 96-100%
Values: T, 000 to 100
Item 12.0.0.5 INVASIVE SPECIMEN COLLECTED (AFSL) [SPECIMEN_COLLECTED]
Record a code to indicate if a specimen was collected for each species or unknown code. Include a
separate entry for each unknown code (2PLANT) entered with a different UNIQUE SPECIES CODE.
When collected: All records
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Value Description
0
No, a specimen was not officially collected
1
Yes, a specimen was officially collected
Item 12.0.0.6 SPECIMEN LABEL NUMBER (AFSL) [SPECIMEN_LABEL_NBR]
Record the label number for the collected specimen. Numbered labels are provided to each vegetation
specialist by your regional coordinator.
:
When collected: When INVASIVE SPECIMEN COLLECTED = 1
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 00001 to 99999, as pre-printed and assigned by region.
125
pg.
Item 12.0.0.7 INVASIVE SPECIMEN NOT COLLECTED REASON (AFSL)
[SPECIMEN_NOT_COLLECTED_REASON]
Record a code to describe the reason an invasive plant specimen was not collected.
When collected: When INVASIVE SPECIMEN COLLECTED = 0
Field width: 2 digit
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Code Location
3
Hazardous situation
4
Time limitation
6
Specimen collected for immediate/local identification only
10
Other (electronic INVASIVE PLANT NOTES required)
Item 12.0.0.8 VEGETATION COMMUNITY DESCRIPTION FOR LABEL (AFSL)
[COMMUNITY_DESC_SPEC_LBL_PNWRS]
Enter a brief description of the community type to aid taxonomists in the identification of any specimens
collected from this subplot. Community descriptions often describe the dominant overstory species (e.g.,
“Open mixed conifer, closed paper birch, alder-willow shrub, bearberry tundra”)
Note: This data item does not need to be collected if there are no invasive species (or suspected invasive
species) encountered on the subplot.
When collected: Invasive Specimen Collected = 1
Field width: 2000 characters
Tolerance: No errors
Values: Null, English words or phrases describing the plant community
Item 12.0.0.9 INVASIVE PLANT NOTES (PNW) [NOTES]
Record any INVASIVE PLANT NOTES needed to clarify or explain a special situation for the particular
invasive species record being defined, or to explain why an invasive plant specimen was not collected.
When collected As needed; or when INVASIVE SPECIMEN NOT COLLECTED REASON = 10
Field width 2000 characters
Tolerance N/A
Values English words, phrases, and numbers
SECTION 12.1 UNKNOWN INVASIVE PLANTS AND SPECIMEN COLLECTION
When a plant species is suspected of being a listed invasive species, collect a voucher specimen, following
these basic steps:
Use a digging tool to extract the entire plant, including any underground portions, flowers, fruits, and
leaves. If the plant is abundant, collecting two samples will increase the likelihood of a good specimen.
•
Use a 3-hole-punch to punch holes in the bottom of your bags prior to traveling in the field. Place the
punched bags into a 2-inch 3-ring binder with the zip-lock portion facing outward. Plants and labels
can be placed in a bag contained in the binder. This method prevents crumpling, tearing, and
destroying the specimen during transportation.
•
Use a 1-hole-punch to punch a hole in the one upper corner of each bag. The hole should be placed
in such a manner that it cannot easily be torn. Place the bags on an aluminum carabineer (available
at drug stores) or on heavy twine and fasten to your field vest or backpack. Be careful to seal the
plants and labels securely inside the bags to prevent accidental loss.
Chapter 12: Invasive Plant Species
Collected specimens should be transported from the field in the one or two gallon zip-lock bags
provided. Only one species and label may be placed in a single bag. Acceptable methods of
transporting collected specimens include:
pg.
126
Each crew will be issued a set of printed, pre-numbered labels to track voucher specimens. The
information to be completed by hand in the field is optional, but may include date, unknown code, unique
species number and crew name. A label must be placed in each bag containing a voucher specimen.
Record the label number corresponding to the voucher specimen for SPECIMEN LABEL NUMBER
(Item 12.0.0.6). Full labels will be printed in the office from downloaded PDR data.
Label Number: 1
SPECIES CODE:
P3Hexagon: ………
Plot: 1
Subplot: 1
P3Quad:
Date: 8/06/10
Unknown Code:ACANT2 Unique Species Nbr:1
Veg Spec. crew: John Doe
State: AK
County: Anchorage Borough
Community: Spruce-Fir
Notes: opposite leaves, square stem, purple flowers, minty
fragrance, possibly peppermint
Figure 12.1: Example of label for unknown specimen.
Section 12.1: Unknown Invasive Plants and Specimen Collection
Press and label the plant if not identified by the end of the day.
1. Each specimen representing a unique species should be placed individually inside a single layer of
folded newsprint. Each specimen must be accompanied by its corresponding specimen label. Small
plant specimens are pressed individually. Large plant specimens may be folded in a “v”, “z”, or “w”
arrangement to fit on a single newsprint page. Arrange the specimen so at least one upper and one
lower leaf surface is exposed. Plants may be trimmed to reduce bulk, but all diagnostic parts must be
included. Diagnostic portions include: stem sections, petioles, leaves, roots, flowers, and fruits. Bulky
fruits or nuts may be stored separately in a paper envelope that is taped to the newsprint and
accompanied by an identical copy of the specimen’s unknown label. Species codes can be written on
the outside of the folded newspaper to aid sorting as specimens are processed.
2. Stack the specimens in their individual newsprint sleeves between two pieces of cardboard. Bind the
cardboard and plants together using a piece of twine or flat cloth ribbon wrapped around the length
and width of the cardboard bundle. For mailing numerous specimens, several bundles may be used.
Place all bundles inside a cardboard box for shipping.
Package and submit specimens as dictated by your region or lab.
All packaged specimens must be accompanied by a complete, legible label. Unknown reports tracking
collected plants are generated from the PDR plot file.
131
pg.
APPENDIX A HISTORICAL INVENTORY INFORMATION
SECTION A.1 THE INVENTORY OF ALASKA
SUBSECTION A.1.1 HISTORICAL INVENTORY INFORMATION
In the year 2004, the forest inventory of coastal Alaska switched from the Periodic Inventory to the Coastal
Annual Inventory. This change also brought with it a change in procedures, definitions, etc. which can
greatly affect how data are collected and analyzed. Below is a list of differences between these two
inventories.
1. Krummholz forests (forests were trees are stunted, bent, and gnarly due to weather, often found in
alpine areas) were not considered a forest condition in the periodic inventory, but are considered a forest
condition in the annual inventory.
2. Forest areas were mapped at the drip line (outer portion of the crown) in the periodic inventory, but are
mapped at the trunk line in the annual inventory.
3. Forest was determined as at least 10 percent potential canopy cover in the periodic inventory, but is
determined as at least 10 percent potential stocking in the annual inventory.
4. The tree species list included willow species in the periodic inventory, but willows are omitted as a tree
species in the annual inventory.
5. The location and size of the seedling/sapling plot (i.e., microplot) changed. The periodic seedling/sapling
plot was located at the subplot center and had a 2 meter radius. Live trees < 12.5 centimeters DBH were
measured. The DBH for seedlings (trees < 2.5 centimeters DBH) was recorded as “0001”. The annual
inventory microplot center is located 12.0 feet at 90 degrees magnetic azimuth from subplot center and
has a 6.8-foot radius. Saplings (tally trees 1.0 to ≤4.9 inches DBH) are measured here and seedlings
(≥0.5 feet for softwoods, ≥1.0 feet for hardwoods) are counted by species.
6. Size and width requirements for “forest” conditions changed from the periodic to the annual inventory.
See the field guides for more information.
7. Horizontal distances were measured to the pith at DBH in the periodic inventory, but are measured to
the pith at the base in the annual inventory. This changes which trees are tallied between these two
inventories, especially if a tree is leaning.
8. The Coastal Annual Inventory puts more emphasis on field visited plots. There was a tendency to have
more fly-overs in the periodic inventory. Subsequently, some of these plots were found to be stocked
when visited during the annual inventory.
Appendix A: Historical Inventory Information
Section A.1: The Inventory of Alaska
pg.
132
133
pg.
APPENDIX B REFERENCE INFORMATION
SECTION B.1 STATE CODES
Code State
02
Alaska
SECTION B.2 ALASKA UNIT CODES
SUBSECTION B.2.1 ALASKA UNIT CODES (02)
Code
013
016
020
050
060
068
070
090
100
110
122
130
150
164
170
180
185
188
201
220
232
240
261
270
280
282
290
Unit
Aleutians East Borough
Aleutians West Census Area
Anchorage Borough
Bethel Census Area
Bristol Bay Borough
Denali Borough
Dillingham Census Area
Fairbanks North Star Borough
Haines Borough
Juneau Borough
Kenai Peninsula Borough
Ketchikan Gateway Borough
Kodiak Island Borough
Lake and Peninsula Borough
Matanuska-Susitna Borough
Nome Census Area
North Slope Borough
Northwest Arctic Borough
Prince of Wales-Outer Ketchikan Census Area
Sitka Borough
Skagway-Hoonah-Angoon Census Area
Southeast Fairbanks Census Area
Valdez-Cordova Census Area
Wade Hampton Census Area
Wrangell-Petersburg Census Area
Yakutat Borough
Yukon-Koyukuk Census Area
Appendix B: Reference Information
pg.
134
Section B.3: Slope Correction Table
SECTION B.3 SLOPE CORRECTION TABLE
Percent
Expansion
Factor
Expansion Factor
Reciprocal
-----Slope Distance-----
10
15
20
25
30
1.005
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
0.995
0.99
0.98
0.97
0.96
24.0 feet
24.1
24.3
24.5
24.7
25.1
100 feet
100.5
101.1
102.0
103.1
104.4
35
40
45
50
55
1.06
1.08
1.10
1.12
1.14
0.94
0.93
0.91
0.89
0.88
25.4
25.8
26.3
26.8
27.4
105.9
107.7
109.7
111.8
114.1
60
65
70
75
80
1.17
1.19
1.22
1.25
1.28
0.86
0.84
0.82
0.80
0.78
28.0
28.6
29.3
30.0
30.7
116.6
119.3
122.1
125.0
128.1
85
90
95
100
105
1.31
1.35
1.38
1.41
1.45
0.76
0.74
0.72
0.71
0.69
31.5
32.3
33.1
33.9
34.8
131.2
134.5
137.9
141.4
145.0
110
115
120
125
130
1.49
1.52
1.56
1.60
1.64
0.67
0.66
0.64
0.62
0.61
35.7
36.6
37.5
38.4
39.4
148.7
152.4
156.2
160.1
164.0
135
140
145
150
155
1.68
1.72
1.76
1.80
1.84
0.60
0.58
0.57
0.55
0.54
40.3
41.3
42.3
43.3
44.3
168.0
172.0
176.1
180.3
184.5
135
pg.
SECTION B.4 METRIC EQUIVALENTS AND AIDS
Length
=
2.54 centimeters (cm.)
=
3.048 centimeters (cm.)
=
0.3048 meter (m.)
=
1.609 kilometers (km.)
=
.03 foot (ft.)
=
3.2808 feet (ft.)
=
5280 feet
Area
1 acre
=
0.4 hectare (ha.) (approximately)
5 acres
=
2 hectares (ha.) (approximately)
1,000 acres
=
404.7 hectares (ha.)
1 hectare
=
2.471 acres (ac.)
2.5 hectares
=
6 acres (ac.) (approximately)
Volume
1,000 cubic feet
=
28.3 meters (m3)
1 cubic foot per acre
=
0.07 cubic meter per hectare (m3/ha)
Condition Class Minimum Area
0.4 hectares (1 acre)
=
4,000 square meters
=
40 meters x 100 meters
=
35 meter radius circle
1 acre
=
118 foot radius circle
=
209 feet x 209 feet
=
43,560 square feet
Metric System - Length
1 meter
=
10 decimeters (dm.)
1 meter
=
100 centimeters (cm.)
1 meter
=
1,000 millimeters (mm.)
.001 meters
=
1 millimeter
.01 meters
=
1 centimeter
.1 meters
=
1 decimeter
1 meter
=
1 meter
10 meters
=
1 decameter
100 meters
=
1 hectometer
1,000 meters
=
1 kilometer
Photo Scales
Scale
Length on Photo
Length on Ground
1:15,840
1 mm.
15.8 meters
1:24,000
1 mm.
24.0 meters
1:31,680
1 mm.
31.7 meters
1:40,000
1 mm.
40.0 meters
1:15,840
1 inch
1,320 feet
0.1 inch
132 feet
.05 inch (1/20)
66 feet
1:24,000
1 inch
2,000 feet
0.1 inch
200 feet
.05 inch (1/20)
100 feet
1:31,680
1 inch
2,640 feet
0.1 inch
264 feet
.05 inch (1/20)
132 feet
1:40,000
1 inch
3,333 feet
0.1 inch
333 feet
.05 inch (1/20)
166 feet
1 inch
0.1 feet
1 foot
1 mile
1 centimeter (cm.)
1 meter (m.)
1 mile
Appendix B: Reference Information
Section B.4: Metric Equivalents and Aids
pg.
136
137
pg.
APPENDIX C FOREST TYPE CODES
The following list includes all forest types in Alaska. Types designated East/West are commonly found in
those regions, although types designated for one region may occasionally be found in another. These
codes are used for FOREST TYPE (Item 5.5.2.4).
East
West Code
Species Type
Spruce / Fir Group
E
122 White spruce
E
W
125 Black spruce
Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group
W
264 Pacific silver fir
W
268 Subalpine fir
W
270 Mountain hemlock
W
271 Alaska-yellow-cedar
Lodgepole Pine Group
W
281 Lodgepole pine
Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group
W
301 Western hemlock
W
304 Western redcedar
W
305 Sitka spruce
Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group
E
W
703 Cottonwood
Aspen / Birch Group
E
W
901 Aspen
E
W
902 Paper birch
Alder / Maple Group
W
911 Red alder
For nonstocked stands, see FOREST TYPE (Item 5.5.2.4) for procedures to determine FOREST TYPE.
Appendix C: Forest Type Codes
138
:
pg.
139
pg.
APPENDIX D TREE SPECIES LIST
This list includes all tree species tallied in Alaska.
Shaded species are “Core”.
”Genus-only” codes are not valid in PNW.
FIA
Code
0011
0019
0042
0071
0094
0095
0098
0108
0231
0242
0263
0264
0351
0375
0661
0746
0747
PLANTS
Code
ABAM
ABLA
CHNO
LALA
PIGL
PIMA
PISI
PICO
TABR2
THPL
TSHE
TSME
ALRU2
BEPA
MAFU
POTR5
POBAT
Common name
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
Alaska yellow-cedar
tamarack (native)
white spruce
black spruce
Sitka spruce
lodgepole pine
Pacific yew
western redcedar
western hemlock
mountain hemlock
red alder
paper birch
Oregon crabapple
quaking aspen
black cottonwood
Genus
Abies
Abies
Chamaecyparis
Larix
Picea
Picea
Picea
Pinus
Taxus
Thuja
Tsuga
Tsuga
Alnus
Betula
Malus
Populus
Populus
Species
amabilis
lasiocarpa
nootkatensis
laricina
glauca
mariana
sitchensis
contorta
brevifolia
plicata
heterophylla
mertensiana
rubra
papyrifera
fusca
tremuloides
balsamifera ssp. trichocarpa
Appendix D: Tree Species List
140
:
pg.
141
pg.
APPENDIX E TREE CODING GUIDE
Previous Measurement
Present Measurement
PREVIOUS PRESENT RECONCILE STANDING CAUSE OF
TREE
TREE
DEAD
DEATH
STATUS STATUS
SAMPLE KIND 1
Live 1.0+DBH
Dead 5.0+ DBH
PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3 (AK-Remeasurement)
Live 5.0+ DBH
Live 1 inch +
Live 5.0+ DBH
Live 5.0+ DBH
Live 1.0+ DBH
Live 1.0+ DBH
Live 1 inch +
Live 1.0+ DBH
Live 1 inch +
Dead 5.0+ DBH
Dead 5.0+ DBH
Dead 5.0+ DBH
Dead 5.0+ DBH
Dead 5.0+ DBH
Live 5.0+ DBH
Live 1.0+ DBH
Live 1.0+ DBH
Live 1 inch +
Dead 5.0+ DBH
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
0
0
10-80
10-80
30 or 50
1
1
2
2
0
0 or 1
80
10-80
1
3
80
1
3
80
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
0
5
1
0
7
1
1
0
0
8
6
1
2
0
0
9
8
1
0
0
0
Appendix E: Tree Coding Guide
Live 5.0+ DBH
Live 5.0+ DBH
Live but land no longer
qualifies as forest
Standing dead 5.0+
Down dead 5.0+
Cruiser unable to locate
tree due to a weather
(including geologic, such
as landslide) or fire event &
assume tree is down dead
or you can see tree and it
is dead and off the plot
Cut and left in the woods
Dead and land no longer
qualifies as forest (land
clearing or conversion to
nonforest land use)
Tree removed (cut and
hauled away)
Gone (cut and removed?)
and land no longer
qualifies as forest
Dead standing 5.0 DBH
Dead down 5.0+
Dead DBH < 5.0
Cruiser is unable to locate
tree due to a weather
(including geologic) or fire
event & assume it is down
dead
Tree removed (cut and
hauled away)
Live tree shrank <5.0 and
NOT on microplot
Live 5.0+ DBH, shouldn’t
have been tallied –beyond
24.0–cruiser error
No longer a tally species
Tree moved off plot due to
a geologic (i.e., slight earth
movement) or weather
event (i.e., hurricane) and
you can still see it (live
before, live now)
Nonsampled area now
No longer a tally species
1
2
pg.
142
Previous Measurement
Dead 5.0 DBH
Dead 5 inch +
Missed live
< 5.0 live
< 1.0 live
< 1.0 live
Nonsampled area before
Nonforest before
Missed dead
Missed live
< 5.0 live
Nonsampled area before
Nonforest before
:
Live 5.0+ DBH
Present Measurement
PREVIOUS PRESENT RECONCILE STANDING CAUSE OF
TREE
TREE
DEAD
DEATH
STATUS STATUS
Tree moved off plot due to
2
0
6
a geologic (i.e., small earth
movement) or weather
event (i.e., hurricane) and
you can still see the tree
Nonsampled area now
2
0
9
Live 5.0+ DBH
1
3
5.0+ DBH live (not on the
1
1
microplot)
1.0-4.9 DBH live (on the
1
1
microplot)
5.0+ DBH live (on the
1
2
microplot) (through growth)
Live 1 inch +
1
3
Forest now, live 1 inch+
1
1
Dead 5.0+ DBH
2
4
1
Dead 5.0+ DBH
2
3
1
10-80
5.0+ DBH dead (very rare)
2
1
0 or 1
10-80
Standing Dead 5 inch+
2
3 or 4
Forest now, Standing
2
1
Dead 5 inch+
Dead <5.0 inch DBH
1
2
0
10-80
143
pg.
APPENDIX F SITE INDEX EQUATION NUMBERS
Alaska
Equation Number
9
Base Age
100
3
100
2
8
4
11
6
16
10
12
5
7
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Rules
Spcd = 11, 19, 98, 263, 264, 999
Tree Age < 200
Spcd = 11, 19, 98
Tree Age ≥ 200
Spcd = 310, 312, 660
Spcd = 351
Spcd = 375
Spcd = 42
Spcd = 108
Spcd = 71, 94, 95
Spcd = 747
Spcd = 746, 920
Spcd = 242
Spcd = 263, 264, 999
Tree Age ≥ 200
Appendix F: Site Index Equation Numbers
144
:
pg.
145
pg.
APPENDIX G INVASIVE SPECIES LIST
SECTION G.1 ALASKA INVASIVE SPECIES
Table G.1: Invasive plant species coded in Alaska
PLANTS Species
Alliaria petiolata
Bromus inermis
Bromus tectorum
Capsella bursa-pastoris
Caragana arborescens
Centaurea biebersteinii
Cirsium arvense
Cirsium vulgare
Crepis tectorum
Cytisus scoparius
Dactyllis glomerata
Elymus repens
Galeopsis sp.
Hieracium aurantiacum
Hieracium pilosella
Hieracium caespitosum
Hieracium umbellatum
Hordeum jubatum
Hypochaeris radicata
Impatiens glandulifera
Lappula squarrosa
Leucanthemum vulgare
Linaria vulgaris
Lolium sp.
Matricaria discoidea
Medicago sp.
Melilotus alba
Melilotus officinalis
Phalaris arundinacea
Phleum pratense
Plantago major
Polygonum aviculare
Polygonum cuspidatum
Prunus padus
Ranunculus repens
Senecio jacobaea
Senecio vulgaris
Sonchus arvensis
Stellaria media
Taraxacum officinale
Tanacetum vulgare
Tragopogon dubius
Trifolium sp.
Vicia cracca
Unknown plant
Common Name
garlic mustard
smooth brome
downy brome, cheatgrass
shepard’s purse
Siberian peashrub
spotted knapweed
Canada thistle
bull thistle
narrowleaf hawksbeard
Scotchbroom
orchard grass
quackgrass
hempnettle
orange hawkweed
mousear hawkweed
meadow hawkweed
narrowleaf hawkweed
foxtail barley
hairy catsear
ornamental jewelweed, Himalayan balsam
bluebur
oxeye daisy
common toadflax, butter and eggs
ryegrass
pineapple weed
alfalfa
sweetclover, white
sweetclover, yellow
Reed canarygrass
Timothy
plantain
prostrate knotweed
Japanese knotweed
European bird cherry
creeping buttercup
tansy ragwort
common groundsel
perennial sowthistle
common chickweed
dandelion
common tansy
western salsify
clover
bird vetch
unknown plant
Appendix G: Invasive Species List
CODE
ALPE4
BRIN2
BRTE
CABU2
CAAR18
CEBI2
CIAR4
CIVU
CRTE3
CYSC4
DAGL
ELRE4
GALEO
HIAU
HIPI
HICA10
HIUM
HOJU
HYRA3
IMGL
LASQ
LEVU
LIVU2
LOLIU
MADI6
MEDIC
MEAL12
MEOF
PHAR3
PHPR3
PLMA2
POAV
POCU6
PRPA5
RARE3
SEJA
SEVU
SOAR2
STME2
TAOF
TAVU
TRDU
TRIFO
VICRC
2PLANT
Section G.1: Alaska Invasive Species
pg.
146
147
pg.
APPENDIX H DETERMINATION OF STOCKING VALUES FOR LAND USE
CLASSIFICATION
When CONDITION STATUS is in question, stocking values are required to determine if a CONDITION
STATUS = 1 (accessible forest land) exists on a plot. This will determine which data items must be
recorded for the condition. When the CONDITION STATUS is in question (usually a nonforest area that is in
the process of reverting to forest land or a marginal site that can only support a low number of trees), the
crew must determine if there is sufficient stocking to classify the condition as forest. A minimum stocking
value of 10 percent is required for accessible forest land (unless the condition was previously forested,
such as a recent clear cut).
The following tables show the stocking values to assign to trees or the number of trees per acre to
determine if a plot meets the minimum stocking to be considered forest land. In the determination of
stocking for this purpose, the field crew should consider the condition over its entire area, not just the trees
and seedlings that would be tallied on the subplots and microplots, especially when the plot straddles
conditions. Also, for stocking purposes, consider a clump of trees (e.g., stump sprouts) less than 5 inches
DBH to be a single tree.
The number of trees per acre needed to obtain minimum stocking depends on the DBH of the largest tree
on the plot in the condition being evaluated, and the species and DBH of each of the tally trees. If the
condition occurs on all four subplots and the trees are distributed fairly evenly over the entire condition
area, the following steps can be used to determine if the condition has the minimum number of trees per
acre for forest land.
When using a Stocking Values table, begin a tally of each subplot and microplot and sum the stocking
values for each tree tallied based upon its species and size class. When the stocking values for the tallied
trees equals or exceeds 10, the condition meets the minimum stocking requirement for forest land.
For example, a condition that was formerly nonforest is no longer being maintained as nonforest and has
begun to revert. A check of all four subplots and microplots confirms that the largest tree there is in the 3.0
– 3.9 inches DBH class. The tally of microplot 1 is one red maple (species code = 316) seedling. The sum
of the stocking value (table 5a) to this point is 2.4 and the tally continues on microplot 2.
Subplot Number
1
Total
Plot Type
2
Species
316
Size Class
< 1.0
Number Tallied Stocking Value
1
2.4
2.4
The tally at microplot 2 is two red maple seedlings. The stocking value for the two seedlings is 4.8. The
cumulative stocking value to this point is 7.2. Since the minimum value of 10 percent stocking has not been
reached, the tally continues to subplot 3.
Subplot Number
1
2
Total
Plot Type
2
2
Species
316
316
Size Class
< 1.0
< 1.0
Number Tallied Stocking Value
1
2.4
2
4.8
7.2
At microplot 3 one sugar maple (species code = 318) sapling in the 1.0 – 1.9-inch DBH class is tallied. The
cumulative stocking value is now 13.1 and the condition meets the minimum stocking to be considered
forest land.
Subplot Number
1
2
3
Total
Plot Type
2
2
2
Species
316
316
318
Size Class
< 1.0
< 1.0
1.0 – 1.9
Number Tallied Stocking Value
1
2.4
2
4.8
1
5.9
13.1
When trees of more than one diameter class are present, their contribution towards meeting the minimum
must be combined. For example:
Appendix H: Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
Observe all of the trees on the plot and classify the condition, based on the tree with the largest DBH, into
one of the following groups; the largest tree observed has a DBH of 5 inches or greater, 4.0-4.9 inches, 3.03.9 inches, 2.0-2.9 inches, 1.0-1.9 inches or less than 1.0 inch DBH. If you are using the Stocking Values
table to determine if the condition meets minimum stocking, use table 5a, 5b, 5c, 5d, 5e, or 5f. For trees
less than 5”, use table 5c because tally from microplots can be highly variable. If you are using the Number
of Trees table to determine if the condition meets minimum stocking, use table 5g.
pg.
148
In a lodgepole pine stand (species code = 108), the largest tree in the condition is 5.0+ inches DBH. If at
least 20 trees that are 5.0-6.9 inches DBH are found on the four subplots, the minimum stocking of 10
percent (table 5b: 5th row, 1st column) is met. In the same condition only 5 tally trees in the 13.0-14.9-inch
DBH class are needed to meet minimum stocking of 10 percent. If the tally were three 5.0-6.9-inch trees
and two 13.0-14.9-inch DBH class trees (total stocking of 3 x 0.5 + 2 x 2.2 = 5.9), the combined stocking
would not meet the minimum 10 percent (5.9 < 10) and the condition would be classified nonforest.
When using the Number of Trees table (table 5g), estimate the number of trees per acre by the diameter
classes. When a condition exists on all 4 of the 24-foot radius subplots, each tally tree (DBH > 5.0 inches)
represents 6 trees per acre and each sapling (DBH > 1.0 inch to < 5.0 inches) or seedling observed on the
4 microplots represents 75 trees per acre.
In sparse stands of smaller trees, a more accurate observation of trees per acre can be determined by
observing trees < 5.0 inches DBH on the 24-foot radius subplot. In many forest types no more than 180
trees per acre of the largest diameter class are needed to meet the minimum stocking requirements, a total
of 30 trees on all 4 subplots, 7 or 8 smaller trees on each subplot, will provide minimum stocking.
Other things observed on the plot will influence the determination of condition status. In the last lodgepole
pine example, evidence of a recent disturbance that reduced the stocking (cutting, fire, etc.) should be
considered. Also, a very uneven distribution of the trees across the condition can greatly change the
observed number of trees per acre on plots installed across the condition.
If the condition does not cover all four subplots entirely, trees per acre must be expanded using an
expansion factor. The expansion factor is equal to 400/sum of the percent of subplot area (%ARE) for the
condition. The trees per acre value of every diameter class is multiplied by this expansion factor.
If the trees are not uniformly distributed throughout the condition or the condition occurs on only a small
portion of the plot (half the plot or less), use your best judgment in assigning status. You may place several
additional temporary subplots in the condition in order to get a larger sample to base stocking on. When
additional temporary subplots or judgment is used to assign land use, a note should be made on the plot
sheet. Use the following procedure to establish these temporary subplots in a condition:
Step 1. Consider locations 120.0 feet horizontal distance from the highest numbered subplot in the
condition. First consider the location 0 degree azimuth from the subplot center. If this location is
unsuitable, consider in order locations at azimuth 120 degree, and 240 degree. When a suitable
location has been found, establish the temporary subplot. Temporary subplots should be entirely
within the condition (locations should not be within 24.0 feet of a mapped boundary).
Step 2. If Step 1 fails to yield a suitable subplot location, repeat Step 1 at each of the next highestnumbered regular subplots in the condition.
Step 3. If Steps 1 and 2 have been exhausted and a suitable temporary subplot still has not been found,
repeat Step 1 at each temporary subplot in turn, beginning with the first temporary subplot that
was established.
If more than one temporary subplot is to be established, repeat Steps 1 and 2 to establish the second
lowest- numbered temporary subplot next, and continue in order until you have enough temporary subplots
established in the condition to get a good, representative estimate of stocking. The general rule for
establishing temporary subplots is:
•
Install the lowest temporary subplot off the highest established subplot, until all the established
subplots have been exhausted.
•
Then establish the lowest temporary subplot yet to be established off the lowest one already
established (lowest off highest, then lowest off lowest).
:
If there is a transition zone between two conditions use your best judgment to be sure that trees tallied in
the transition zone do not have too much weight in the assignment of a land use.
pg.
149
This page intentionally left blank!
Appendix H: Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
150
pg.
Section H.1: Stocking Values for all Tallied Trees on the Four Subplots/ Microplots
SECTION H.1 STOCKING VALUES FOR ALL TALLIED TREES ON THE FOUR SUBPLOTS/ MICROPLOTS
Table 5a.
DBH of the largest tally tree in the condition
3.0-3.9
4.0-4.9
DBH of tally tree
DBH of tally tree
5.0+
DBH of tally tree
5.06.9
0.7
19, 93
0.6
72, 73
1.0
130, 299
0.5
108
0.4
103, 104, 119
53, 54, 55, 62, 64, 0.5
65, 66, 101, 102,
106, 109, 113,
116, 117, 120,
122, 124, 127,
133, 137, 138,
139, 321, 475,
756, 757, 758, 811
15, 201, 202, 511 0.7
11, 14, 17, 20, 21, 0.5
22, 41, 42, 81, 92,
98, 231, 242, 251,
263, 264
0.4
211, 212
1.0
312, 341, 421,
631, 763, 768,
821, 997, 999
1.3
351, 352, 492
1.2
333
1.1
375
1.2
361, 431, 661,
801, 805, 807,
815, 818, 839, 981
1.4
603, 604
1.2
741, 746
1.0
540, 542
1.2
313, 345, 463,
730, 747, 748
Species
Seedling
1.0-1.9
2.0-2.9
DBH of tally tree DBH of tally tree
4.04.9
6.9
5.6
9.1
5.0
4.2
5.0
3.03.9
5.2
4.3
6.9
3.7
3.1
3.8
2.02.9
4.0
3.3
5.3
2.9
2.4
2.9
1.01.9
2.6
2.1
3.4
1.9
1.6
1.9
Seedling
1.2
1.0
1.6
0.8
0.7
0.9
4.04.9
7.9
6.4
10.4
5.7
4.7
5.7
3.03.9
6.2
5.1
8.3
4.5
3.8
4.6
2.02.9
4.6
3.8
6.1
3.3
2.8
3.4
1.01.9
3.0
2.5
4.0
2.2
1.8
2.2
Seedling
1.4
1.1
1.9
1.0
0.8
1.0
3.03.9
7.6
6.3
10.1
5.5
4.6
5.6
2.02.9
5.7
4.6
7.5
4.1
3.4
4.1
1.01.9
3.7
3.0
4.9
2.7
2.2
2.7
Seedling
1.8
1.4
2.3
1.3
1.1
1.3
2.02.9
7.4
6.1
9.9
5.4
4.5
5.4
1.01.9
4.9
4.0
6.5
3.5
2.9
3.6
Seedling
2.3
1.9
3.1
1.7
1.4
1.7
1.01.9
7.2
5.9
9.6
5.2
4.4
5.3
Seedling
Seedling
3.5
2.9
4.7
2.5
2.1
2.6
7.0
5.7
9.3
5.1
4.2
5.1
6.8
4.8
5.1
3.6
4.0
2.8
2.6
1.8
1.2
0.8
7.7
5.4
6.2
4.3
4.6
3.2
3.0
2.1
1.4
1.0
7.5
5.3
5.6
3.9
3.7
2.6
1.7
1.2
7.3
5.1
4.8
3.4
2.3
1.6
7.1
5.0
3.5
2.4
6.9
4.8
3.8
9.6
2.9
7.2
2.2
5.6
1.4
3.6
0.6
1.6
4.3
10.9
3.4
8.7
2.5
6.4
1.7
4.2
0.8
2.0
4.2
10.6
3.1
7.9
2.0
5.2
1.0
2.4
4.1
10.3
2.7
6.8
1.3
3.3
4.0
10.0
1.9
4.9
3.8
9.8
11.7
10.9
10.5
11.6
8.8
8.2
7.9
8.8
6.8
6.3
6.1
6.8
4.4
4.1
4.0
4.4
2.0
1.8
1.8
2.0
13.3
12.4
12.0
13.2
10.6
9.8
9.5
10.5
7.9
7.3
7.1
7.8
5.1
4.8
4.6
5.1
2.4
2.2
2.1
2.4
13.0
12.1
11.6
12.9
9.6
9.0
8.7
9.6
6.3
5.9
5.7
6.3
3.0
2.8
2.7
3.0
12.6
11.7
11.3
12.5
8.3
7.7
7.4
8.2
4.0
3.7
3.6
3.9
12.3
11.4
11.0
12.2
5.9
5.5
5.3
5.9
11.9
11.1
10.7
11.8
12.7
10.9
9.3
10.8
9.6
8.3
7.0
8.1
7.4
6.4
5.4
6.3
4.8
4.1
3.5
4.1
2.2
1.9
1.6
1.8
14.5
12.5
10.6
12.3
11.5
9.9
8.4
9.8
8.5
7.3
6.3
7.2
5.6
4.8
4.1
4.7
2.6
2.2
1.9
2.2
14.1
12.1
10.3
12.0
10.5
9.0
7.7
8.9
6.9
5.9
5.0
5.8
3.2
2.8
2.4
2.7
13.7
11.8
10.0
11.6
9.0
7.8
6.6
7.6
4.3
3.7
3.2
3.7
13.3
11.5
9.8
11.3
6.5
5.6
4.7
5.5
12.9
11.1
9.5
11.0
SECTION H.2 STOCKING VALUES FOR ALL TREES TALLIED ON THE SUBPLOT ONLY
Table 5b.
Species
19, 93
72, 73
130, 299
108
103, 104, 119
53, 54, 55, 62, 64, 65, 66, 101, 102, 106,
109, 113, 116, 117, 120, 122, 124, 127,
133, 137, 138, 139, 321, 475, 756, 757,
758, 811
15, 201, 202, 511
11, 14, 17, 20, 21, 22, 41, 42, 81, 92, 98,
231, 242, 251, 263, 264
211, 212
312, 341, 421, 631, 763, 768, 821, 997,
999
351, 352, 492
333
375
361, 431, 661, 801, 805, 807, 815, 818,
839, 981
603, 604
741, 746
540, 542
313, 345, 463, 730, 747, 748
5.0-6.9 7.0-8.9 9.010.9
0.7
1.1
1.6
0.6
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5
2.2
0.5
0.9
1.3
0.4
0.7
1.1
0.5
1.0
1.5
11.012.9
2.1
2.0
3.0
1.7
1.5
2.2
13.014.9
2.6
2.6
3.8
2.2
1.9
2.9
15.016.9
3.2
3.3
4.7
2.8
2.4
3.8
17.018.9
3.8
4.0
5.6
3.4
3.0
4.9
19.020.9
4.4
4.9
6.6
4.1
3.6
6.0
21.022.9
5.1
5.7
7.7
4.8
4.2
7.3
23.024.9
5.8
6.7
8.9
5.6
4.9
8.6
25.026.9
6.5
7.6
10.1
6.4
5.6
10.1
27.028.9
7.2
8.7
11.4
7.3
6.4
11.8
8.0
9.8
12.7
8.2
7.2
13.5
0.7
0.5
1.1
0.8
1.6
1.2
2.1
1.6
2.7
2.1
3.3
2.6
4.0
3.2
4.7
3.8
5.4
4.5
6.2
5.2
7.0
5.9
7.8
6.7
8.7
7.5
0.4
1.0
0.7
1.6
1.0
2.2
1.3
3.0
1.7
3.8
2.1
4.6
2.6
5.5
3.1
6.5
3.6
7.5
4.2
8.6
4.8
9.7
5.4
10.9
6.1
12.1
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.2
1.9
2.0
1.9
2.0
2.6
3.0
3.0
2.9
3.3
4.2
4.2
3.9
4.1
5.6
5.6
5.0
5.0
7.2
7.2
6.2
5.9
9.0
9.0
7.5
6.8
11.0
11.0
8.9
7.8
13.1
13.1
10.4
8.9
15.4
15.5
11.9
9.9
17.8
18.0
13.6
11.0
20.5
20.7
15.3
12.1
23.3
23.6
17.2
1.4
1.2
1.0
1.2
2.1
1.8
1.4
2.0
2.9
2.5
1.8
3.0
3.9
3.2
2.2
4.2
4.9
4.0
2.6
5.6
5.9
4.9
3.0
7.2
7.1
5.8
3.5
8.9
8.3
6.8
3.9
10.9
9.6
7.8
4.3
13.0
10.9
8.9
4.8
15.2
12.3
10.0
5.2
17.7
13.7
11.1
5.7
20.3
15.2
12.3
6.2
23.1
29.0+
151
pg.
Appendix H: Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
SECTION H.3 STOCKING VALUES FOR ALL TREES < 7 INCHES, OBSERVED ON THE FOUR SUBPLOTS ONLY
152
pg.
Section H.3: Stocking Values for all Trees < 7 Inches, Observed on the Four Subplots Only
Table 5c.
5.06.9
0.74
19, 93
0.60
72, 73
0.98
130, 299
0.53
108
0.45
103, 104, 119
53, 54, 55, 62, 64, 65, 0.54
66, 101, 102, 106,
109, 113, 116, 117,
120, 122, 124, 127,
133, 137, 138, 139,
321, 475, 756, 757,
758, 811
0.73
15, 201, 202, 511
11, 14, 17, 20, 21, 22, 0.51
41, 42, 81, 92, 98,
231, 242, 251, 263,
264
0.41
211, 212
1.03
312, 341, 421, 631,
763, 768, 821, 997,
999
1.25
351, 352, 492
1.17
333
1.13
375
1.25
361, 431, 661, 801,
805, 807, 815, 818,
839, 981
1.36
603, 604
1.17
741, 746
1.00
540, 542
1.16
313, 345, 463, 730,
747, 748
Species
DBH of the largest tally tree in the condition
3.0-3.9
4.0-4.9
DBH of tally tree
DBH of tally tree
3.0- 2.0- 1.0- Seed 3.0- 2.0- 1.0- Seed3.9 2.9 1.9 -ling 3.9 2.9 1.9 ling
0.50 0.37 0.24 0.11 0.61 0.45 0.30 0.14
0.41 0.30 0.20 0.09 0.50 0.37 0.24 0.11
0.66 0.49 0.32 0.15 0.81 0.60 0.39 0.19
0.36 0.27 0.17 0.08 0.44 0.33 0.21 0.10
0.30 0.22 0.15 0.07 0.37 0.27 0.18 0.08
0.36 0.27 0.18 0.08 0.45 0.33 0.22 0.10
2.0-2.9
DBH of tally tree
2.0- 1.0- Seed2.9 1.9 ling
0.59 0.39 0.19
0.49 0.32 0.15
0.79 0.52 0.25
0.43 0.28 0.13
0.36 0.24 0.11
0.43 0.29 0.14
Seedling
1.0-1.9
DBH of tally tree
1.0-1.9 Seedling Seedling
0.58
0.47
0.77
0.42
0.35
0.42
0.28
0.23
0.37
0.20
0.17
0.20
0.56
0.46
0.74
0.40
0.34
0.41
0.54 0.41 0.32 0.20 0.09 0.62 0.49 0.36 0.24 0.11 0.60 0.45 0.29 0.14
0.38 0.29 0.22 0.14 0.06 0.43 0.34 0.26 0.17 0.08 0.42 0.31 0.21 0.10
0.59 0.39 0.18
0.41 0.27 0.13
0.57
0.40
0.28
0.19
0.55
0.39
0.30 0.23 0.18 0.11 0.05 0.34 0.27 0.20 0.13 0.06 0.34 0.25 0.16 0.08
0.77 0.58 0.45 0.29 0.13 0.87 0.69 0.52 0.34 0.16 0.85 0.63 0.41 0.20
0.33 0.21 0.10
0.83 0.54 0.26
0.32
0.80
0.15
0.39
0.31
0.78
5.0+
DBH of tally tree
4.0- 3.0- 2.0- 1.04.9 3.9 2.9 1.9
0.55 0.42 0.32 0.21
0.45 0.34 0.26 0.17
0.73 0.55 0.43 0.28
0.40 0.30 0.23 0.15
0.33 0.25 0.19 0.13
0.40 0.30 0.24 0.15
Seed
-ling
0.09
0.08
0.12
0.07
0.06
0.07
4.04.9
0.63
0.51
0.83
0.45
0.38
0.46
0.93
0.87
0.84
0.93
0.71
0.66
0.63
0.70
0.55
0.51
0.49
0.54
0.35
0.33
0.32
0.35
0.16
0.15
0.14
0.16
1.07
0.99
0.96
1.06
0.85
0.79
0.76
0.84
0.63
0.58
0.56
0.62
0.41
0.38
0.37
0.41
0.19
0.18
0.17
0.19
1.04
0.96
0.93
1.03
0.77
0.72
0.69
0.77
0.50
0.47
0.45
0.50
0.24
0.22
0.21
0.24
1.01
0.94
0.91
1.00
0.66
0.62
0.60
0.66
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.32
0.98
0.91
0.88
0.97
0.48
0.44
0.43
0.47
0.95
0.89
0.85
0.95
1.01
0.87
0.74
0.86
0.77
0.66
0.56
0.65
0.59
0.51
0.43
0.50
0.38
0.33
0.28
0.32
0.17
0.15
0.13
0.15
1.16
1.00
0.85
0.98
0.92
0.79
0.67
0.78
0.68
0.59
0.50
0.58
0.44
0.38
0.33
0.38
0.21
0.18
0.15
0.18
1.13
0.97
0.83
0.96
0.84
0.72
0.61
0.71
0.55
0.47
0.40
0.47
0.26
0.22
0.19
0.22
1.10
0.94
0.80
0.93
0.72
0.62
0.53
0.61
0.34
0.30
0.25
0.29
1.07
0.92
0.78
0.90
0.52
0.45
0.38
0.44
1.03
0.89
0.76
0.88
SECTION H.4 STOCKING VALUES FOR ALL TREES 5.0 INCHES AND GREATER OBSERVED ON THE FOUR SUBPLOTS ONLY
Table 5d.
Species
5.06.9
19, 93
0.7
72, 73
0.6
130, 299
1.0
108
0.5
103, 104, 119
0.4
53, 54, 55, 62, 64, 65, 66, 101, 102, 106, 109, 113, 116, 117, 0.5
120, 122, 124, 127, 133, 137, 138, 139, 321, 475, 756, 757,
758, 811
15, 201, 202, 511
0.7
11, 14, 17, 20, 21, 22, 41, 42, 81, 92, 98, 231, 242, 251, 263, 0.5
264
211, 212
0.4
312, 341, 421, 631, 763, 768, 821, 997, 999
1.0
351, 352, 492
1.3
333
1.2
375
1.1
361, 431, 661, 801, 805, 807, 815, 818, 839, 981
1.2
603, 604
1.4
741, 746
1.2
540, 542
1.0
313, 345, 463, 730, 747, 748
1.2
7.08.9
1.1
1.0
1.5
0.9
0.7
1.0
9.010.9
1.6
1.5
2.2
1.3
1.1
1.5
11.012.9
2.1
2.0
3.0
1.7
1.5
2.2
13.014.9
2.6
2.6
3.8
2.2
1.9
2.9
15.016.9
3.2
3.3
4.7
2.8
2.4
3.8
17.018.9
3.8
4.0
5.6
3.4
3.0
4.9
19.020.9
4.4
4.9
6.6
4.1
3.6
6.0
21.022.9
5.1
5.7
7.7
4.8
4.2
7.3
23.024.9
5.8
6.7
8.9
5.6
4.9
8.6
25.026.9
6.5
7.6
10.1
6.4
5.6
10.1
27.028.9
7.2
8.7
11.4
7.3
6.4
11.8
8.0
9.8
12.7
8.2
7.2
13.5
1.1
0.8
1.6
1.2
2.1
1.6
2.7
2.1
3.3
2.6
4.0
3.2
4.7
3.8
5.4
4.5
6.2
5.2
7.0
5.9
7.8
6.7
8.7
7.5
0.7
1.6
1.9
2.0
1.9
2.0
2.1
1.8
1.4
2.0
1.0
2.2
2.6
3.0
3.0
2.9
2.9
2.5
1.8
3.0
1.3
3.0
3.3
4.2
4.2
3.9
3.9
3.2
2.2
4.2
1.7
3.8
4.1
5.6
5.6
5.0
4.9
4.0
2.6
5.6
2.1
4.6
5.0
7.2
7.2
6.2
5.9
4.9
3.0
7.2
2.6
5.5
5.9
9.0
9.0
7.5
7.1
5.8
3.5
8.9
3.1
6.5
6.8
11.0
11.0
8.9
8.3
6.8
3.9
10.9
3.6
7.5
7.8
13.1
13.1
10.4
9.6
7.8
4.3
13.0
4.2
8.6
8.9
15.4
15.5
11.9
10.9
8.9
4.8
15.2
4.8
9.7
9.9
17.8
18.0
13.6
12.3
10.0
5.2
17.7
5.4
10.9
11.0
20.5
20.7
15.3
13.7
11.1
5.7
20.3
6.1
12.1
12.1
23.3
23.6
17.2
15.2
12.3
6.2
23.1
29.0+
153
pg.
Appendix H: Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
154
pg.
Section H.5: Stocking Values for all Trees <7 Inches Observed on One Acre
SECTION H.5 STOCKING VALUES FOR ALL TREES <7 INCHES OBSERVED ON ONE ACRE
Table 5e.
Species
19, 93
72, 73
130, 299
108
103, 104, 119
53, 54, 55, 62, 64, 65,
66, 101, 102, 106, 109,
113, 116, 117, 120,
122, 124, 127, 133,
137, 138, 139, 321,
475, 756, 757, 758, 811
15, 201, 202, 511
11, 14, 17, 20, 21, 22,
41, 42, 81, 92, 98, 231,
242, 251, 263, 264
211, 212
312, 341, 421, 424,
631, 763, 768, 821,
997, 999
351, 352, 492
333
375
361, 431, 661, 801,
805, 807, 815, 818,
839, 981
603, 604
741, 746
540, 542
313, 345, 463, 730,
747, 748
3.03.9
0.069
0.057
0.092
0.050
0.042
0.051
2.02.9
0.054
0.044
0.071
0.039
0.032
0.039
1.01.9
0.035
0.028
0.046
0.025
0.021
0.025
3.0-3.9
DBH of tally tree
4.0-4.9
DBH of tally tree
5.0+
DBH of tally tree
Seedling
0.016
0.013
0.021
0.011
0.009
0.011
4.04.9
0.105
0.086
0.139
0.075
0.063
0.077
3.03.9
0.083
0.068
0.110
0.060
0.050
0.061
2.02.9
0.062
0.050
0.082
0.044
0.037
0.045
1.01.9
0.040
0.033
0.053
0.029
0.024
0.029
Seedling
0.019
0.015
0.025
0.013
0.011
0.014
3.0- 2.0- 1.0- Seed3.9 2.9 1.9 ling
0.102 0.076 0.050 0.023
0.083 0.062 0.041 0.019
0.135 0.100 0.066 0.031
0.073 0.055 0.036 0.017
0.062 0.046 0.030 0.014
0.074 0.055 0.036 0.017
1.0-1.9
2.0-2.9
DBH of tally tree DBH of tally
tree
2.0- 1.0- Seed- 1.0- Seedlin
1.9 g
2.9 1.9 ling
0.099 0.065 0.031 0.096 0.047
0.081 0.053 0.025 0.079 0.038
0.131 0.086 0.041 0.128 0.062
0.071 0.047 0.022 0.069 0.034
0.060 0.039 0.019 0.058 0.028
0.072 0.048 0.023 0.070 0.034
Seedling
Seedling
5.06.9
0.12
0.10
0.16
0.09
0.07
0.09
4.04.9
0.092
0.075
0.122
0.066
0.055
0.067
0.12
0.09
0.090 0.068 0.053 0.034 0.015 0.103 0.082 0.061 0.040 0.018 0.100 0.075 0.049 0.023 0.098 0.064 0.031 0.095 0.046
0.063 0.048 0.037 0.024 0.011 0.072 0.057 0.043 0.028 0.013 0.070 0.052 0.034 0.016 0.068 0.045 0.022 0.067 0.032
0.092
0.065
0.07
0.17
0.050 0.038 0.029 0.019 0.009 0.057 0.046 0.034 0.022 0.010 0.056 0.042 0.027 0.013 0.054 0.036 0.017 0.053 0.026
0.128 0.097 0.075 0.048 0.022 0.146 0.116 0.086 0.056 0.026 0.142 0.105 0.069 0.033 0.138 0.091 0.043 0.134 0.065
0.051
0.130
0.21
0.19
0.19
0.21
0.156
0.145
0.140
0.155
0.118
0.110
0.106
0.117
0.091
0.085
0.082
0.090
0.059
0.055
0.053
0.058
0.026
0.025
0.024
0.026
0.178
0.165
0.160
0.176
0.141
0.131
0.127
0.140
0.105
0.097
0.094
0.104
0.068
0.063
0.061
0.068
0.032
0.030
0.028
0.032
0.173 0.128 0.084 0.040
0.161 0.120 0.078 0.037
0.155 0.115 0.076 0.036
0.172 0.128 0.084 0.039
0.168 0.111 0.053
0.156 0.103 0.049
0.151 0.099 0.047
0.167 0.110 0.053
0.163
0.152
0.147
0.162
0.079
0.074
0.071
0.079
0.159
0.148
0.142
0.158
0.23
0.20
0.17
0.19
0.169
0.146
0.124
0.143
0.128
0.110
0.094
0.109
0.099
0.085
0.072
0.084
0.064
0.055
0.047
0.054
0.029
0.025
0.021
0.024
0.193
0.166
0.141
0.164
0.153
0.132
0.112
0.130
0.114
0.098
0.083
0.097
0.074
0.064
0.054
0.063
0.034
0.030
0.025
0.029
0.188 0.140 0.091 0.043
0.162 0.120 0.079 0.037
0.138 0.102 0.067 0.032
0.159 0.118 0.078 0.037
0.183 0.120 0.057
0.157 0.103 0.049
0.134 0.088 0.042
0.155 0.102 0.049
0.178
0.153
0.130
0.151
0.086
0.074
0.063
0.073
0.172
0.148
0.126
0.146
0.094
0.076
0.124
0.067
0.056
0.068
SECTION H.6 STOCKING VALUES FOR ALL TREES 5.0 INCHES AND GREATER OBSERVED ON ONE ACRE
Table 5f.
Species
5.06.9
19, 93
0.12
72, 73
0.10
130, 299
0.16
108
0.09
103, 104, 119
0.07
53, 54, 55, 62, 64, 65, 66, 101, 102, 106, 109, 113, 116, 117, 0.09
120, 122, 124, 127, 133, 137, 138, 139, 321, 475, 756, 757,
758, 811
15, 201, 202, 511
0.12
11, 14, 17, 20, 21, 22, 41, 42, 81, 92, 98, 231, 242, 251, 263, 0.09
264
211, 212
0.07
312, 341, 421, 631, 768, 821, 997, 999
0.17
351, 352, 492
0.21
333
0.19
375
0.19
361, 431, 661, 801, 805, 807, 815, 818, 839, 981
0.21
603, 604
0.23
741, 746
0.20
540, 542
0.17
313, 345, 463, 730, 747, 748
0.19
7.08.9
0.19
0.17
0.26
0.14
0.12
0.16
9.010.9
0.26
0.24
0.37
0.21
0.18
0.25
11.012.9
0.34
0.33
0.49
0.29
0.25
0.36
13.014.9
0.43
0.44
0.63
0.37
0.32
0.49
15.016.9
0.53
0.55
0.78
0.47
0.41
0.64
17.018.9
0.63
0.67
0.94
0.57
0.50
0.81
19.020.9
0.73
0.81
1.11
0.69
0.60
1.00
21.022.9
0.84
0.95
1.29
0.81
0.70
1.21
23.024.9
0.96
1.11
1.48
0.94
0.82
1.44
25.026.9
1.08
1.27
1.68
1.07
0.94
1.69
27.028.9
1.20
1.45
1.89
1.22
1.07
1.96
1.33
1.63
2.11
1.37
1.20
2.25
0.19 0.27
0.14 0.20
0.35
0.27
0.45
0.35
0.55
0.44
0.66
0.53
0.78
0.64
0.90
0.75
1.03
0.86
1.16
0.98
1.30
1.11
1.45
1.25
0.11
0.27
0.31
0.33
0.32
0.33
0.35
0.30
0.23
0.33
0.22
0.49
0.56
0.71
0.70
0.64
0.64
0.54
0.36
0.70
0.28
0.63
0.69
0.94
0.93
0.83
0.81
0.67
0.43
0.93
0.35
0.77
0.83
1.21
1.20
1.03
0.99
0.82
0.50
1.19
0.43
0.92
0.98
1.50
1.50
1.24
1.18
0.97
0.58
1.49
0.51
1.08
1.14
1.83
1.83
1.48
1.38
1.13
0.65
1.81
0.60
1.25
1.31
2.18
2.19
1.73
1.60
1.30
0.72
2.16
0.69
1.43
1.48
2.56
2.58
1.99
1.82
1.48
0.80
2.54
0.79
1.62
1.65
2.97
3.00
2.27
2.05
1.66
0.87
2.95
0.90
1.81
1.83
3.41
3.45
2.56
2.29
1.85
0.95
3.38
1.01
2.01
2.02
3.88
3.93
2.86
2.54
2.05
1.03
3.85
0.16
0.37
0.43
0.50
0.49
0.48
0.49
0.41
0.30
0.50
29.0+
155
pg.
Appendix H: Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
SECTION H.7 MINIMUM NUMBER OF TREES PER ACRE FOR FOREST LAND BASED ON LARGEST TALLY TREE
Table 5g.
DBH of largest tally tree
3.0Seed- 1.0- 2.0Species
3.9
2.9
1.9
ling
106.9 103.8 100.9 98.1
19, 93
130.8 127.0 123.4 120.0
72, 73
78.3 76.1 74.0
80.6
130, 299
148.4
144.1 140.0 136.2
108
177.2 172.0 167.2 162.6
103, 104, 119
53, 54, 55, 62, 64, 65, 146.4 142.1 138.1 134.3
66, 101, 102, 106, 109,
113, 116, 117, 120,
122, 124, 127, 133,
137, 138, 139, 321,
475, 756, 757, 758,
811
108.5 105.3 102.4 99.6
15, 201, 202, 511
154.8 150.3 146.1 142.0
22,
11, 14, 17, 20, 21,
41, 42, 81, 92, 98, 231,
242, 251, 263, 264
195.0 189.3 184.0 178.9
211, 212
76.9
74.6 72.5 70.5
312, 341, 421, 631,
763, 768, 821, 997,
999
61.2 59.5 57.8
63.0
351, 352, 492
65.8 63.9 62.2
67.8
333
70.2
68.1 66.2 64.4
375
63.5
61.6 59.9 58.2
361, 431, 661, 801,
805, 807, 815, 818,
839, 981
56.3 54.7 53.2
58.0
603, 604
65.4 63.6 61.8
67.4
741, 746
79.2
76.9 74.7 72.6
540, 542
66.4 64.5 62.7
68.4
313, 345, 463, 730,
747, 748
11.012.9
29.1
29.9
20.3
34.7
40.5
27.8
13.014.9
23.2
22.9
15.9
26.7
31.1
20.4
15.016.9
19.0
18.2
12.9
21.3
24.7
15.6
17.018.9
16.0
14.8
10.7
17.4
20.1
12.3
19.020.9
13.7
12.4
9.0
14.6
16.8
10.0
21.022.9
11.9
10.5
7.8
12.4
14.2
8.3
23.024.9
10.4
9.0
6.8
10.7
12.2
6.9
25.026.9
9.3
7.9
5.9
9.3
10.6
5.9
27.028.9
8.3
6.9
5.3
8.2
9.4
5.1
29.0+
96.9 82.4 52.9 37.5
138.2 117.5 72.7 50.1
28.3
36.9
22.3
28.5
18.2
22.8
15.2
18.8
12.9
15.7
11.1
13.4
9.7
11.6
8.6
10.2
7.7
9.0
6.9
8.0
174.1 148.0 91.3 62.7
68.7 58.4 37.6 26.7
46.2
20.2
35.7
16.0
28.5
13.0
23.4
10.9
19.6
9.2
16.7
8.0
14.4
7.0
12.6
6.2
11.1
5.5
9.9
5.0
4.04.9
95.5
116.8
72.0
132.6
158.2
130.7
5.06.9
81.2
99.3
61.2
112.7
134.5
111.1
7.08.9
53.0
60.3
38.7
69.1
81.8
62.5
9.010.9
38.1
41.0
27.2
47.3
55.6
40.0
7.5
6.1
4.7
7.3
8.3
4.4
56.3
60.5
62.7
56.7
47.8
51.4
53.3
48.2
31.9
30.1
30.9
30.1
23.3
19.9
20.3
20.9
18.0
14.2
14.4
15.6
14.5
10.6
10.7
12.1
12.0
8.3
8.3
9.7
10.2
6.7
6.7
8.0
8.8
5.5
5.5
6.8
7.7
4.6
4.6
5.8
6.8
3.9
3.9
5.0
6.1
3.4
3.3
4.4
5.5
2.9
2.9
3.9
4.9
2.6
2.5
3.5
51.8
60.2
70.7
61.0
44.0
51.2
60.1
51.9
28.6
33.6
43.4
30.4
20.5
24.3
33.7
20.1
15.6
18.6
27.5
14.3
12.3
14.8
23.1
10.7
10.1
12.2
19.8
8.4
8.5
10.3
17.4
6.7
7.2
8.8
15.4
5.5
6.3
7.7
13.8
4.6
5.5
6.8
12.5
3.9
4.9
6.0
11.5
3.4
4.4
5.4
10.5
3.0
3.9
4.9
9.8
2.6
156
pg.
Section H.7: Minimum Number of Trees Per Acre for Forest Land Based on Largest Tally Tree
157
pg.
APPENDIX I QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC)
SECTION I.1 QA/QC CHECK PLOTS
The unique logistics of the Coastal Alaska Inventory require that field QA/QC plots be composed of colocated blind and cold checks. Co-location is used to maximize the efficiency of the QA/QC crew. Because
of the additional time required to conduct a cold check, the decision was made to thoroughly examine two
randomly selected subplots: the remaining two will have a rough examination focusing on the key
components of the subplot.
SUBSECTION I.1.1 QA/QC CHECK PLOT TYPE AND SELECTION
Blind Check – QA/QC personnel or a field crew remeasure a recently completed plot for the purpose of
obtaining an estimate of measurement error. The blind check is completed without the inspectors looking at
the production crew’s data. The results of blind checks are analyzed at a regional and national level. The
blind check is not used to evaluate a crew’s performance.
Cold Check – QA/QC personnel inspect a recently completed plot for the purpose of providing feedback
about measurement quality and determining whether the quality objectives are being met by the production
crew. This inspection is conducted by QA/QC personnel using the production crew’s data without the
members of production crew being present. The plot is checked for proper installation and the data are
checked for accuracy and completeness. Cold checks are documented and tracked, and care is taken to
ensure all crew members receive adequate checks and feedback. A computer scoring system based on the
established Mean Quality Objective (MQO) for each data item is used to assess the quality of the
measurements. Feedback concerning the results of the inspection are discussed during a review session
after the inspection and paperwork are complete.
A target of 4 percent was set as a goal for blind and cold checks; selecting 7 percent will allow this goal to
be met knowing that some plots selected for QA/QC will not be logistically possible to measure (i.e., the
boat has moved out of the range of the plot, weather considerations, etc.). This will be accomplished by first
determining forested and potentially forested plots to be completed during the coming field season and
randomly selecting 7 percent of the field visit plots for “QA plots”. Which plots have been selected as QA/
QC check plots will not be known to the field crew until they have completed the plot and downloaded it into
the field office database. Each night the QA/QC staff will check to see if any of that days plots were
selected.
The first variable that is looked at is the RP. It is imperative that field crews get the RP information correct to
help future crews find previously installed plots. It is true that with the correct GPS coordinates crews have
been accessing the PC on remeasure plots prior to visiting the RP. However, the RP has proven to be
useful for locating the plot on many occasions and should not be overlooked. Therefore, variables related to
the RP (species, diameter, etc.) remain important. For newly installed plots, the photo scale calculations
and other pertinent information should be checked. Any inconsistencies and errors should be noted in the
cold check write up. Once the PC is reached, the PC pinprick location should be verified. A plot incorrectly
installed by the recent production crew is not re-installed by the blind check or QA/QC crew. It is
remeasured in the location selected by the production crew and the data are used for the blind check.
SUBSECTION I.1.3 BLIND CHECK
Two randomly selected subplots are remeasured for the blind check. These subplots are done exactly as
they would be done in a production setting. The blind check crew can and should review any data available
to the current year’s production crew (e.g., initial crew’s plot information and data), whereas the recent
production crew’s data should be left for a review during the cold check. While completing a blind check, it
is important to verify that the tree numbers assigned by the QA/QC crew correspond with the tree numbers
assigned by the recent production crew and the initial crew (when the plot is a remeasure). Tree numbers
are marked with a paint stick on all tally trees including saplings. If the QA/QC crew encounters a tree
missed by the initial crew but picked up by the recent production crew, the tree should get the same tree
number as given by the recent production crew. If the QA/QC crew finds a tree missed by both the initial
and recent production crew, that tree needs to get a number that will not interfere with any other tree
number on the subplot. The missed tree should be added to the end of the blind check tree tally list for that
Appendix I: Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)
SUBSECTION I.1.2 FIELD QA/QC CHECK PROCEDURES
pg.
158
subplot. If the QA/QC crew encounters a tree incorrectly tallied by either the initial or recent production
crew, the tree number given to this tree should be skipped and not assigned to any of the newly tallied trees
on this subplot. All tree numbers between the recent production crew tally and blind check crew tally must
match for the analysts to properly analyze the blind check data.
Make sure all other data for the blind check subplots are filled out (i.e., Subplot Information) and that the
subplots edit in the portable data recorder (PDR) and on the laptop. All Plot Level Data must be filled out as
well as the RP information. The GPS information screen needs to be completed with new coordinates
collected at the time of the blind check. In Subplot Information and Condition Class all information needs to
be completed for all four subplots. CONDITION CLASS AT CENTER will need to be filled out for all
subplots. There is no need to collect new site trees.
SUBSECTION I.1.4 COLD CHECK
After the blind check is completed for both subplots, the file is exited and a new cold check file is opened in
the PDR. Creating this file populates the cold check fields with the data collected during the blind check.
The QA/QC crew reviews the data line-by-line and compares it to a printed copy of the recent production
crew’s data. Any discrepancies are noted, and those which are outside of tolerance are marked in red.
Each of these identified variables is revisited and reassessed to establish if the error was on the behalf of
the QA/QC crew or the production crew. QA/QC crew members should alternate when the variables in
question are reassessed. For example, if one individual was measuring tree length during the blind check, a
different individual should be remeasuring tree length as part of checking procedure. Attention should be
paid to the procedure of error checking and obtaining “true” values for the variables in question. Errors on
the behalf of the production crew or the QA/QC crew are then “fixed” in the cold check file to reflect the
“true” value.
SUBSECTION I.1.5 INTEGRITY OF THE PLOT DATA
It is fairly common to find some misplaced monumentation installed by the production crew during the QA/
QC check. It is the policy of the PNW QA/QC program to never alter the data collected or monuments
installed by the production crew unless they represent a hazard to the safety of future crews. QA/QC crews
do not move PC pins, microplot pins, subplot pins, renumber trees, move nails, etc. In addition, data are not
altered in the blind check file/plot card, or in the production file/plot card. There are two exceptions to this
rule: a safety hazard, or a major error in the travel directions that would result in significant navigation delay
for the future crew. In addition, for trees missed by the production crew, a visible note should be attached to
the production crew’s plot card explaining the situation, but the actual data should not be changed.
For missed trees, a note should include the following information:
1. Tree was missed by the production crew but tallied by the QA/QC crew
2. Tree info (SPECIES, AZIMUTH, HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, DBH, etc.)
SUBSECTION I.1.6 DOWNLOADING DATA
Section I.1: QA/QC Check Plots
Data from a blind check must be downloaded and run through the PDR edit program, just as it would be for
a production plot. Once the blind check information has been reviewed for typos and mis-key errors, the
data are printed and stored in the plot folder with the production data.
Data from a cold check also must be downloaded and run through the edit program. Once the cold check
information is reviewed for typos and gross mis-key errors, the data will be checked against the production
crew’s with the QA scoring program. This gives the production crew a score for plot level data, condition
class data, tree and sapling data, as well as a total plot score.
SUBSECTION I.1.7 REVIEW SESSION
The review session following a QA/QC cold check is an opportunity for QA/QC personnel to provide
production crews with constructive feedback to help improve data quality. The review session should take
place immediately after the plot has been QA-checked, the production crew scores have been determined,
and any recommendations for work quality improvement have been written. All positive and negative
aspects of the production crew performance should be discussed and documented, and the evaluation form
signed by all the members of production and QA/QC crews. Only cold check data are used to evaluate crew
performance. The comparison between blind check and production plots are done at a regional and
national level and does not require any discussion between the QA/QC and production crew.
159
pg.
APPENDIX J GPS OPERATING GUIDE
SECTION J.1 OVERVIEW
Global Positioning Systems (GPS) technology uses signals from satellites to triangulate and compute the
coordinates of locations on the ground. PNW-FIA uses coordinates to correlate plot information with
remotely sensed imagery and data, and to relocate plots at future inventories.
GPS units can also be used to create and navigate to waypoints. A waypoint is a fairly precise location that
a GPS user may assign a number or label to identify. Waypoints can be entered into the GPS unit to
navigate to, or they can be recorded while navigating to mark a particular location.
The Anchorage Forestry Sciences Lab (AFSL) uses Garmin GPSmap 76Cx GPS receivers.
SECTION J.2 GARMIN GPSMAP 76CX UNIT
SUBSECTION J.2.1 GPS KEYPAD LAYOUT AND COMMANDS
PWR: (red circle) key, hold down to turn the unit on and off. Press to adjust screen backlighting.
ENTER: (mark) press and release to enter highlighted option. Press and hold from any main menu/
navigation screen to mark a waypoint.
MENU: press and release to view the Options Menu for a page. Press twice to view main menu.
QUIT: cancels the operation of the last button pressed and/or moves to previous screen.
FIND: (MOB) Press to go to the find menu. Highlight waypoints and a list of saved waypoints will appear.
PAGE: press to move forward through main menu pages.
IN: zooms in the display of the map screen.
OUT: zooms out the display of the map screen.
LEFT/RIGHT: (Rocker Key) move the cursor left or right while entering data or selecting menu options.
UP/DOWN: (Rocker Key) move the cursor up and down while entering data or selecting menu options.
Screen backlight: to initiate, quickly press the PWR key. To adjust screen backlight, press the power key
again to brighten, press again to turn off.
Appendix J: GPS Operating Guide
pg.
160
SECTION J.3 GPS SETUP OPTIONS
The parameters to set before collecting satellite readings are listed below. Once these parameters are set
for the first time they will not need to be reset. Periodically (at least weekly) the unit should be checked to
see that the settings have not been inadvertently changed.
SUBSECTION J.3.1 GPS UNIT SETUP
The Garmin has several MAIN MENU screens that can be displayed or turned off. Some screens must be
displayed in order to get coordinate information. Several screens display similar, or the same, information
and it is recommended that these screens not be displayed.
When the unit is powered on, the “Main” menu screen appears. Scroll to the right and highlight Setup and
press ENTER key. To open each field, scroll to it’s icon and press Enter. Press DOWN key to select setup
option, then press the ENTER key to change units. Scroll through the drop down list and press ENTER to
update/change field. When done, press Quit to exit and choose new field from the Setup menu. Select the
following fields one at a time and check that the correct information is set to display in each:
System: set “GPS” to battery saver, set “WAAS/EGNOS” to enabled, set “battery type” to alkaline (if
using this type)
Time: set “Time Zone” to US Alaska and turn on daylight saving
After system and time are set, scroll to the Units icon and press Enter.
Units: scroll through the following pages using the up/down arrows
Position Format: Lat/Lon = DEG/MIN.MMMM
MAP DATUM: NAD83 (using a different datum will alter the coordinates significantly)
Distance/Speed: Statute
Elevation: Feet (ft/min)
Heading: “Display” set to Degrees and “North Reference” to Magnetic
SUBSECTION J.3.2 MAIN MENU PAGES
The Garmin has six initial menu screens. Scroll through menus by pressing Page to scroll forward or Quit to
scroll backwards. The menu screens are:
Main Menu
Find
Satellite
Trip Computer
Compass
Map
SUBSECTION J.3.3 CUSTOMIZING NAVIGATION SCREENS
Section J.3: GPS Setup Options
It is important to have navigation screens setup consistently among all units. Office defaults will be set for
each unit. While most screens can be customized, it is recommended that the office defaults remain
consistent. For most screens, small numbers will be selected to show more data fields.
While on a NAV screen, press MENU to open the options menu. To change data fields highlight “change
data fields” and press ENTER. Scroll to each individual field and press ENTER to open the drop down
menu. Scroll through to highlight the desired field and press ENTER to set. When all fields have been
changed, press QUIT to save all changes.
Satellite Page: This page shows the number of satellites being received by the unit and which ones are
coming into view.
Trip Computer: It is recommended that the office defaults be left for this screen. At minimum Accuracy,
Time, Bearing, Heading, Elevation, and Dist To Destination should be kept on all units.
Compass: It is recommended this screen be left as set. Accuracy, Dist to Destination, Bearing, and
Heading are most useful.
Map: The map screen will be set to show map only.
161
pg.
SUBSECTION J.3.4 OPERATING THE GPS ON PLOT
1. Turn on the GPS unit
2. Check to see the satellite receiving status of the unit by pressing the PAGE key until the satellite status
screen is visible. The satellite status screen shows two circles in the middle of the screen, and the
satellite signal strength chart at the bottom. When the unit begins receiving satellites, the Acquiring
Satellites message at the top will be replaced by the EPE and current Latitude/Longitude.
SECTION J.4 WAYPOINTS
SUBSECTION J.4.1 CREATING A WAYPOINT (WHEN COORDINATES ARE PROVIDED)
A waypoint is a fairly precise location that a GPS user may assign a number or label to identify. For Alaska
PNW-FIA the location format is Latitude/Longitude.
To create a new waypoint with given coordinates from existing plot data, turn on the GPS and hold down
the ENTER/MARK button. This will bring up the MARK screen with OK highlighted. Scroll up until the
waypoint number field is highlighted. Press ENTER to rename the waypoint (e.g., “12345NAV”, see
Subsection J.4.3 for naming guidelines). Hit OK on the keypad screen when done. Highlight Location and
press ENTER. Edit both lines of the location field by using the pop up keypad to edit the LAT/LONG field.
When the coordinates are displayed correctly, highlight OK and press ENTER. Edit the Elevation field in the
same manner. If you need to edit the icon, or note for a waypoint, use the UP/DOWN arrows to highlight the
field you wish to change and press ENTER. Edit in same manner as just described.
When you have entered all the necessary data, highlight the OK button (bottom right of screen), and press
ENTER. To navigate to a newly created waypoint, see Section J.5 (Navigating with the GPS).
SUBSECTION J.4.2 MARKING (STORING) CURRENT LOCATION AS A WAYPOINT
Storing the location(s) of a vehicle, LZ, RP, or starting point, are good examples of how this feature can be
used in the field. Stored waypoints can be useful for approaching plots from a different direction, taking a
different route back to the LZ, or when lost (see Section J.5, Navigating with the GPS).
To start, verify that the unit is receiving strong signals by checking the Satellite screen. Wait until the EPE
(estimated position error) is 70 feet or less.
Hold down the ENTER/MARK button until the MARK screen appears. Before moving the GPS, allow the
unit to average its current location. Scroll to the left and highlight AVG. Push ENTER to begin averaging.
Once the EPE Measurement Count reaches 180, push and hold ENTER to save; note the EPE before
saving. The coordinates are now “locked in” and the GPS can be moved without fear of changing the
coordinates. Next, edit the waypoint name (Subsection J.4.3). Finally, scroll to the bottom of the screen and
choose OK to save the new waypoint.
Note: Prior to recording any coordinates, allow the GPS unit to average the waypoint.
SUBSECTION J.4.3 NAMING WAYPOINTS
When entering given coordinates (printed on the plot folder) as a waypoint for navigation, add the letters
NAV to the waypoint name to distinguish the folder data from coordinates collected using the GPS unit
(e.g., “12345NAV”).
NAV: Navigation waypoints
LZ/TR: Landing zone, or truck parking spot
RP: Reference Point
PC: Plot Center
SP2: Subplot 2
SP3: Subplot 3
SP4: Subplot 4
OTH: Other – describe in GPS NOTES and on the plot card
Appendix J: GPS Operating Guide
The Garmin waypoint name allows us up to 14 numbers/letters. The first five digits of the name should be
the plot number displayed on the plot jacket (e.g., if the plot number is 30 then plot number is 00030). The
next 2-3 digits would be NAV, LZ, TR, RP, PC, SP2, SP3, SP4, or OTH.
pg.
162
SECTION J.5 NAVIGATING WITH THE GPS
To begin navigation, a waypoint must be stored in the GPS unit (see Section J.4, Waypoints). A compass is
needed (keep the compass away from the body of the GPS to keep it from affecting the magnetic
accuracy). Once the unit has locked onto satellites, push the FIND button. Highlight Waypoints in the menu,
and press ENTER. A list of user-stored waypoints appears. Scroll down through the list to find the name or
number of the desired waypoint (e.g., a NAV waypoint as created in Section J.4). Highlight the desired
waypoint and press ENTER.
If satellite signals are not being received, the GPS unit will display the bearing and distance to the waypoint
from the last position the GPS unit obtained satellite signals. Move in the general direction of the waypoint
until satellite signals are received; the GPS unit may need to remain in the same position for a few minutes
to lock onto a signal.
Once receiving satellites, highlight the GO TO tab on the bottom right of the screen to begin navigation. The
map screen should appear, select the navigation screen desired by scrolling with the Page or Quit buttons.
Follow the bearing using a compass; the distance should steadily decrease as you approach the waypoint.
Eventually, the distance will get very small (about 10-30 feet) and the bearing will begin to jump around
dramatically. This means the destination is very close (look for the stake and witness trees if the waypoint is
subplot 1).
Other data displayed on the navigation screens:
•
Bearing – This is the direction to your destination from your present position, in degrees, from North.
•
Distance – This is distance (measured in the Nav Units selected in Setup) to your destination.
•
Heading – This is the direction you are moving (measured in degrees). When the heading and bearing
are the same, you are traveling in a direct line to your destination.
•
Speed – This is the rate that you are traveling. The unit of measure is selected in Setup - Nav Units.
SECTION J.6 RECORDING GPS INFORMATION
GPS information is recorded in the PDR (see Section 4.4, GPS Coordinates). For Garmin GPSmap76Cx
GPS receivers, record GPS UNIT TYPE code 2.
The PDR requires that the number of averaged readings be entered. The Garmin GPSmap76Cx uses a
counter to record the number of readings. The update rate for this unit is approximately one reading each
second. From the bottom of the Mark Waypoint screen, scroll to the left and highlight Avg. Press enter and
the unit will begin to average the points location, this number will be displayed at the bottom as
Measurement Count. When this number reaches 180, press ENTER again to continue with marking the
waypoint. Enter the measurement count for the NUMBER OF READINGS (Item 4.4.2.7) in the PDR.
Section J.5: Navigating with the GPS
SECTION J.7 BATTERIES
Garmin GPSmap76Cx units use two AA alkaline, NiMH, or lithium batteries. Battery status and signal
strength can be checked in the status bar at the top of all MainMenu/Navigation screens. Replace the
batteries when the Power Indicator is low (the GPS unit may have trouble locating satellites when the
battery is low).
Carry extra batteries at all times. The AA-alkaline batteries begin to lose power after approximately eight
hours of use.
163
pg.
APPENDIX K LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION K.1 OVERVIEW
Accurate heights are necessary in order to determine tree volume and for other uses. The laser can be
used to get fast and accurate tree heights. It can also be used to measure distances and percent slope.
This instrument is more fragile than the GPS units. Some precautions must be taken with the lasers to keep
them working properly. These are:
Never look at the sun through the scope. Looking directly at the sun can permanently damage your eyes.
Never point the laser directly at the sun. Exposing the lens system to direct sunlight, even for a brief period,
may permanently damage the laser transmitter.
Do not expose the laser to extreme temperatures. It is rated for a temperature range of -22 to +140 degrees
fahrenheit. Don’t leave the instrument in the vehicle during the heat of the day.
Do not use batteries with “voltage check” features built on the batteries. The battery case of the laser is too
narrow for these batteries, and they could get stuck in the instrument.
Do not drop the laser. Immediately return it to its case when you get back to the vehicle. There is usually
more danger of damaging the instrument in the vehicle than out in the woods.
SECTION K.2 BASIC OPERATION
All directions for using the laser buttons are given assuming you are holding the instrument with the LCD
display screen facing you and the 2 round lenses are facing the object you want to measure. The buttons
will be referred to as:
L1 - the left button closest to you
L2 - the left button in the middle
L3 - the left button furthest away from you
R1 - the right button closest to you
R2 - the right button in the middle
R3 - the right button furthest away from you
•
Turn the laser on by pushing L1 or R1
•
Turn it off by pushing L2 and L3 at the same time. The laser may turn itself off after a period of inactivity.
Once the instrument is on, push the R1 button to make the red dot appear in the sighting scope. If there
is no red sighting dot, repeatedly push the L2 button until the red dot appears and is the correct
brightness.
•
To light up the display screen, press L3. Press L3 again to turn off the light.
SECTION K.3 SETTINGS
Step 1. Press R2 or R3 to scroll through the menu until SYS is displayed in the upper right hand corner
of the screen.
Step 2. Press R1. ON or OFF will show in the center of the screen. FILTER will flash at the bottom.
Step 3. Press R2 until OFFSET is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.00. This means that
the starting measuring point is the center of the instrument.
Step 4. Press R2 until PIVOT is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.59. When this number
is set at 0.00, the laser is set to calculate heights using a tripod attached to the center of the
instrument. The pivot point is the center of the laser. We use the pivot value at 0.59 because this
sets the pivot point at the rear of the instrument, and this allows you to shoot a height while using
your head as the pivot point. To change this number, press L1 until the number you want to
change is flashing. Press L2 or L3 until the correct number is showing. When the number is set
at 0000.59, press R1.
Step 5. Press R2 until UNITS is flashing. Select F (feet) using the R1 button.
Appendix K: Laser 200 Instructions
Make sure the settings are correct before using the laser. To set the correct measurement units, go into the
main menu and:
pg.
164
Step 6. Press R2 again and D (degrees) should be flashing. If not, press R1 to toggle on D.
Step 7. Press R2 again and “%” should be flashing. It should say ON. If not, press R1.
Step 8. Press R3 twice to accept the new settings and back out to the main display.
SECTION K.4 FILTER AND REFLECTORS
When you are working in areas of dense brush, you need to make sure the laser is giving you the distance
to the correct target. The best way to do this is to use a reflector as a target and use the filter option on the
laser. The laser will only lock onto the highly reflective targets and ignore the less reflective brush. To use
the filter option:
Step 1. Place a reflector (or have someone hold it) on the tree where it can be seen from the required
distance. The laser will not work in the filter mode without a reflector as a target.
Step 2. Go to the main menu on the laser and push R2 or R3 until SYS is displayed on the screen.
Step 3. Press R1 to select the SYS option. The FILTER option will blink, and it will say the FILTER is
OFF or ON.
Step 4. Push R1 to toggle FILTER between ON and OFF.
Step 5. Press R3 to save the desired setting and to back out into the main display. When the FILTER is
on, FILTER will appear at the bottom of the screen when the laser is measuring distances.
SECTION K.5 DISTANCE AND PERCENT SLOPE
Horizontal distance (HD): Turn the laser on. The top-middle of the LCD screen will say HD. Point the red
sighting dot at the target. Press R1 and hold it down until the laser locks on the target, then release. You
can tell when the instrument locks onto its target by sound. It buzzes while it is searching for the target,
then beeps when it locks on to a target or there is an error. If you get an error message, simply aim again
and press R1.
Slope distance (SD) and Vertical distance (VD): Push R2 or R3 until the correct display is shown. Then
aim and press R1 until the laser locks on target. Or, measure a horizontal distance, then push R2 until
the correct display is shown.
Percent slope: Press R2 or R3 until INC is displayed. Then aim and press R1.
SECTION K.6 TREE HEIGHTS
The best way to measure a tree height is to make sure you have a clear shot at the leader or a clear shot of
the tree trunk. Make sure you are getting a distance to the tree trunk, and not some branches in front of it. If
you can’t get a clear shot at the leader or the tree trunk, use a reflector (Section K.4). Once you are in
position with your target in sight, go to the main menu:
Step 1. Push R2 or R3 until HT is displayed in the upper left of the screen.
Step 2. Push R1 once, aim at the target, then push R1 until the laser locks on target. This will measure
the horizontal distance.
Section K.4: Filter and Reflectors
Step 3. The down arrow will flash. Aim at the base of the tree and push R1 to get the percent slope.
Step 4. The up arrow will flash. Aim at the top of the tree and push R1 again to get another percent
slope.
Step 5. Press R1 once more and the laser will display the height. Make sure this height is reasonable
before recording it in the PDR.
SECTION K.7 GATES
The gate option can extend the laser’s minimum range or restrict its maximum range. It is most often used
to help you make sure you are hitting the right target when objects near you or just beyond your target
might give you false readings. You don’t have to set both gates. You will probably only need to set the short
gate because of brush or fog between you and your target. You can set a gate by shooting a target or by
entering distances into the instrument. To set a short gate by laser, go to the main menu and:
165
pg.
Step 1. Press R2 or R3 until GATE is shown on the display.
Step 2. Push R1 to select the gate option.
Step 3. Press R1 to toggle the gate between ON and OFF.
Step 4. Push R2. The S indicator will flash.
Step 5. Aim at a target that is at the distance you want to set as the short gate and press R1.
Step 6. Now you can either set a long gate, or press R3 to go back to save the short gate and return to
the main menu. The S will be displayed when you are measuring distances to show the short
gate is on.
Step 7. To set a long gate:
Step 8. Push R2. The L indicator will flash.
Step 9. Aim at an appropriate target and press R1
Step 10.Press R3 to save the gate and go back to the main display. The L will be displayed when
measuring distances.
The gates are reset to OFF when the laser is turned off, but gate values are saved in memory. This means
that if you have saved a gate and turn off the instrument, when you turn it back on the gate will be set to
OFF. If you go back into the gate option and turn the gate ON, it will remember the last distances you shot
for the long and short gates.
To clear out a gate value: Display the gate values by following the instructions in this section. When the
desired gate value is displayed, press and hold down R3 until the number is deleted.
SECTION K.8 CUMULATIVE DISTANCES
A cumulative distance measurement allows you to move from one target point to the next, stopping at each
one to measure the distance to the next target point. The laser accumulates the measured distances in both
slope and horizontal distances (SD and HD) to give you a running total.
To take a cumulative distance, go to the main menu and:
Step 1. Press R2 or R3 until MULTI is displayed on the screen.
Step 2. Press R1 to enter the MULTI option. DIFF will be displayed.
Step 3. Press R2 once. CUM will be displayed.
Step 4. Press R1. Either SEL or a number will be displayed. If SEL is displayed, HD will flash on and off.
Press R1 to toggle between HD and SD. Press R2 when the correct indicator is flashing. If a
number is displayed, that means there is already a cumulative distance saved on this
instrument. You can either clear out this distance by holding down R3 until 0.00 appears, or
continue to add to the distance by going to step 5.
Step 5. Aim at the target and press R1 to fire the laser.
Step 6. If you are not satisfied with the measurement, repeat step 5 to retake the measurement. If you
are satisfied with the measurement, and wish to add it to your total, press R2. The new total will
be displayed.
You can choose whether you want horizontal or slope distances at any time. If a distance has been
measured, you can change from slope or horizontal distance by pressing R3 twice. SEL will be displayed.
Push R1 to toggle between SD and HD. Press R2 twice to get back to the total distance. Go to step 5 to add
more distances.
The cumulative measurement total is saved in memory even if the instrument is turned off. Turn the
instrument on and scroll back to the MULTI-CUM option and resume the procedure with step 5. To clear out
the current total and begin another series of measurements, hold down R3 while the cumulative distance is
showing until the number is deleted.
Appendix K: Laser 200 Instructions
Step 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add more measurements to the total.
Section K.8: Cumulative Distances
pg.
166
167
pg.
APPENDIX L SAFETY
Safety is the number one priority within the PNW-FIA program. Personnel working in the field are subject to
many safety hazards. Each person must always be conscious of these hazards to avoid accidents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Don't take chances!
Eliminate horseplay and carelessness!
Think safety!
No task is more important than personal safety!
Always make sure that someone else knows where you plan to work each day!
SECTION L.1 SAFETY IN THE WOODS
Wear protective clothing: Long-sleeved shirts, long pants, and gloves may protect you from contact with
brush and rocks, cow parsnip, and stinging insects. Trouser legs should be loose enough to avoid
binding or cramping, and should not have cuffs. Wear a hardhat at all times in the woods. During hunting
seasons, wear bright red or orange clothing.
•
Wear good quality boots that provide good support and traction. For example: 8-inch high leather work
boots with lug-soles (Vibram-type soles). Caulk (“cork”) boots are provided and are recommended for
much of the terrain.
•
Firearm safety: inspect your firearm every day before heading out into the field. Take the time to keep
your assigned firearm well maintained and clean. Only employees certified in firearm safety will be
allowed to carry and operate them. Notify all crew members of the status of the firearm whenever it is
loaded, unloaded, etc. Point the muzzle in a safe direction at all times. Remember: treat every firearm
encountered as if it is loaded and ready to fire. Keep extra ammunition dry and put it in an “easy to
access” location. Keep fingers and branches away from the trigger guard and keep the action area as
clean as possible.
•
Walk, don't run in the woods. Take your time and plan your route. Avoid plunging through the brush. The
best route of travel may not be the shortest. Routes across brushy, irregular terrain with rocks and down
logs can be hazardous.
•
Be watchful of twigs and branches, which may cause eye injury. Be especially alert when stepping up to
trees which retain their small dead twigs. Keep a sufficient distance behind the person ahead of you to
avoid being slapped by branches.
•
Lift knees high to clear obstacles in heavy undergrowth or slash. Slow down and watch your step.
•
When contouring a steep slope, do not lean into the hill. This tends to loosen footing. Erect posture or
slightly leaning out gives more secure footing.
•
Know how to fall to avoid hard impacts. Keep flexible with knees slightly bent. If you feel yourself
slipping, pick a landing spot. Do not stick your arms out to break a fall. Roll with the fall. Try to take the
impact on the side of your body rather than your back.
•
Don't take chances by walking across ravines on small logs.
•
Bee aware. Keep an eye out for yellow jacket and hornet activity. Yellow jackets nest in the ground,
often in well-decayed logs or in thick moss on trees or in snag cavities. Yellow jackets are particularly
active (nasty) during late summer and early fall when forest conditions are very dry. Hornets nest above
ground in "paper" nests that are suspended from branches; woe befalls those who unwittingly bump
their head against a nest, or shake the sapling from which a nest is suspended. If allergic to insect
stings, carry medication to counteract the effects of stings. Let co-workers know about your allergies and
how they can assist in an emergency.
•
Keep hatchets in their sheath except when actually using them, and snap the sheath shut.
•
First Aid. Keep your individual first-aid kit completely supplied, and know how to use it. Treat all wounds
promptly.
•
Carry plenty of water. Don't expect your partner to carry water for you.
•
Beware of lightning. Watch for approaching storms. Avoid prominent high exposed ground and tall/lone
trees. Abandon field gear, especially that made of metal. Seek shelter in the vehicle if possible,
otherwise in thick timber, large caves or in valley bottoms. Crouch on the balls of your feet with your
head covered. Separate 100 feet from other crew members.
Appendix L: Safety
•
pg.
168
SECTION L.2 SAFETY IN AND AROUND THE HELICOPTER
•
Wear personal protective equipment (PPE). Nomex flight suit, Nomex or leather gloves, leather boots,
eye and ear protection, flight helmet, and no synthetic clothing under flight suit.
•
Approach/depart helicopter from the downhill side. Also after pilot gives the signal (thumbs up, nod, etc.)
approach/depart from the side or front in a crouching position in full view of the pilot.
•
Help the pilot watch for hazards. Hazards such as other aircraft, power lines, birds, deteriorating
weather, and fumes should be reported to the pilot.
•
Don’t go beyond cargo racks or skids. Stay away from the rear of the helicopter, regardless of whether
the blades are in motion or not.
•
Keep cockpit chatter to a minimum during takeoff and landing. The pilot will be in contact with air traffic
control or something similar during this time. He also doesn’t need any distractions while taking off or
landing.
•
Tell the pilot if you feel the conditions are unsafe. Any Forest Service passenger has the authority and
responsibility to stop any aviation operation when conditions indicate to them further activity would
jeopardize safety.
•
Store hazardous materials properly. Make sure that bear spray devices are put into the approved airtight
container in the rear cargo area prior to flight. If, in mid-flight, you remember that you didn’t put the bear
spray away properly, let the pilot know so that you can land and put it away correctly. Make sure the
firearm is completely unloaded and make sure all ammo is in the rear cargo area in a pack or plastic
ammo container.
SECTION L.3 SAFETY ON THE ROAD
Section L.2: Safety in and Around the Helicopter
It all pays the same, so drive with care, with courtesy (regardless of others' actions), and with common
sense. Follow these tips:
•
Seat belt use is required in all government-owned or leased vehicles. Do not ride in the back of pickups.
•
Cell phone use is prohibited while driving a government vehicle; pull off the road and park in a safe
location to use a cell phone.
•
Drive defensively! Expect the other person, whether a vehicle operator or a pedestrian, to do the worst
thing and be prepared. Observe all speed regulations and traffic signs.
•
Do not drive when sleepy, taking medication, or when other personal conditions make it unsafe to drive
a vehicle. Get someone else to drive or, if alone, stop driving and nap (out of the public view).
•
Always drive with your headlights on. This practice increases the visibility of your vehicle. It is
particularly important when driving in fog, on dusty roads, traveling in and out of shadows, and any other
low light/visibility situations. Turn lights off when you park the vehicle.
•
Do not operate a vehicle in an unsafe condition. Check your vehicle frequently to keep it in good
mechanical condition. Lights, horn, steering, and brakes should be kept in proper adjustment at all
times. Make necessary repairs as soon as unsafe condition develops. Report any unsafe conditions to
your supervisor.
SECTION L.4 WHAT TO DO IF INJURED
•
Treat the injury promptly. If immediate medical attention is required, go directly to a hospital emergency
room. Try to make contact with your supervisor or the office to get instructions and assistance. Make
sure the doctor fills out his/her part on the CA-1 form.
•
Inform your supervisor of all injuries and ask which, if any, forms need to be filled out. Supervisors must
inform the office at the earliest opportunity.
•
Fill out Federal accident forms completely with signatures. ALWAYS make a copy for your personal
records. Give the completed forms to your supervisor. Have the supervisor check your entries for
mistakes, fill out their section, and forward the completed forms to the appropriate person.
169
pg.
•
Gather Information. If you are in a multi-vehicle accident, provide the other parties with enough written
information so that they can easily get in touch with you, your crew supervisor, and the office. In turn,
you must get the following information from all involved parties and witnesses—names, addresses,
phone numbers, vehicle license numbers, driver's license numbers, insurance company names and
policy numbers, and police report numbers. If possible, do not admit responsibility without first
contacting your supervisor.
Appendix L: Safety
170
:
pg.
171
pg.
APPENDIX M PLOT JACKET
In this section, items that field crews are responsible for filling out are in bold and underlined.
The plot jacket is used to store hard copies of all pertinent past and present information pertaining to an FIA
plot. The outside cover contains labels with plot information, and inside contents include: plot card (formerly
location record), past and present plot data printouts, landowner permission letter (if needed), two new
Digital Ortho Quad (DOQ) photos, an old DOQ or aerial photograph from previous visit, a USGS map
printout, and two small CIR (color infrared) photos. The following provides a description of each part of a
plot jacket and what is required of the field crew for plot completion.
SECTION M.1 PLOT LABELS
There is typically one label on the outside front cover of the plot jacket.
The main label is located in the upper left hand corner of the
plot jacket (see Figure M.1). It contains plot identification
information such as: Plot Number, QUAD, Reserved Status,
County Code, Visit Year, P3 Hex Number (if applicable),
Forest Type, Stand Size Class, Elevation, Vertical And
Horizontal distance estimations to plot, GPS Coordinates
(three sets), Ownership, Permission, IP on Property, and
Owner Notification. A crew leader’s initials must be recorded
in the upper right hand corner of this label to indicate that all
edits are complete and the plot jacket is ready for QA review;
this part must be completed for every plot.
Figure M.1: Plot identification label
A second sticker may be on the plot jacket labeled
“WARNING - COORDINATES MAY NOT BE RELIABLE”. Plot
Number and difference in feet between GPS, image, and target
coordinates are found on this label. This tells you that there may
be an error of some sort and you may want to consider
navigating with photos and RP information versus solely
navigating by GPS coordinates (see Figure M.2). Make sure to
note any major plot location discrepancies on the plot card and
on the photo that you use during the photo work process.
Figure M.2: GPS warning label
Figure M.3: Plot hazard report
Appendix M: Plot Jacket
Another label containing a Plot Hazard Report may be present
(see Figure M.3). This label indicates that a hazard was
recorded at the previous visit. This information should be
updated to reflect current status of any previously recorded
hazards, or to identify new hazards. Fill out as much information
as possible on this label including: Date, Type of Hazard,
whether the hazard in temporary or permanent, and if and how
the hazard can be mitigated. If the label was not found on the
plot jacket, but a hazard was encountered that day, attach this
label to the plot jacket and fill out this information. Use the plot
narrative description on the plot card to describe the hazard in
more detail. This label must be updated/attached when a
hazard exists on or near the plot.
pg.
172
SECTION M.2 PLOT CARD
The plot card (formerly called location record) is like a cover sheet containing many different pieces of
information pertaining to an individual plot. A copy of the plot card can be found in Appendix N, Plot Forms.
SUBSECTION M.2.1 HEADER
This is the box at the top of the plot card on the front side and contains the following parts: PLOT NUMBER,
start date, end date, crew leader (name and number); and crew member(s) (name and number). This part
must be completed for every plot. Fill in the PLOT NUMBER, date(s) the plot was started and completed,
the crew leader’s name, and names of all crew members who took measurements on the plot.
•
Note: All people should be identified by their first initial and last name.
SUBSECTION M.2.2 RP DATA
This box is found directly under the header on the left side of the page and includes: species; diameter (to
nearest inch); azimuth (from RP to PC); horizontal distance (to nearest foot); and, to subplot number. This
item must be completed for all plots in which there is a reference point established and the data
should match the plot printout and RP info on the back of the aerial photo.
SUBSECTION M.2.3 PLOT TRAVEL TIME
This box is located below the RP data box. It includes travel time to plot, measurement time, and travel time
from plot. Travel time to plot should include the time it took to travel from the LZ/TR to the plot location and
the travel time from plot should include the time it took to travel from the plot location back to the LZ/TR.
measurement time is the total number of hours spent working in the field on the plot regardless of the crew
size (e.g., If it took four people 8 hours and 15 minutes to complete a plot in the field, then record 8:15).
Note: These items are different than similar data items entered into the data recorder. This item must be
filled out for every plot in which the crew occupied plot center.
SUBSECTION M.2.4 PLOT ACCESS DESCRIPTION
This box is directly under the header and to the right of the RP data. Directions should be written so they
are easy to read and understand, and include information that will aid future crews in relocating the plot.
Directions must be filled out for every plot field visited (i.e., plot center occupied or nonforest/access
denied/hazardous plots viewed from a distance).
Section M.2: Plot Card
Directions should include the following:
1.Starting point: Select a permanent feature easily identifiable on the photos and on the ground. In most
cases this will be a tree, but at times may include other features such as rock faces, stumps, logging
road intersections, etc.
2. Identify the mode of travel (e.g., flying, driving, skiff, hiking).
3. Include the approximate distances of travel.
4. Give the direction of travel when turning onto a road or trail (e.g., ‘turn west [left] onto logging road
and proceed’). Use compass references first in case the plot must be approached from a direction
other than the way described. Wording such as left, right or straight should be included in
parentheses.
5. Note all gates or other pertinent information that may aid future crews in re-locating the plot (e.g.,
there is an old road on the west [left] with a locked gate [contact BLM for combination]).
6. Describe any prominent features present in the plot area that are unlikely to change in the next ten
years. Include details such as streams, rock outcrops, benches, man-made features, unusual or
large trees, slope, aspect or topographic position.
7. If finding a place to park is difficult, provide directions for where to park the vehicle for road plots. This
information can prevent numerous turn-arounds on potentially hazardous roads.
173
pg.
SUBSECTION M.2.5 PLOT NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
This is the box directly under RP data and plot access description and it provides a written description of the
plot as well as relevant information to land owners, analysts, crew supervisors, crew leaders and QA
inspectors. Analysts use it to provide an explanation for any major changes that have occurred since the
previous inventory, especially those related to condition class attributes, as well as any anomalies in the
data. They also use the historical information to better understand why the plot conditions are what they are
today. Crew supervisors and crew leaders review previous narratives to determine the overall level of
difficulty of a plot, anticipate access problems, and explain any oddities about previously collected data. QA
inspectors review narratives as part of overall plot quality. This item must be filled out for every plot.
The plot narrative should observe the following guidelines:
•
Writing must be clear and legible.
•
Describe species, stand structure, damages, etc., with words rather than using the corresponding
data item codes.
•
Exclude unprofessional comments. Plot cards are public documents being scanned to electronic files
available for viewing by anyone. They are also copied and mailed to the landowner upon request.
•
Transfer relevant information written on the outside of the plot jacket.
Provide documentation for the following information in the order listed under each category.
Accessible Forest Land
Appendix M: Plot Jacket
1. Condition class – Write a description of each condition class present on plot.
• Include changes to CONDITION CLASS STATUS (forest, nonforest, noncensus water,
Census water, nonsampled).
• Write a description of any changes to CONDITION CLASS STATUS since the previous visit
(e.g., ‘at the previous inventory plot was called nonforest rangeland but now trees are
regenerating and condition is 10-percent stocked; therefore it is now forest land’, or ‘at the
previous inventory plot was accessible forest land, but has since been cleared for
development’).
• Stand description, including but not limited to, the following: age; stand size; physiographic
information; tree species present; regeneration, including relative abundance and species;
present and past treatments; present or past disturbances from insects, disease, weather,
environment, human, etc.; and understory species of shrubs, forbs and graminoids using
English or Latin names (codes change over time).
• Pertinent information or plot anomalies – Describe any information pertinent to the plot
including things that might not be represented in the data (e.g., ‘subplot 3 has a higher tree
tally because of a dense thicket of Sitka spruce lining a seasonal stream’, or ‘tree number 11
was called a western hemlock at the last inventory but it is a mountain hemlock’, or ‘Pacific
subalpine fir is present in the condition but did not show up in tree tally’).
2. On AK-Remeasurement plots, if the crew determines there is a physical change to the previously
mapped boundaries, describe why/how they have changed.
3. Ownership changes – If the owner has changed since the previous visit, note why (e.g., land
swap, a park bought the land, last occasion had the wrong owner, etc.).
4. Hazards – Describe any human or environmental hazard[s] found on the plot (e.g., ‘subplot two
has a bees nest near the microplot center’).
5. Inability to install any portion of the plot – These are typically human or environmental related and
require an explanation as to why it was not installed.
6. Any deviation from prescribed monumentation – If unable to use monumentation described in the
manual, explain why and what the crew did to work around the issue (e.g., ‘no squares, rounds,
or DBH nails in trees per landowner’s request’, or ‘microplot 2 center fell on a large, sloped rock
slab with no way to stabilize pin, instead used orange crayon to make a 2-inch circle with center
dot showing where pin should have been’).
7. Site tree information – Describe why site trees were not collected. “No suitable site trees
available” is not an acceptable reason. Explain why none are available (e.g., ‘crew ran out of
time’, ‘all western redcedar trees were rotten’, ‘stand age is too old/young’). Describe any hazards
preventing the collection of site information. Also explain why site index is not within the specified
ranges.
pg.
174
8. Forest type change (“FT change”) – If any portion of the plot changed from a nonforest condition
(including nonforest land, noncensus water, and Census water) to a forest condition and vice
versa (from a previous crews call), make a note of “FTchange”. Write a detailed explanation
whether the change was a procedural change or it was an actual change on the ground.
Nonforest Land
Describe the NONFOREST LAND USE class. Include a list of the species present on the condition
and any disturbances that may have occurred since a previous visit, especially important if the
condition was accessible forest land and is now nonforest. Note whether this condition has the
potential to become forested in the future. If the entire plot is nonforest state whether plot center is
occupied or viewed from a distance. If plot center was occupied and no pin was put in the ground,
explain why. If any portion of the plot changed from a forest condition to a nonforest condition
(including nonforest land, noncensus water, and Census water) and vice versa (from a previous
crew’s call), make a note of “FT change”. Write a detailed explanation including whether the change
was a procedural change or a physical change (on the ground).
Field Visited Marginally Stocked Land
Explain how the plot or condition did or did not meet the stocking requirement that defines accessible
forest land. If the crew completed a stocking check include which tables were used to determine
stocking and all the percent stocking numbers that were derived for each subplot, including the total.
Noncensus or Census Water
State that the plot/subplot center (or the entire plot) lands in either noncensus or census water and
provide a description of the body of water (e.g., lake, river, etc.). If plot center was occupied, but a pin
was not put in the ground, explain why. If any portion of the plot changed from a forest condition to a
nonforest condition (including nonforest land, noncensus water, and census water) and vice versa
(from a previous crews call), make a note of “FT change”. Write a detailed explanation including
whether the change was a procedural change or a physical change (on the ground).
Nonsampled – Access Denied and Hazardous
Describe why the condition is nonsampled. If the condition is access denied, state this here and write
the reason why, if given one by the landowner. If the condition is hazardous, explain why (e.g., ‘crew
attempted to reach subplot 3, but due to unstable slopes and cliffs it is not possible to occupy subplot
center’).
Special Studies
If the plot is being completed as part of a special study, identify the name of the study early in the
narrative.
SUBSECTION M.2.6 PLOT DIAGRAM
This item is located in the box directly under the plot narrative on the rightside. It contains a diagram of the
plot layout. It is used as a tool to help relocate plots. Roughly sketch in condition class changes as they
appear on the ground, landforms, hazards and any other pertinent information that could aid a future crew
in relocating the plot. Include all condition classes along with stand size and forest type for each forest
condition on the sketch map. This item must be filled out for every plot in which the crew occupies
plot center.
Section M.2: Plot Card
SUBSECTION M.2.7 PLOT CHECK LIST
This box is located to the left of the plot diagram; it is included as a guide to ensure nothing was missed in
the field, during printing, or in post-field editing and processing. Verify that all items are reviewed and
checked off before the plot jacket is submitted for QA review. This item must be filled out for every plot.
175
pg.
SUBSECTION M.2.8 FIELD NOTES
This box is located on the backside of the plot card. Provide any additional details pertinent to future field
crews (e.g., waders are needed to cross the stream, there is another possible LZ located at a lower
elevation, etc.). Continue the plot narrative description in this space (if necessary). This item should be
filled out when there is good information to share and/or more space is needed.
SUBSECTION M.2.9 LOCATION
This box is located at the bottom on the backside of the plot card. Draw a sketch of the area traveled during
the day; include as many features as you can that will be helpful in navigation. Use photos and visible
features in your sketch without making it confusing (e.g., ponds, slopes, cliff faces, openings). Include LZ/
TR, RP and PC in your sketch map. This item must be filled out for every plot on which the crew
occupies plot center.
SECTION M.3 PHOTOS
SUBSECTION M.3.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
When using supplied ortho photos, the azimuth for a baseline on the photo is printed at the top of the photo;
it can also be found on the plot jacket. For plots visited in 1996 and later, the baseline azimuth is magnetic,
with declination based on current World Aeronautical Charts (CD-12 & CE-15). Plot numbers are always
printed so that the top of the ortho photo is “North”. If a baseline arrow/grid is not present, the edges of the
image can be used to indicate the given baseline azimuth.
SUBSECTION M.3.2 PHOTO WORK FORMATTING
There are typically several different types of photos included in the plot jacket (black and white, or color
ortho; pocket color infra-red [CIR]; or satellite color ortho). Determine which photo is best to receive the
reference point (RP)/plot center (PC) pinpricks; the best photo should include all necessary information for
future crews to navigate successfully to the RP and PC. Occasionally, in the case of plot remeasurement,
the newest photo will not be the best to use; in this situation, it is acceptable to reuse older photos.
If using a new photo for a remeasurement plot, transfer the previous RP/PC pinpricks from the old photo;
the pinprick must be transferred without error. Transfer the RP data to the new photo using the format
shown in bullet 1 below (converted to English units).
Label the landing zone/vehicle-skiff parking with “LZ” or “TR” on the front of the photo; show any photo work
calculations used to determine the locations of RP or PC on the back of the photo.
The data written on the reverse of the photo should be in the following format:
1. On a photo that has never been marked up (new plot / AK-Remeasurement plot)
Both the RP & PC will be pinpricked and visible on the reverse. Each of these pinpricks should be
circled and identified as either an RP or PC. If they are too close to each other to pinprick effectively,
note this below the RP information. Write RP Information using the following format:
Follow the same format as shown above, and include the following for special circumstances:
If using the same RP as previous visit, write the year of the last visit above the previous (metric) RP
data. Write the new RP data (same format as shown above) in English units with the current visit
year written above it. Finally, a brief note as to why the old photo was used instead of the new one.
Appendix M: Plot Jacket
RP Species = XXX
Diameter = XXX (to the nearest inch)
Azimuth = XXX
Horizontal Distance = XXX (to the nearest foot)
To Subplot = X (1, 2, 3, or 4)
Notes:
• Below the RP data, explain any special circumstances relevant future access, such as: distance/
azimuth determined by chaining or GPS; a “new RP was established” (remeasure only); features
around the RP helpful in relocating it.
2. On a photo that has been marked up previously (AK-Remeasurement plots)
pg.
176
If using a new RP, make sure it is pinpricked and circled/identified. Above the RP data (use the same
format as above) write the current year and “New RP”. Above the old (metric) data, write the year of
the last visit and “Old RP”.
SECTION M.4 LANDOWNER PERMISSION LETTER
Section M.4: Landowner Permission Letter
Plots requiring permission will likely have some form of documentation in the plot jacket (e.g., the name and
contact number of the person who granted permission). Review any documentation prior to visiting the
plot to identify any special requests (calling before visit, photographs taken, minimal monumentation, etc.).
Keep all documentation in the plot jacket when accessing the plot; it contains important information about
landowner contacts and permissions.
177
pg.
APPENDIX N PLOT FORMS
SECTION N.1 PLOT LEVEL DATA FORM
Plot Number:
Sample Method Code
QA Status
Crew Type
Crew Number 1
Crew Number 2
Crew Number 3
Crew Number 4
Crew Number 5
Transportation to Plot
Current Date - Year
Current Date - Month
Current Date - Day
Travel Time to Plot
Measurement Time on Plot
Travel Time from Plot
Plot Status
Plot Nonsampled Reason
Subplots Examined
Sample Kind
PNW Plot Kind
PNW Previous (Replaced) Plot Number
Landowner Plot Summary Request
Topographic Position
Horizontal Distance to Improved Road
Water On Plot
Plot Notes:
RP Type
RP Species
RP Diameter
RP Azimuth
RP Horizontal Distance
RP Azimuth / Distance to Subplot Number
RP Notes:
.
.
.
......
......
......
......
......
.
....
..
..
...
...
...
.
..
.
.
.
.....
.
.
.
.
.
...
...
...
....
.
.
......
.....
.
..
..
.......
...
.......
......
...
...
...............
...
...
Appendix N: Plot Forms
GPS Unit Type
GPS Serial Number
GPS Datum
Coordinate System
GPS Location Type
Latitude Degrees
Latitude Decimal Minutes
Longitude Degrees
Longitude Decimal Minutes
GPS Elevation
GPS Error
Number of Readings
GPS FileName
Azimuth to Plot Center
Distance to Plot Center
GPS Notes:
Date:
pg.
178
SECTION N.2 CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES FORM
Section N.1: Condition Class Attributes Form
Plot Number:
Condition Class Number
Condition Class Status
Previous Condition Class Status
Reserved Status
Owner Group
Previous Owner Group
Forest Type
Stand Size Class
Regeneration Status
Tree Density
Owner Class
Administrative Forest Code
Private Owner Industrial Status
Artificial Regeneration Species
Age Basis Code
Stand Age
Physiographic Class
Disturbance 1
Disturbance Year 1
Disturbance 2
Disturbance Year 2
Disturbance 3
Disturbance Year 3
Historical Disturbance 1
Historical Disturbance Year 1
Historical Disturbance 2
Historical Disturbance Year 2
Historical Disturbance 3
Historical Disturbance Year 3
Treatment 1
Treatment Year 1
Treatment 2
Treatment Year 2
Treatment 3
Treatment Year 3
Historical Treatment: 1
Historical Treatment Year 1
Historical Treatment 2
Historical Treatment Year 2
Historical Treatment 3
Historical Treatment Year 3
Present Nonforest Land Use
Condition Nonsampled Reason
Estimated Nonsampled Land Cover Type
Nonsampled Forest Type
Condition Class Notes:
Date:
1
.
.
.
..
..
...
.
.
.
..
....
.
....
..
...
..
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
.
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
..
.
...
2
.
.
.
..
..
...
.
.
.
..
....
.
....
..
...
..
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
.
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
..
.
...
3
.
.
.
..
..
...
.
.
.
..
....
.
....
..
...
..
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
.
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
..
.
...
4
.
.
.
..
..
...
.
.
.
..
....
.
....
..
...
..
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
.
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
..
.
...
5
.
.
.
..
..
...
.
.
.
..
....
.
....
..
...
..
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
.
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
....
..
..
.
...
179
pg.
SECTION N.3 SUBPLOT INFORMATION FORM
Plot Number:
Subplot Number
Subplot Status
Subplot Nonsampled Reason
Previous Subplot Center Condition
Subplot Center Condition
Subplot Center CC Status Change
Subplot Condition List
Microplot Center Condition
Subplot Slope
Subplot Aspect
Snow / Water Depth
Subplot Notes:
Date:
1
.
..
.
.
.
....
.
...
...
..
2
.
..
.
.
.
....
.
...
...
..
3
.
..
.
.
.
....
.
...
...
..
4
.
..
.
.
.
....
.
...
...
..
Appendix N: Plot Forms
pg.
180
SECTION N.4 BOUNDARY DATA FORM
Subplot Number
Plot Type
Periodic to Annual Boundary Change
Contrasting Condition
Left Azimuth
Corner Azimuth
Corner Distance
Right Azimuth
Boundary 1 Notes:
Plot Type
Periodic to Annual Boundary Change
Contrasting Condition
Left Azimuth
Corner Azimuth
Corner Distance
Right Azimuth
Boundary 2 Notes:
Plot Type
Periodic to Annual Boundary Change
Contrasting Condition
Left Azimuth
Corner Azimuth
Corner Distance
Right Azimuth
Boundary 3 Notes:
Section N.1: Boundary Data Form
Plot Type
Periodic to Annual Boundary Change
Contrasting Condition
Left Azimuth
Corner Azimuth
Corner Distance
Right Azimuth
Boundary 4 Notes:
Plot Type
Periodic to Annual Boundary Change
Contrasting Condition
Left Azimuth
Corner Azimuth
Corner Distance
Right Azimuth
Boundary 5 Notes:
Boundary #1
1
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
2
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
3
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
4
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
Boundary #2
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
Boundary #3
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
Boundary #4
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
Boundary #5
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
...
...
...
...
SECTION N.5 TREE TRACKING FORM
Plot Number:
Date
Subplot Number
Tree Record Number
Condition Class #
Present Tree Status
Subplot Tally Tree Witness
Standing Dead
Reconcile
Species
Azimuth
Horizontal Distance
Slope Distance to Witness
Previous Diameter at Breast Height
Diameter at Breast Height
Snag Estimated Diameter
Diameter Check
10-Year Increment
Previous Actual Length
Actual Length
Previous Total Length
Total Length
Length Method
Compacted Crown Ratio
Crown Class
Rotten/Missing Cull
Tree Class
Cause of Death
Mortality Year
Decay Class
Snag Reason for Disappearance
Culturally Killed
Tree Notes:
Page
of
181
pg.
Appendix N: Plot Forms
pg.
182
SECTION N.6 SEEDLING DATA FORM
Plot Number
Seedling Count
Subplot
CC #
2
...
.
.
Subplot
4
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
Species
CC #
...
.
Subplot
1
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
.
...
.
...
...
.
...
Seedling Notes:
Section N.1: Seedling Data Form
Date
CC #
.
Subplot
3
...
CC #
183
pg.
SECTION N.7 SITE/AGE TREE INFORMATION FORM
Plot Number:
Date
Site Tree Number
Subplot #
Site Tree Status
Questionable Site Tree
Flag
Site/Age Tree Type
CC List
Tree Record Number
Azimuth
HorizontalDistance
Species
Diameter
Site Tree Length
Tree Age at Diameter
Age Determination
Method
Number of Rings
Number of Rings in
Inner 2 Inches
Length of Measured
Core
Site Tree Notes:
Page
of
Appendix N: Plot Forms
184
pg.
Section N.8: Vegetation Profile Form
SECTION N.8 VEGETATION PROFILE FORM
Subplot:
Percent Tree Seedling Cover
Percent Shrub Cover
Percent Forb Cover
Percent Graminoid Cover
1
Subplot:
TREE
Species
3
4
Plot Number ________________ Date ____/____/____
NOTES:
2
3
4
% FORB
%
Height
%
Height
Height
Growth Height %
Cover Species
Cover
Cover
Cover
Habit
Subplot:
1
2
3
4
Growth Height % Height % Height % Height %
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
Habit
4
3
2
1
Subplot:
4
3
2
1
% GRAMINOID Growth Height % Height % Height % Height %
Height
%
Height
%
Height
Growth Height %
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
Habit
Cover Species
Cover
Cover
Cover
Habit
Subplot:
SHRUB
Species
2
1
SECTION N.9 INVASIVE PLANT SPECIES DATA FORM
Invasive Specimen Not Collected Reason
Specimen label #
Invasive Specimen Collected
Species Canopy Cover
Species
Date:
Unique Species #
Subplot #
Plot Number:
Vegetation Community Description for Label Invasive Plant Notes
185
pg.
Appendix N: Plot Forms
pg.
186
SECTION N.10 UNKNOWN SPECIMEN LABEL
Section N.1: Unknown Specimen Label
Label Number: .....
P3Hexagon: ..........
P3Quad: .
Unknown Code:
Veg Spec. crew:
State:
Community:
Notes:
SPECIES CODE: ...........
Plot: .
Date: ..........
Unique Species Nbr: ..
County:
Subplot: .
187
pg.
SECTION N.11 PLOT CARD
Alaska Coastal Annual Inventory
PLOT NUMBER:
START DATE:____/____/_________
END DATE: ____/____/_________
CREW LEADER (Name & Number): ________________________ CREW (Name[s] & Number[s]): ____________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
RP DATA
PLOT ACCESS DESCRIPTION:
Species
Diameter
in.
Azimuth
Distance
(horizontal)
ft.
To subplot
PLOT TRAVEL TIME
Travel time to plot
:
Measurement time
:
Travel time from plot
:
PLOT NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION:
PLOT CHECK LIST:
___RP/ Witness Monumentation
___GPS Coordinates (LZ, RP, PC)
P3 Check List:
PLOT DIAGRAM:
N
___Vegetation
2
___ Lichens
___Plot Level Data
___Condition Class
___ DWM
___Subplot Information
___ Crowns
___Boundary References (mapping)
___ Soils
1
___Site Trees
___Vegetation Profile
___Invasive Species
___Photo work (pinprick, data on back)
QA Reviewer:
Date:
4
3
Appendix N: Plot Forms
___Tree Data (tree and sapling, seedling)
pg.
188
Plot Number:___________________
Field Notes :__________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
LOCATION:
Section N.1: Plot Card
(Must include LZ, RP, and PC)
189
pg.
APPENDIX O RADIO INFORMATION
Radio communication for the 2010 season includes a network of repeaters extending from Ketchikan to the
Kenai Peninsula; it is very important that crew leaders keep up to date with the frequencies (by group) that
are available in the immediate vicinity of the boat. Daily briefings discussing radio (repeater) coverage
information will occur; it is important that all personnel be trained in radio usage and that everyone keep
track of current radio coverage.
Note: If radio communication is not possible, a cell phone or satellite phone is a good alternative.
SECTION O.1 REPEATER INFORMATION
Frequency lists and repeater location maps and for all radio channel groups programmed into field radios
are included in the following subsections.
SUBSECTION O.1.1 REPEATER CHANNEL GROUPS AND FREQUENCIES
Frequency lists for all radio channel groups programmed into field radios are included in the following lists.
To change groups in the radio: press #, then 01 (for group 01; insert group number that is to become
active, 02, 03, 04…etc), then ENT. Verify the group by looking at the LCD screen (under the plastic cover).
Note: Occasionally, there will be more than one CREWNET listed in any given channel group. This keeps
channel assignments consistent local Forest Service radios programs (in case joint emergency cooperation
becomes necessary). For FIA purposes, the CREWNET located in the channel 14 slot will be used for
helicopter operations (line of sight), and as conditions permit, for calls to the boat.
CHANNEL GROUP 1:
SITKA/HOONAH AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME:
SIT/HNH
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH1
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH2
168.675
0.0
171.475
100.0
PORT RPT
NB
CH3
168.725
0.0
168.725
141.3
N KRUZOF
NB
CH4
168.675
0.0
168.675
141.3
MUD BAY
NB
CH5
168.725
0.0
171.575
123.0
NEKA
NB
CH6
168.725
0.0
171.575
114.8
SEAL
NB
CH7
168.725
0.0
171.575
136.5
STEELHD
NB
CH8
168.675
0.0
171.475
136.5
BIORKA
NB
CH9
168.675
0.0
171.475
123.0
MOORE MT
NB
CH10
168.675
0.0
171.475
114.8
FURUHELM
NB
CH11
170.125
0.0
170.125
123.0
CREWNET
NB
CH12
168.725
0.0
171.575
100.0
ROBERT B
NB
CH13
162.550
0.0
0.000
0.0
WEATHER
WB
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
Appendix O: Radio Information
Channel
pg.
190
CHANNEL GROUP 2:
JUNEAU AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME:
JUNEAU
Channel
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH1
162.550
0.0
0.000
0.0
WEATHER
WB
CH2
169.100
0.0
170.150
114.8
WINDFALL
NB
CH3***
170.150
0.0
169.100
88.5
AUKE MT
NB***
CH4
169.100
0.0
170.150
100.0
PORT RPT
NB
CH5
169.100
0.0
170.150
123.0
WILHENRY
NB
CH6
168.725
0.0
171.575
114.8
SEAL
NB
CH7
169.100
0.0
170.150
77.0
TAKU
NB
CH8
169.100
0.0
170.150
71.9
BEEZER
NB
CH9
168.675
0.0
171.475
123.0
MOORE MT
NB
CH10
168.675
0.0
171.475
114.8
FURUHELM
NB
CH11
170.125
0.0
170.125
123.0
CREWNET
NB
CH12
168.725
0.0
171.575
100.0
ROBERT B
NB
CH13
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
Section O.1: Repeater Information
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
CHANNEL GROUP 3:
YAKUTAT AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME:
YAKUTAT
Channel
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH1
163.100
0.0
163.100
123.0
GND AIR
NB
CH2
169.100
0.0
169.100
123.0
YRD LCL
NB
CH3
169.100
0.0
170.150
103.5
AKWE
NB
CH4
169.100
0.0
170.150
82.5
MT LAKE
NB
CH5
166.750
0.0
168.575
100.0
DRY BAY
NB
CH6
166.300
0.0
168.225
100.0
TERRACE
NB
CH7
166.900
0.0
164.750
100.0
ICY BAY
NB
CH8
155.160
0.0
155.160
0.0
YAK EMS
WB
CH9
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH10
155.400
0.0
150.775
100.0
YAK 911
WB
CH11
170.125
0.0
170.125
123.0
CREWNET
NB
CH12
169.100
0.0
170.150
136.5
PORT RPT
NB
CH13
162.400
0.0
0.000
0.0
WEATHER
WB
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
191
pg.
CHANNEL GROUP 4:
STIKINE AREA PETERSBURG
GROUP DISPLAY NAME:
STIKINE
PETERSB
Channel
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH1
169.175
0.0
169.175
123.0
LNDNBRG
NB
CH2
169.875
0.0
169.875
0.0
CREWNET
NB
CH3
169.175
0.0
169.900
103.5
ETOLIN
NB
CH4
169.175
0.0
169.900
110.9
KUIU
NB
CH5
169.175
0.0
169.900
131.8
FOOLS
NB
CH6
169.175
0.0
169.900
136.5
FARRAGUT
NB
CH7
169.175
0.0
169.900
146.2
ELBOW
NB
CH8
169.175
0.0
169.900
156.7
TYEE
NB
CH9
169.125
0.0
168.175
136.5
RED BAY
NB
CH10
169.150
0.0
168.150
114.8
BURNETT
NB
CH11
168.675
0.0
171.475
114.8
FURUHELM
NB
CH12
162.400
0.0
0.000
0.0
WEATHER
WB
CH13
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
CHANNEL GROUP 5:
KETCHIKAN POW AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME:
KET POW
Channel
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH1
169.125
0.0
169.125
100.0
POW LCL
NB
CH2
169.125
0.0
168.175
114.8
12 MILE
NB
CH3
169.125
0.0
168.175
123.0
TWIN PKS
NB
CH4
169.125
0.0
168.175
136.5
RED BAY
NB
CH5
169.125
0.0
168.175
151.4
POLK
NB
CH6
169.125
0.0
168.175
167.9
BOKAN
NB
CH7
169.125
0.0
168.175
186.2
PORT-1
NB
CH8
169.125
0.0
168.175
203.5
PORT-2
NB
CH9
169.150
0.0
169.150
100.0
REV LCL
NB
169.150
0.0
168.150
114.8
BURNETT
NB
CH11
162.550
0.0
0.000
0.0
WX-1
WB
CH12
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH13
157.100
0.0
157.100
0.0
MARINE22
WB
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
Appendix O: Radio Information
CH10
pg.
192
CHANNEL GROUP 6:
KETCHIKAN REVILLA AREA
GROUP NAME:
KET/REV
Channel
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH1
169.150
0.0
169.150
100.0
REV LCL
NB
CH2
169.150
0.0
168.150
114.8
BURNETT
NB
CH3
169.150
0.0
168.150
123.0
ORCHARD
NB
CH4
169.150
0.0
168.150
136.5
BOCA
NB
CH5
169.150
0.0
168.150
151.4
PUNCHBWL
NB
CH6
169.150
0.0
168.150
167.9
HIGH MTN
NB
CH7
169.150
0.0
168.150
186.2
BLACK MTN
NB
CH8
169.150
0.0
168.150
203.5
PORT
NB
CH9
169.125
0.0
169.125
100.0
POW LCL
NB
CH10
169.125
0.0
168.175
123.0
TWIN PKS
NB
CH11
162.550
0.0
0.000
0.0
WX-1
WB
CH12
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH13
157.100
0.0
157.100
0.0
MARINE22
WB
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
NAME
NB*/WB**
Section O.1: Repeater Information
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
CHANNEL GROUP 7:
CHUGACH AREA
GROUP NAME:
CHUGACH
Channel
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
CH1
169.175
0.0
169.175
0.0
CH 1
NB
CH2
169.175
0.0
169.975
110.9
CH 2
NB
CH3
169.175
0.0
169.975
123.0
CH 3
NB
CH4
169.175
0.0
169.975
131.8
CH 4
NB
CH5
169.175
0.0
169.975
136.5
CH 5
NB
CH6
169.175
0.0
169.975
146.2
CH 6
NB
CH7
169.175
0.0
169.975
156.7
CH 7
NB
CH8
169.175
0.0
169.975
167.9
CH 8
NB
CH9
169.125
0.0
169.125
0.0
CREW NET
NB
CH10
162.550
0.0
0.000
0.0
WEATHER
WB
CH11
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH12
157.100
0.0
157.100
0.0
MARINE22
WB
CH13
CH14
EMPTY
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
Note: Chugach dispatch uses channel number (as opposed to using repeater locations [Tongass]) when
identifying which repeater is being used. Use the Chugach repeater map (Subsection O.1.3) as a guide for
which repeater(s) are best to use for your location.
193
pg.
CHANNEL GROUP 8:
GROUP DISPLAY NAME:
MARINE CHANNELS
MARINE
Channel
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH 1
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE16
WB
CH 2
157.100
0.0
157.100
0.0
MARINE22
WB
CH 3
156.050
0.0
156.050
0.0
MARINE01
WB
CH 4
156.300
0.0
156.300
0.0
MARINE06
WB
CH 5
156.350
0.0
156.350
0.0
MARINE07
WB
CH 6
156.450
0.0
156.450
0.0
MARINE09
WB
CH 7
156.500
0.0
156.500
0.0
MARINE10
WB
CH 8
156.600
0.0
156.600
0.0
MARINE12
WB
CH 9
156.650
0.0
156.650
0.0
MARINE13
WB
CH10
156.375
0.0
156.375
0.0
MARINE67
WB
CH11
156.425
0.0
156.425
0.0
MARINE68
WB
CH12
156.475
0.0
156.475
0.0
MARINE69
WB
CH13
156.575
0.0
156.575
0.0
MARINE71
WB
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
CHANNEL GROUP 9:
CORDOVA AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME:
CORDOVA
Receive
RXCG
Transmit
TXCG
NAME
NB*/WB**
CH 1
171.500
0.0
164.000
103.5
HENRY RIDGE
NB
CH 2
171.500
0.0
164.000
110.9
GOAT MOUNTAIN
NB
CH 3
171.500
0.0
164.000
123.0
KAYAK ISLAND
NB
CH 4
171.500
0.0
164.000
131.8
HICHINBROOK
NB
CH 5
171.500
0.0
164.000
136.5
MONTIQUE
NB
CH 6
171.500
0.0
164.000
146.2
ESTHER
NB
CH 7
171.500
0.0
164.000
156.7
CH 7
NB
CH 8
171.500
0.0
164.000
167.9
CH 8
NB
CH 9
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
NB
CH10
162.400
0.0
NONE
0.0
WEATHER
WB
CH11
156.800
0.0
156.800
0.0
MARINE 16
WB
CH12
157.100
0.0
157.100
0.0
MARINE 22
WB
CH13
NONE
0.0
NONE
0.0
EMPTY
CH14
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
CREWNET
*Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
**Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
NB
Appendix O: Radio Information
Channel
pg.
194
Section O.1: Repeater Information
SUBSECTION O.1.2 TONGASS NATIONAL FOREST REPEATER LOCATION MAP
pg.
195
SUBSECTION O.1.3 CHUGACH NATIONAL FOREST REPEATER LOCATION MAP
Appendix O: Radio Information
Note: Repeater site locations shown in this map are correct, but the associated channel numbers for each repeater may not be;
refer to the tables in Subsection O.1.1 for the correct channels.
pg.
196
SUBSECTION O.1.4 BLANK INFORMATION FORMS
Use the blank tables below for any special frequencies or other specific user information you want to track.
Radio Information
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
RX Freq
TX Freq
TX CG
Phone Information
Section O.1: Repeater Information
Phone Type
Phone Number
Person
Repeater Name
197
pg.
APPENDIX P IMPORTANT PHONE NUMBERS
SECTION P.1 PNW-FIA: ANCHORAGE FORESTRY SCIENCES LAB (AFSL)
Name
AMT
Office
AFSL Front Desk: Ed Mobley
Extra info
907-743-9425
Team Leader: Ray Koleser
907-743-9416
Coastal Coordinator (CC): Brendt Mueller
907-743-9408
907-743-9417
907-743-9414
907-743-9423
907-743-9428
907-743-9415
907-743-9429
907-743-9423
907-743-9402
907-743-9426
907-743-9418
907-743-9412
907-743-9420
907-743-9403
907-399-1770 8816-5142-3165
8816-5147-6697
907-348-0950 907-748-2091 8816-3144-2510
(home)
907-441-4393 907-748-1838 8816-4141-5555
(personal cell)
907-748-2099
907-748-2087
907-748-2090 8816-3144-2500
907-748-2095 8816-3144-2508
907-748-1839 8816-4141-5556
907-748-2089 8816-3145-7456
907-748-2092
907-529-6311 8816-3145-7458
907-748-2096 8816-3144-2509
907-748-2094 8816-4141-5557
907-748-2098 8816-3145-7457
907-748-2085
907-748-2097
8816-3145-7455
8816-3145-6171
907-743-9411 907-244-3354 907-748-2086
(personal cell)
907-743-9422
907-748-2093
907-743-9401
907-743-9410
503-808-2045
907-743-9406
907-743-9419 860-287-1566
(personal)
907-743-9407
907-743-9424
877-372-7248
866-569-5334
907-235-7771
907-299-0173
907-227-7602
907-250-2510
866-945-1354 http://fsweb.chd.fs.fed.us
Appendix P: Important Phone Numbers
Assistant Coastal Coordinator: Steve Trimble
Hawaii Coordinator: Robert Pattison
QA Lead: Matthew Diskin
QA: Misha Yatskov
QA: Daniel Irvine
QA: Seth Ayotte
QA: Deborah (Kay) Izlar
Crew Leader: Marc Much
Crew Leader: Justin Holgerson
Crew Leader: Emily Bernhardt
Crew Leader: Chad Oukrop
Crew Leader: Rosalie Grant
Crew Member: Eric Straley
AFSL Office Modem
AFSL Floater/Helicopter Tracking Phone
IM/IRAM
Computer Specialist: Jane Reid
(24-hour emergency contact)
Computer Specialist: Bill Fischer
GIS Specialist: Thomas Thompson
Contract IT Specialist: Kevin Dobelbower
Data Recorder Programer: Chuck Veneklase
Research
Biometrician: Tara Barrett
Remote Sensing & GIS: Ken Winterberger
(24-hour emergency alternate contact)
Remote Sensing: Hans Andersen
Vegetation Indicator Advisor: Beth Schulz
Travel Contacts
GovTrip
Business Hours
After Hours (for emergency changes within 24 hours)
Maritime Helicopters
Maritime Office
Howard Reed
Bob Fell (Chief of Operations)
John Jacobs (Chief Pilot)
Customer Helpdesk - computer assistance (24-hour)
Satellite
907-715-2732
(personal)
Data Collection
Boat: Maritime Maid
Mobile
pg.
198
SECTION P.2 NATIONAL FOREST CONTACTS
Name
Tongass National Forest
Ketchikan Dispatch
Petersburg Dispatch – Trina Ives/Vivian Hjort
Sitka/Yakutat Dispatch – Sarah Rose/Michelle Gossett
Section P.2: National Forest Contacts
John Krosse (FAO)
Chugach National Forest
Forest Dispatch Office (Campbell Tract)
Cordova – Sue Farzan
Use only for crew check in calls to FDO (I-Phone)
Jeff Schlee (FAO)
After hours – 24 hour duty (Dispatch - Jeff Schlee)
Regional Office
Regional Aviation Officer – Boyce Bingham
Helicopter Operations Specialist – David Glose
Reg Aviation Maintenance Inspector – Mike Abrams
Office
Extra info
Mobile
Satellite
907-228-6211
907-772-5899
907-747-5611 907-747-4306
(secondary #)
907-228-6345
907-617-3190
907-267-1277
907-424-4739
907-743-9433
907-743-9441
907-586-8740
541-504-7274
907-586-8770
8816-3144-3574
907-242-8677
907-351-1216
907-723-7270
541-408-7276
907-723-1909
199
pg.
APPENDIX Q GLOSSARY
Note: Data items listed as glossary terms are shown in all capital letters (e.g., ACTUAL LENGTH).
Accessible - Can be safely reached and occupied (access denied, Census water, and noncensus water
are never accessible).
ACTUAL LENGTH - The ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree is measured from ground level (measured from the
uphill side of a tree on a slope) to the highest remaining portion of the tree still present and attached to the
bole. For trees with missing tops (top on live trees is completely detached; top on dead trees is greater than
50 percent detached from the tree), measure the ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree from ground level to the
break. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.
Agricultural land - Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use. Evidence includes
geometric field and road patterns, fencing, and the traces produced by livestock or mechanized equipment.
The area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and meet the minimum width requirement of 120.0 feet to qualify.
AK-Remeasurement - A periodic revisited plot in Alaska (periodic-to-annual; installed using the foursubplot national plot design) on which annual-to-annual remeasurement data items are collected for
regional analyses.
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES - Indicates the predominant species that is planted or seeded in
an artificially regenerated condition.
Aspect - Compass direction that a slope faces.
Basal area - The area of a given section of land that is occupied by the cross-section of a tree trunk, or a
stem, at its base.
Baseline - a line on an aerial photo used as a datum for further work. When the azimuth and length of the
line are known (provided, or determined by taking ground measurements), the orientation and scale of the
photo can be determined.
Blind check - A re-installation of a production plot done by a qualified crew without production crew data on
hand. A full re-installation of the plot is recommended for the purpose of obtaining a measure of uncertainty
in the data. All plot-level information (e.g., boundary and condition information) will be collected on each
blind check plot. The two data sets are maintained separately. Discrepancies between the two sets of data
are not reconciled. Blind checks are done on production plots only.
Board foot - A volume measure of lumber 1-foot wide,1-foot long, and 1 inch thick equal to 144 cubic
inches.
Bole - The main stem of a tree, extending from one foot above the ground to the point on the tree where
diameter outside bark (DOB) reaches 4 inches.
Botched plot - A plot that should not be included in the standard inventory data base due to data collection
errors or other problems.
Boundary - The intersection of two or more conditions on a subplot or microplot. Each boundary is
described by recording the azimuth and horizontal distance from the subplot or microplot center to the left
and right points of where the boundary intersects the perimeter of the subplot or microplot. An azimuth and
distance to a corner point may also be described, if one exists. If multiple boundaries exist at a subplot, they
are recorded in the order of their occurrence on the subplot, starting from north and proceeding around the
compass.
Census water - Rivers, streams, and canals etc. that are more than 200 feet wide and ocean, lakes,
reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water that are greater than 4.5 acres in size.
Certification plot - A plot installed by a certification candidate. It may be a training plot or a production plot.
The candidate working alone installs the plot.
Compaction (soil) - Process by which soil grains are rearranged so as to come into closer contact with one
another, resulting in a decrease in void space and an increase in soil bulk density (Helms 1998).
Glossary
Cold check - An inspection of a production plot done either as part of the training process, periodic review
of field crew performance, or as part of the ongoing QA/QC program. Normally the installation crew is not
present at the time of inspection. The inspector has the completed data in-hand at the time of inspection.
The inspection can include the whole plot or a subset of the plot. Cold checks are done on production plots
only.
pg.
200
Condition class - The combination of discrete attributes that describe the area associated with a plot.
These attributes include condition status (land use), forest type, stand origin, stand size, owner group,
reserve status, and stand density, as well as other ancillary and computed attributes.
Corporate land - An ownership class of private lands owned by a company, corporation, legal partnership,
investment firm, bank, timberland investment management organization (TIMO), or real estate investment
trust (REIT).
Crook - Abrupt bend in a tree or log (Helms 1998).
Cropland - Land under cultivation within the past 24 months, including orchards and land in soil improving
crops, but excluding land cultivated in developing improved pasture.
CROWN CLASS - A classification of trees based on dominance in relation to adjacent trees within the
stand as indicated by crown development and the amount of sunlight received from above and sides.
Cull - Portions of a tree that are unusable for industrial wood products because of rot, form, or other defect.
Declination - The azimuth correction used to adjust magnetic north to true north with a compass,
measured in degrees.
Defoliation - Premature removal of foliage (Goheen and Willhite 2006).
Diameter at breast height (DBH) - The diameter of the bole of a tree at breast height (4.5 feet above the
ground on the uphill side of tree), measured outside of the bark.
Diameter outside bark (DOB) - A diameter that may be taken at various points on a tree, or log, outside of
the bark. Diameter outside bark is often estimated.
Disturbance - Any relatively discrete event in time that disrupts ecosystem, community, or population
structure and changes resources, substrate availability, or the physical environment (Helms 1998).
FDM - Field Data Manager (also known as Plot Edit Tools) is a Microsoft Access Application which runs on
a PC. It is used as a secondary edit of plot data which captures the crew’s explanations for errors and
warnings found in the data.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) - A unique code identifying U.S. States and counties (or
units in Alaska).
Forest industry land - Land owned by companies or individuals that operate a primary wood processing
plant.
Forest Service administered lands - Land owned or administered by the Forest Service; includes national
forests, national grasslands, wilderness, national scenic areas, etc.
FOREST TYPE - A classification of forest land based upon, and named for, the tree species that forms the
plurality of live-tree stocking.
Forked tree - A tree with a stem that is at least 1/3 the diameter of the main stem and branches out from
the main stem at an angle of 45 degrees or less. Forks originate at the point on the bole where the piths
intersect.
GPS - Global Positioning System. Information from this system is collected and used to determine the
latitude and longitude of each plot.
Graminoid - Grasses (family Gramineae or Poaceae) and grasslike plants such as sedges (family
Cyperaceae) and rushes (family Juncaceae).
Hardwoods - Tree species belonging to the botanical subdivision Angiospermae, class Dicotyledonous,
usually broad-leaved and deciduous.
Hazardous - An area that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example: cliffs, quarries,
strip mines, illegal substance plantations, high water, etc.
Glossary
Hex number - Previous terminology for “plot number”; hex number equals plot number.
Hot check - An inspection normally done as part of the training process. The inspector is present on the
plot with the trainee and provides immediate feedback regarding data quality. Data errors are corrected. Hot
checks can be done on training plots or production plots.
Idle farmland - Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended within the last two years and that has
less than 10 percent stocking with live trees.
201
pg.
Improved pasture - Land that is currently maintained and used for grazing. Evidence of maintenance,
besides the degree of grazing, includes condition of fencing, presence of stock ponds, periodic brush
removal, seeding, irrigation, or mowing.
Improved road - Paved roads, gravel roads, or improved dirt roads regularly maintained for longterm
continuing use by normal passenger vehicles. Generally constructed using machinery. The area where the
original topography has been disturbed by cutbanks and fill is considered part of the road, if that area is
maintained. Unimproved traces and roads created for skidding logs are not considered improved roads.
Inclusion - An area that would generally be recognized as a separate condition, except that it is not large
enough to qualify. For example, a ½ acre pond within a forested stand.
Industrial wood - All roundwood products, except firewood.
Inspector - A qualified QC/QA individual whose primary responsibility is the training, certification and
inspection of production crews.
Krummholz - The shrubby, multi-stemmed form assumed by trees near treeline.
Land area - As defined by the Bureau of the Census: The area of dry land and land temporarily or partially
covered by water such as marshes, swamps, and river flood plains (omitting tidal flats below mean tide);
streams, sloughs, estuaries and canals less than 200 feet in width, and ponds less than 4.5 acres in area.
Marsh - Low, wet areas characterized by heavy growth of and grasses and an absence of trees.
Measurable nonforest condition class - Nonforest condition classes on the Chugach National Forest.
Certain data items are recorded in measurable nonforest conditions that are not typically measured in
nonforest conditions; these are identified in the associated “when collected” field for individual data items.
Measurement quality objective (MQO) - Describes the acceptable tolerance for each data element.
MQOs consist of two parts: a statement of the tolerance and a percentage of time when the collected data
are required to be within tolerance.
Merchantable top - The point on the tree bole above which merchantable material cannot be produced.
Merchantable top is 4.0 inches.
Microplot - A circular, fixed-radius plot with a radius of 6.8 feet that is used to sample trees less than 5.0
inches at DBH/DRC, as well as other vegetation. Microplot center is 90 degrees and 12 feet offset from the
center of each subplot.
MIDAS - Mobile integrated data acquisition system; the portable data recorder program used by PNW-FIA.
Native American (Indian) land - Tribal lands held in fee, or trust, by the Federal government but
administered for Indian tribal groups and Indian trust allotments. This land is considered “Private Lands”,
Owner Group 40.
Noncensus water - Bodies of water from 1 to 4.5 acres and water courses from 30 feet to 200 feet in width.
New installation - The initial establishment of the “annual” four-subplot national plot design; includes plots
field-visited for the first time (i.e., no ground plot exists) and periodic revisited plots (periodic to annual [AKRemeasurement]; annual plot is being measured at the periodic plot location).
Nonforest land - Land that does not support, or has never supported, forests, and lands formerly forested
where use for timber management is precluded by development for other uses. Includes areas used for
crops, improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved roads of any width and adjoining rights-ofway, power line clearings of any width, Census and noncensus water. If intermingled in forest areas,
unimproved roads and nonforest strips must be more than 120.0 feet wide, and clearings, etc., more than
one acre in size, to qualify as nonforest land.
Nonstockable - Areas of forest land that are not capable of supporting trees because of the presence of
rock, water, etc.
Nonstocked - Timberland less than 10 percent stocked with live trees. Recent clearcuts scheduled for
planting are classified as nonstocked area.
Glossary
Other federal lands - Federal land other than Forest Service administered lands. These include lands
administered by the USDI Bureau of Land Management, USDI National Park Service, USDI Fish and
Wildlife Service, Department of Defense, Department of Energy, Army Corps of Engineers, and military
bases.
pg.
202
OWNER CLASS - A classification that divides land into fine categories of ownership.
OWNER GROUP - A classification that divides land into broad categories of ownership: Forest Service,
Other Federal Agency, State and Local Government, and Private. Differing categories of Owner Group on a
plot require different conditions.
Ownership - A legal entity having an ownership interest in land, regardless of the number of people
involved. An ownership may be an individual; a combination of persons; a legal entity such as corporation,
partnership, club, or trust; or a public agency. An ownership has control of a parcel or group of parcels of
land (USDA Forest Service 2006).
PDR - Portable data recorder.
Perennating - To survive from one growing season to the next, often with a period of reduced or arrested
growth between seasons.
Phase 1 (P1) - FIA activities done as part of remote-sensing and/or aerial photography.
Phase 2 (P2) - FIA activities done on the network of ground plots formerly known as FIA plots.
Phase 3 (P3) - FIA activities done on a subset of Phase 2 plots formerly known as Forest Health Monitoring
plots. Additional ecological indicator information is collected from Phase 3 plots.
Plot - A cluster of four subplots that samples approximately 1/6 acre. The subplots are established so that
subplot 1 is centered within the sample and the centers of subplots 2, 3,and 4 are located 120.0 feet from
the center of subplot 1 at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees, respectively. Each subplot has an
associated microplot and macroplot.
Plot card (formerly plot location record) - A paper form, included in each plot jacket, containing the
following information: plot number; start date; end date; crew leader name; crew member name(s);
reference point (RP) data; plot access information; plot travel time; plot narrative description (condition[s],
disturbance, treatments, hazards, pertinent notes/information); plot checklist; and plot diagram.
Plurality - An amount or group (as of stocking points) that is greater than any other amount or group within
a total but that is not necessarily a majority (more than half).
PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS - Indicates whether Private land owners own and operate a
wood processing plant.
Production crew - A crew containing at least one certified individual. The crew is involved in routine
installation and measurement of plots.
Production plot - A plot measured by a production crew. These plots may also be used for training
purposes.
Reference plot (off grid) - A plot that is used for crew certification. These plots are NOT included in the
ongoing inventory process and data from these plots do not become part of the standard inventory
database. To ensure that these plots do not enter into the inventory database, they are assigned plot
numbers outside the normal range of production plots or other invalid plot identification information such as
an invalid STATE code (STATECD).
REGENERATION STATUS - A stand descriptor that indicates whether a stand has been naturally or
artificially regenerated.
Reserved land - Land that is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.
RESERVED STATUS - An indication of whether the land in a condition has been reserved.
Sapling - A live tree 1.0 to 4.9 inches DBH.
Seedling - A live tree less than 1.0 inch DBH that are at least one foot tall for hardwoods and 0.5 feet tall for
conifers.
Glossary
Senescence - The life phase of an organism or a part of the organism that precedes natural death, usually
involving a decreased ability to repair damage and degradation. For plants, this is when the current
season's growth (foliage) begins to fade before dormancy, or death for annuals.
Site index - The average total height that dominant and co-dominant trees in fully stocked, even-aged
stands will obtain at key ages, as determined by an equation.
Slope - Measure of change in surface value over distance, expressed as a percentage (Helms 1998).
203
pg.
Softwoods - Coniferous trees, usually evergreen having needles or scale-like leaves.
Snag - A standing dead tree that must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole which has an
unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than 45 degrees from vertical as measured
from the base of the tree to the point of diameter measurement.
STAND AGE - A stand descriptor that indicates the average age of the live trees not overtopped in the
predominant stand size-class of a condition.
Standing dead tree - A dead tree that must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole which has an
unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than 45 degrees from vertical as measured
from the base of the tree to the point of diameter measurement.
STAND SIZE - A stand descriptor that indicates which size-class of trees constitutes the majority of
stocking in the stand.
State, county and municipal lands - Lands owned by states, counties, and local public agencies or
municipalities, or lands leased to these government units for 50 years or more.
Stocking - The relative degree of occupancy of land by trees, measured as basal area or the number of
trees in a stand by size or age and spacing, compared to the basal area or number of trees required to fully
utilize the growth potential of the land; that is, the stocking standard.
Subplot - A circular, fixed-area plot with a radius of 24.0 feet. Each subplot represents ¼ of the fixed plot
sample unit.
TOTAL LENGTH - The total length of the tree, recorded to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the tip
of the apical meristem. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has a
broken or missing top, the total length is estimated to what the length would be if there were no missing or
broken top. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.
Training (practice) plot - A plot established for training or certification purposes only. It is NOT a plot in the
ongoing inventory process and data from these plots do not become part of the standard inventory data
base. To ensure that these plots do not enter into the inventory data base, they are assigned plot numbers
outside the normal range of production plots or other invalid plot identification information such as an invalid
STATE code (STATECD).
Transition zone - An area where a distinct boundary between two or more different conditions cannot be
determined.
TREE DENSITY - A stand descriptor that indicates the relative tree density of a condition class. The
classification is based on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees
in the condition which are not overtopped, compared to any other condition class tree density recorded on
the plot.
Glossary
Glossary
pg.
204
205
pg.
APPENDIX R CHANGES FROM CORE PHASE 2 FIELD GUIDE VERSION 3.0 TO
VERSION 4.0
This appendix lists major Core protocol changes between Core Field Guide 3.0 to Core Field Guide 4.0. To
see all changes in PNW protocols and procedures, see the summary of manual changes (Appendix S).
Note: Section/Item numbers listed in this appendix are Core section/item numbers.
These change pages are intended to highlight significant changes to the Core field guide and do not contain
all of the details or minor changes.
Clarified: 1.7 SUBPLOTS EXAMINED. Clarified text by adding “By default, PLOT STATUS = 1 plots
have all 4 subplots examined.”
Modified: 1.9 FIELD GUIDE VERSION. Modified the Values from “3.0” to “4.0”.
Added:1.15 CREW NUMBER.
Modified: 1.16.16 GPS ERROR. Modified Values from “000 to 070 if possible” to “000 – 999”.
Modified: 1.16.18 GPS FILENAME (CORE OPTIONAL). Modified Field width from “8 characters.3
characters (e.g., R0171519.ssf)” to “15 characters”. Modified Values from “Letters and numbers’ to
“English words, phrases, and numbers”.
Modified: 1.18 PL0T-LEVEL NOTES. Modified the variable title to “PLOT NOTES”.
Clarified: 2.5.1 RESERVED STATUS. Under When collected, repeated the information listed in CORE in
CORE OPTIONAL also.
Clarified: 2.5.7 OWNER CLASS. Under When collected, repeated the information listed in CORE in
CORE OPTIONAL also.
Clarified: 2.5.8 PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS. Under When collected, repeated the
information listed in CORE in CORE OPTIONAL also.
Modified: 2.5.11 DISTURBANCE 1. Deleted code 55. Added codes 90 through 95.
Modified: 2.5.12 DISTURBANCE YEAR 1. Added the Values 9999 that is currently in the text.
Clarified: 2.5.23 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS. Clarified code 33 by deleting “…sites in the Lake States
with lowland swamp conifers or…”.
Added: 3.2 SUBPLOT STATUS. Added a code 4 defined as “QA crew did not measure trees, saplings,
or seedlings. QA crew did measure all other data items (condition, boundary, and subplot-level data).
For use only on check plots (QA STATUS = 2-6). Not a legal entry on production plots (QA STATUS = 1
or 7)”.
Modified: 3.5 MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION. Modified When collected from “All microplots where
subplot center is CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1, 2, 3” to “All microplots”.
Modified: 3.9 SUBPLOT/MACROPLOT CONDITION LIST (CORE OPTIONAL). Changed variable from
CORE OPTIONAL to CORE. Also changed When collected from “All forested Phase 3 plots” to “All
plots”.
Added: 4.2.7 CORNER DISTANCE. Added leading zeros to other codes as appropriate and changed
Field width from “2” to “3”.
Clarified: 5.14 TOTAL LENGTH. Under When collected, repeated the information listed in Phase 2
CORE OPTIONAL in Phase 3 CORE OPTIONAL also.
Clarified: 5.15 ACTUAL LENGTH. Under When collected, repeated the information listed in Phase 2
CORE in Phase 2 CORE OPTIONAL and Phase 3 CORE.
Clarified: 5.16 LENGTH METHOD. Under When collected, repeated the information listed in Phase 2
CORE OPTIONAL in Phase 3 CORE OPTIONAL.
Modified: 7.2.1 CONDITION CLASS LIST. Changed Field width from 5 digits to 4 digits. Also changed
the Values from “1 to 9 or 10000 to 98765” to “1000 to 9876”.
Appendix R: Changes from Core Phase 2 Field Guide Version 3.0 to Version 4.0
Clarified: 2.5.2 OWNER GROUP. Under When collected, repeated the information listed in CORE in
CORE OPTIONAL also.
pg.
206
Added: Chapter. Site Tree Information. B. Western U.S. Site-Tree Selection Criteria. Added code 0042
Alaska yellow-cedar (Chamaecyparis nootkatensis) as a valid species, with PNWRS listed as the
region.
:
Clarified: Appendix: Glossary. Clarified the definitions of the following terms: blind check, cold check, hot
check, production plot, reference plot, and training plot. Also added a definition for the term ‘botched
plot’.
pg.
207
Notes:
Appendix R: Changes from Core Phase 2 Field Guide Version 3.0 to Version 4.0
pg.
208
:
Notes:
209
pg.
APPENDIX S SUMMARY OF MANUAL CHANGES
Core 4.0 Field Guide / 2009 AFSL Manual
(Core section/item numbers followed by regional section/item numbers in brackets)
Entire Manual
All Chapters
All Chapters
Modified chapter order, removed references to PDR, deleted MQOs,
added Core/Regional identifier in parenthesis, added NIMS code or
PNW database code in brackets, updated language to match Core,
integrated AFSL language, updated "National Forest land" to "Forest
Service administered lands", made minor modifications to text and
added clarification as necessary.
Removed "AK" from all data item titles. Updated manual text and
procedures to include "measurable nonforest" conditions on the
Chugach National Forest.
Chapter: Introduction
[I] Purposes of this Field Guide
[I] Organization of this Field Guide
The Inventory
[I] Research Topics
[I] General Description
[I] Units of Measure
[I] Data are collected on field plots at the
following levels
Plot Layout
QA/QC
Chapter: Safety
[II] Entire chapter
Deleted paragraph title, included text/bullets in introductory paragraph.
Updated section with organization of 2010 manual, renamed
"Organization of this Manual".
Added section.
Deleted paragraph title, combined text with Products section.
Renamed "Plot Design General Description" and relocated to follow
Units of Measure (matches core). Table showing distance/azimuth
between subplots moved to Plot Layout and Referencing.
Deleted text relating to magnetic azimuths, plot dimensions, and tree
limiting dimensions (moved to Plot Layout and Referencing); replaced
with "PNW-FIA uses English units as a measurement system". "Data are
collected on field plots at the following levels" moved to Plot Design
General Description section.
Added regional items/descriptions to list: "Vegetation" and "Invasive
Species".
Subsection added.
Added section. General description of QA/QC program.
Dropped; relocated to manual supplement (Note: Important Phone
Numbers are included in the manual as an appendix).
Chapter: Locating the Plot
General
[III] Photo Navigating in Alaska
[III] Photo-Work Formatting
[III] Plots With Active Logging
[III] Steps to Re-Locate the Plot
All metric units changed to English units, changed "plot location record"
to "plot card" to match PFSL, changed "plot folder" to "plot jacket" to
match PFSL.
Integrated reference to other types of imagery (digital, orthos, etc) in
addition to photos.
Section removed and incorporated with general photo navigating section
Navigating With Photography.
Dropped. Relocated to Plot Photos and Access Descriptions appendix.
Removed subsection, incorporated active logging instructions in
Circumstances Precluding Plot Establishment.
Steps for establishing photo scale reciprocals and baselines for ortho
photos and CIR photos relocated to subsection Locating Plots Using
Photos.
Moved instructions for obtaining PSR for CIR photos to Plot Photos and
Access Descriptions appendix.
[III.A] First time visit to the field sample
location: Establishing a photo scale
reciprocal (PSR): CIR Photos
[III.A] First time visit to the field sample
Incorporated instructions into Ground Distance in section Locating a
location: Reference point (RP) to plot center New Plot With an RP.
(PC) measurements
Appendix S: Summary of Manual Changes
General
pg.
210
[III.A] First time visit to the field sample
Removed section and relocated to section Locating an Established Plot;
location: Re-visit of the field sample location Reverse RP Method text relocated to subsection Reverse Reference
Point (RP) Method.
[III.B] Re-visit of field sample location: RP Removed and integrated text into subsection Navigating With Reference
Locator Key
Point (RP) Data and Difficulty Finding Established Plots.
Established Plot Issues
Section added. Provided search guidelines.
[III] Replacement Plot (Lost Plot)
Relocated to section Lost Plots [Plot Level Data] and section
Replacement Plots [Plot Level Data].
[III.A] Navigating with RP Data
Deleted instructions for accounting for differences between locations of
old and new RPs.
[III] Situations That Prevent Visiting a Plot Added instructions for census and noncensus water.
[III.B] Incorrectly Installed Subplot or
Deleted instructions to contact data manager about mislocated subplots
Microplot
and added instructions to document location of incorrectly installed
subplots in plot notes.
[III.B] PC Stake or Subplot/Microplot Pin
Added instructions for how to locate lost pin/stake, added instructions for
Missing or Moved
mislocated microplots.
[III.A] Locating Plots Using Photos
Deleted instructions for CIR photos.
Chapter: Plot Layout and Referencing
References to ortho and aerial photo changed to generic "photo".
Adopted PFSL terminology to use “Plot Diagram” in place of “Location
Sketch Map”.
Plot Design
Added section.
Plot Layout
Added subsection.
Plot Dimensions
Added subsection.
Plot Establishment
Added section.
Plot Establishment Guidelines
Added subsection.
Plot Establishment Tolerances
Added subsection.
[IV.1] The Reference Point
Added instructions for "noting any irregularities."
[IV.1] The Reference Point
Changed RP tagging instructions.
[IV.2] Monumenting Plot Center
Deleted section. Incorporated into new section "Monumenting and
Referencing Plot Center".
[IV.2] Monumenting Plot Center: "An
Deleted section. Incorporated into new subsection "Exceptions to
Exception"
Monumenting Plot Center".
[IV.2] Standard Monumenting (Exception
Deleted section. Incorporated into new section "Monumenting and
does not apply)
Referencing Subplots 2 through 4".
[IV.3] Witness Trees
Instructions to remove all old witness tags removed. Removed figure.
Added text about removing old witness tags if a witness tree is replaced.
[IV # 3] Witness Trees: Witnessing subplots Section replaced by section Monumenting and Referencing Subplots 2
(non-PC)
through 4; monumentation protocol for subplots 2, 3, & 4 updated.
Added text reiterating plot layout measurements (angles, distances).
Monumenting and Referencing Plot Center Added section. Including new rule: "All field plots are monumented at the
plot center, referenced with an RP and witnessed by two trees/objects".
Exceptions to Monumenting Plot Center
Added subsection.
[IV.2] Monumenting Plot Center
Moved "exception" text to new subsection Exceptions to Monumenting
Plot Center.
Monumenting and Referencing Subplots 2 Section added.
through 4
Locate and Monument Subplot Center
Added subsection.
Establishing Subplots When Plot Center is Added subsection.
Inaccessible
[IV.3] Witnessing Subplots (non-PC)
Dropped. Replaced by section Monumenting and Referencing Subplots
2 through 4.
Referencing and Monumenting Entirely
Added section.
Nonforest Plots
[IV.4] Other Plot Monumentation Notes:
Section incorporated into new subsection Locate and Monument the
Locating the microplot
Microplot.
:
General
General
211
pg.
[IV.4] Plot Location Record
[IV.4] GPS Coordinates
[IV.] Maintaining Plot Integrity
[IV.] Plot Layout and Referencing MQO
Removed procedural text. Moved to new appendix Plot Photos and
Access Descriptions.
Removed procedural text; incorporated into appropriate chapters.
Removed information from this chapter, incorporated into specific
chapters/data items where the rules are applicable.
Dropped "MQO" (tolerances) page. Tolerances for RP data items and
aerial photos: moved to appropriate chapters (Plot Level Data and
appendix); all others incorporated into text for specific items (plot,
subplots, microplots).
Chapter: Plot Level Data
1.0 [V] General
Lost Plot/Replacement Plot
Lost Plots
Replacement Plots
PLD Downloaded to PDR
1.2 County
1.3 [Item 2]Plot Number
1.3 [Item 2] Plot Number
1.14 QA Status
[Item 15] Crew Type
[[Item 16] Crew Leader
[Item 17] Crew Member
1.15 Crew Number
[Item 20]AK Transportation to Plot
[Item 12] AK Start Date
[Item 12] AK End Date
1.10.1 Year (of current inventory)
1.10.2 Month (of current inventory)
1.10.3 Day (of current inventory)
Time Spent on Plot
[Items 20 - 23] Time To/From/On Plot
Changed title. Plot start date is recorded.
Added.
Added.
Added.
Added.
Dropped; replaced by Year of Previous Inventory.
Added.
Added.
Added.
Section added.
Subsection added.
Dropped; replaced by Sample Method Code.
Added (replaces AK Data Source); includes new descriptions (CODE 2
updated from "fly-over" to "viewed from a distance").
Added.
Data item dropped from Core; added as regional data item for both labs.
Dropped; replaced by Crew Number.
Dropped; replaced by Crew Number.
Added to replace Crew Leader and Crew Member.
Renamed "Transportation to Plot". When collected changed to include
Sample Method Code = 1 or 2 (SMC replaced Data Source).
Dropped; replaced by Year, Month, Date data items.
Dropped; replaced by Year, Month, Date data items.
Added.
Added.
Added.
Added subsection.
Dropped "PNW" from name.
Appendix S: Summary of Manual Changes
Cycle
Subcycle
[Item 26] PNW Periodic Plot Number
Periodic Plot Number
[Item 24] P2/P3 Plot Type
1.9 [Item 28] Core Field Guide Version
Number
[Item 29] PDR Data Recorder Version #
PDR Ending Data Recorder Version
Number
1.11 Declination
Invasive Plant Sampling Status
Invasive Plant Specimen Collection Rule
[Item 27] AK Year of Previous Inventory
Year of Previous Inventory
Month of Previous Inventory
Fire Plot
Plot Level Data Collected in the Field
Crew Visit Information
[Item 5] AK Data Source
Sample Method Code
Added "measurable nonforest condition" criteria to all data items
measured on nonforest conditions on the Chugach National Forest.
Section added.
Subsection added.
Subsection added.
Section added.
Added.
Deleted "Do not change the downloaded printed code."
Deleted text about "if PNW Plot Kind =5, record 99999…" and "when
collected = all plots" with "When sample kind = 1 or sample kind = 2.
Added.
Added.
Dropped; replaced by new data item "Periodic Plot Number".
Added.
Dropped.
Relocated to beginning of chapter.
pg.
212
Plot Level Fundamentals
Stocking Plot Type
1.4 [Item 6] Plot Status
1.5 [Item 7] Plot Nonsampled Reason
1.6 [Item 6] Subplots Examined
[Item 10] AK Estimated Nonsampled Land
Cover Type
1.7 Sample Kind
[Item 4] PNW Plot Kind
Added subsection.
Added.
Modified data item text, added example for coding inaccessible
nonforest plots, modified all code descriptions.
Dropped 'AK' from data item name. Removed Ocean code 11.
Added regional clarification for use of codes. Added "all plots" to the
when collected field to match NIMS.
Dropped; this data item is collected at the condition level.
Added.
Rewrote regional text in code 5 description, and added code 3. Deleted
text about "remeasurement" from code descriptions. Added example for
code 6.
[Item 11] AK Previous Plot Number
Dropped; replaced by "PNW Previous (Replaced) Plot Number".
PNW Previous (Replaced) Plot Number
Added; replaces "AK Previous Plot Number".
Additional Items
Added Section.
[18] Landowner Plot Summary Request
Deleted instructions to write special comments on location record;
replaced with "electronic plot notes".
Topographic Position
Added.
1.18 [Item 25] Plot Level Notes
Renamed Plot Notes.
[V.X] RP Info
All when collected fields clarified; RPs are recorded for all ground visited
plots.
[Item 45] RP Type
Changed when collected field to "When Sample Method Code = 1".
[Item 46] RP Species
Removed species list from values in data table.
[Item 46] RP Species
Updated "field width" from 4 digits to 3 digits, to reflect regional species'
codes.
[Item 48] RP Azimuth
Changed when collected field to "When Sample Method Code = 1".
[Item 49] RP Distance
Modified "Values" from 0000 to 9999 feet, to "0000 to 5000 feet".
Changed when collected field to "When Sample Method Code = 1".
[Item 50] RP Az/Dist to Subplot #
Data item name updated. Changed when collected field to "When
Sample Method Code = 1".
[Item 51] RP Notes
Changed when collected field to "When Sample Method Code = 1: as
needed...".
1.16 [V] GPS Info
Added text to clarify when to collect.
GPS Coordinates Collected in the Field
Added.
1.16.3 [Item 31] AK GPS Type
Renamed to GPS Unit Type.
1.16.3 [Item 31] GPS Unit Type
Changed when collected field.
1.16.7.2 [Item 36] AK GPS Latitude Minutes Renamed Latitude Decimal Minutes, updated field width.
1.16.8.2 [Item 38] AK GPS Longitude
Renamed Longitude Decimal Minutes, updated field width.
Minutes
1.16.15 [Item 41] GPS Elevation
Changed to Core.
1.16.18 GPS Filename
Added.
Previous Latitude Degrees
Added.
Previous Latitude Decimal Minutes
Added.
Previous Longitude Degrees
Added.
Previous Longitude Decimal Minutes
Added.
Previous Coordinates Method
Added.
Chapter: Condition Class
2.0 [VI] General
2.0 [V.I] General
:
2.1.1 [VI.A] Determination of Condition
Class Step 1
Reorganized chapter, putting definitions and instructions in first half and
data items grouped differently in second half.
Added "measurable nonforest condition" criteria to all data items
measured on nonforest conditions on the Chugach National Forest.
Removed "accessible" and added "measurable nonforest" to the
population of interest statement. Removed entire last paragraph in Step
1.
213
pg.
2.2 [VI.B.1] Accessible Forest Land
2.2 [VI.B.2] Nonforest Land
2.2 [VI.B.2] Nonforest Land
2.2 [VI.B.3] Noncensus Water
2.2 [VI.B.4] Census Water
2.2 [4.2.5] Nonsampled
2.2 Nonsampled
2.3 [VI.C] Condition Class Attributes
2.3 [VI.C] Condition Class Attributes
2.4 [VI.D] Delineating Condition Classes
Differing in Condition Class Status - 1
General Condition Class Attributes
2.4.1 [Item 1] Condition Class Number
Previous Condition Class Status
Nonsampled Condition Class Attributes
[Item 4] AK Estimated Nonsampled
Landcover Type
Added clarification for lands that meet tree cover, yet are subject to
nonforest land use as likely nonforest.
Added "measurable nonforest" definition. Removed sentence stating
that all nonforest conditions are assigned a Present Nonforest Land Use.
Refined first example and added "Invasive plant protocol is completed".
Changed reference to Data Source to Sample Method Code (new data
item). Removed language regarding Wilderness Vegetation Profile.
Added language regarding Invasive Plant Protocol.
Changed procedures. Added clarification for the width of linear water
features.
Added text recognizing a difference between accessible census at
subplot center and accessible center with a census condition present.
Added ocean to list. Added clarification for the width of linear water
features.
Included more scenarios. Removed partial list of nonsampled reasons
and substituted ALL in first full paragraph.
New subsection. Removed note about not roughing-in data for
hazardous portions. Removed specific nonsampled ocean instructions.
Hid Core text for Present Nonforest Land Use in last row of chart in intro.
Added regional data items to Core list in table.
Added "AK-Remeasurement" to intro and added remeasurement
paragraph.
Removed paragraph that explained fragmenting rule. Added clarifying
text to Figure "Example of alternating strips of forested…".
Created a new subsection for data items that apply to all conditions that
are recorded as part of general chapter reorganization.
Removed reference to remeasurement instructions. Reiterated note
regarding remeasurement plots.
Added.
Added subsection.
Replaced by Estimated Nonsampled Landcover Type. Removed
"majority" from the description. Added instructions to make a plot note
when imagery is used to estimate landcover type. Changed field width to
1 digit. Removed, "valid only when Date Source is 1" from Code 1.
Changed values so only 1 - 4 are valid (removed forest type codes as
values).
Added.
Added "microplot" to description.
Appendix S: Summary of Manual Changes
Nonsampled Forest Type
2.5 [VI.E] Delineating Condition Classed
within Accessible Forest Land, 1
2.5 [VI.E] Delineating Condition Classed
Added text to clarify delineation of riparian forests.
within Accessible Forest Land, 4
Accessible forest land delineating variables Created a new subsection for data items that are delineating variables
for accessible forested conditions as part of general chapter
reorganization. Included new intro for this subsection.
2.5.1 [Item 5] Reserved Status
Added text regarding private reserved land.
2.5.1 [Item 5] Reserved Status
Changed "when collected".
2.5.2 [Item 6] Owner Group
Modified when collected to "Condition Status = 1, 2 or 5". Deleted "(or
the managing agency for public lands)". Added "if value is downloaded
check to see if correct". Added examples to what kind of owner group
differences are identifiable on the ground.
Previous Owner Group
Added.
2.5.3 [Item 7]Forest Type
Updated values - relocated Forest Type list to appendix. Changed
tolerances.
2.5.4 [Item 8] Stand Size Class
Stand Size Class changed. 2 size class difference rule eliminated.
Removed instruction for using crown cover as a surrogate for stocking.
2.5.4 [Item 8] Stand Size Class
Added "When in doubt, do not split conditions."
2.5.6 [Item 10] Tree Density
Hid words "previously defined".
pg.
214
2.5.7 [Item 11] Owner Class
2.5.7 [Item 11] Owner Class
Administrative Forest Code
2.5.8 Private Owner Industrial Status
2.5.9 [Item 12] Artificial Regeneration
Species
Age Basis Code
2.5.10 [Item 13] Stand Age
2.5.10 [Item 13] Stand Age
2.5.11 [Item 14] Disturbance
2.5.11 [Item 14] Disturbance
Historical Disturbance
Historical Disturbance Year
2.5.17 [Item 20] Treatment
2.5.17 [Item 20] Treatment
2.5.18 [Item 21]Treatment Year
Historical Treatment
Historical Treatment Year
2.5.23 [Item 26] Physiographic Class
2.5.23 [Item 26] Physiographic Class
Determining Condition Classes on
Nonforest Land
2.5.24 [Item 27] Present Nonforest Land
Use
2.5.24 [Item 27] Present Nonforest Land
Use
Modified when collected to "Condition Status = 1, 2 or 5". Deleted "(or
the managing agency for public lands)".
Modified data item text. Removed "includes Native Corporations".
Added.
Added.
Changed to 4 digits. Removed species list from table.
Added.
Changed when collected to "When Age Basis Code <60". Included
clarification for sapling only stands and whorl-counting. Added a
reference to Tree Age for regional standards for bore-able species.
Removed codes 997, 998 and 999 from having non-numeric meaning.
Added note to leave values field blank (null) if core is not counted in the
field. Added acceptable species for whorl-counting.
Added new rules for boring hardwoods.
Added instructions for when to code "00". Changed code 55 to code 95.
For codes 70 and 80, replaced Plot Notes with Condition Class Notes.
Added codes 90 - 94.
Added.
Added.
Added text "treatments must be within the last 5 years". Added additional
values. Added supplemental "office use only" column for codes.
Made an exception to size requirement for treatment codes 14 and 15.
Clarified values field to be easier to understand.
Added.
Added.
Updated notes reference to condition class notes rather than plot level
notes.
Removed AK requirement to put note on plot location record/plot card.
Added.
Added instructions for nonforest nonsampled conditions. Removed
phrase, "regardless of past condition". Incorporated "always delineate
any census water and or not in the sample" into the procedures. Added
paragraph about remeasurement plots. Changed "when collected" field
to include nonsampled nonforest conditions.
Added chaparral (code 45).
Chapter: Subplot Information
3.0 [VII] General Format of Subplot
Information
3.0 [VII] General Format of Subplot
Information
3.0 [VII] General
3.0 [V.II] Subplot Information
3.0 [VII] Subplot Information Intro
3.1 [Item 1] Subplot Number
3.2 [Item 2] Subplot Plot Status
3.2 [Item 2] Subplot Status
:
[Item 3] AK Subplot Nonsampled Reason
Previous Subplot Center Condition
Broke Seedling Data and Boundary References into separate chapters
as in Core.
Broke Invasive Plants into a separate chapter.
Changed chapter title to Subplot Information to match Core.
Added "measurable nonforest condition" criteria to all data items
measured on nonforest conditions on the Chugach National Forest.
Removed "incorrectly established or missing subplots" from intro to be
incorporated in Locating and Laying Out Standard Plots. Removed
information related to boundary data.
Added a data table.
Removed word "plot" from title.
Added code 4. Updated instructions for coding plots with subplot centers
landing in Census, noncensus, and hazardous conditions.
Dropped "AK" from title; removed Ocean code 11.
Added.
215
pg.
Subplot Center Condition Class Status
Change
3.9 Subplot Condition List
3.5 [Item 6] Microplot Center Condition
3.8 [Item 9] Snow/Water Depth
[Item 11] Subplot Notes
[VII.10] AK Vegetation Community
Description for Label
Chapter: Boundary References
Added.
Added.
When collected updated to Core (all microplots).
When Collected changed to match Core.
Updated field width to 2000 characters.
Removed from Subplot Attributes Chapter and added to Invasive Plant
Species Chapter.
4.0 [VII.X] Boundary References
Changed section title (was Subplot Mapping).
[VII.X] Boundaries on Remeasurement Plots Relocated to subsection within Reference Procedure section.
4.1 [VII.X] Reference Procedure
Moved remeasurement bullet (#4) to new subsection: Boundaries on
AK-Remeasurement Plots.
Boundaries on AK-Remeasurement Plots Added subsection. Added text to keep boundary data recorded at
previous inventory if crew is unsure about whether or not a condition
change has occurred.
Periodic to Annual Boundary Change
Added.
Chapter: Tree and Sapling Data
5.0 [VIII] General
[VIII, Sections A-D]
Definitions
Selecting Tally Trees
Conducting the Tree Tally
Tree Tracking
5.2 [Item 2] Tree Record Number
[Item 4] AK Previous Tree Status
[Item 5] PNW Present Tree Status
5.8 [Item 10] Species
[Item 11] AK Previous Azimuth
5.4 [Item 12] Azimuth
Appendix S: Summary of Manual Changes
[Item 8] AK Reconcile
[Item 9] AK Previous Species
5.8 [Item 10] Species
Added "measurable nonforest condition" criteria for the Chugach
National Forest. Updated all horizontal distance references to include
plot radius (from "less than plot radius" to "less than or equal to plot
radius") when referring to limiting distance. Added info about
downloaded trees from the periodic inventory.
Removed text in bullets and incorporated new sections: Definitions;
Selecting Tally Trees; Conducting the Tree Tally.
Added.
Added.
Added.
Added section.
Modified text for AK-Remeasurement plots. Removed reference to paint
sticks in national forest wilderness.
Dropped "AK" from title. Added text: "Add Previous Tree Status if null
and tree was not tallied at the previous inventory because of a definition
or procedural change (RECONCILE=10)".
Deleted "PNW" from title. Included witness-only trees/stumps/objects in
data item text. Dropped Code "N" (No Tally). Added example of "natural
causes" to code 0. Added Regional text to code 2. Modified procedures
for recording stumps as a witness; added "Code 7 - Witness Stump".
Renamed Code 6 to "Moved".
Dropped (see Species).
Removed unknown species codes 299 and 998 from list of acceptable
codes. Modified text about when to correct Species to include all
previously tallied trees with an incorrect species recorded (including
Present Tree Status=0). Changed When Collected field to "All trees
(Present Tree Status = 0-8)".
Added text about Previous Species being downloaded into the [current]
Species field, including instructions for updating the previously recorded
Species if it was incorrect.
Dropped (see Azimuth). Relocated NOTE about Azimuth/Horizontal
Distance on remeasurement plots to Azimuth/Horizontal Distance data
items.
Added text about Previous Azimuth being downloaded into the [current]
azimuth field on remeasurement/AK-Remeasurement plots. Added text
about taking new Azimuth for trees on the subplot that shrink to become
saplings on the microplot. Added +/-4 degree tolerance for witness-only
trees/objects.
pg.
216
Dropped (see Horizontal Distance).
Added text about previous Horizontal Distance being downloaded into
the [current] Horizontal Distance field on revisited plots. Added text
about taking new Horizontal Distance for trees on the subplot that shrink
to become saplings on the microplot.
[Item 15] Slope Distance to Witness Trees Added text and When Collected criteria for AK-Remeasurement plots.
Changed field width to 4 digits.
5.9 Diameter
Added section.
Marking Current Diameter
Added subsection. Added text for marking diameter on saplings < 3.0
inches DBH. Added guidelines for re-locating diameter nail on dead
trees if the previous placement of the nail was out of tolerance, including
reference to procedure for estimating new Previous DBH, if updated.
Dropped Regional text instructing crews to record missed fork as new
[Item 17] Marking Current Diameter:
Remeasurement of forked trees
tree; adopted Core procedure for recording/reconciling a forked tree that
was recorded as one tree, but should have been recorded as two.
Clarified instructions for placing nails in trees >32.0 inches.
Diameter on Stump
Added subsection, listed Diameter of a Stump rules.
[Item 17] Diameter at Breast Height:
Removed bullet from Diameter data item, relocated to Special Diameter
Diameter on Stump
Situations.
5.9.1 [Item 16] Previous Diameter at Breast Added procedure for updating/estimating new Previous Diameter when
Height
DBH recorded during the periodic inventory appears to be incorrect.
Added PNW Plot Kind = 3 to When Collected table. Modified field width.
5.9.2 [Item 17] Diameter at Breast Height
Added witness stumps to When Collected text.
Snag Estimated Diameter
Added.
5.12 [Item 18] Diameter Check
Added clarification: "Do not remove moss, lichens, or vines." Modified
text for codes 1 and 2. Added column (for office use only) to When
Collected table to cross-walk regional codes into NIMS.
5.12 [Item 18] Diameter Check
Added text to code 0. Added codes 5, 6, & 7.
Tree Growth
Added section.
[Item 19] 10-year Increment
Modified text to identify which hardwoods to bore. Modified When
Collected field. Added text about where to bore trees.
Previous Total Length
Added.
5.14 [7.8.2.2] Total Length
Added text/diagram for measuring leaning trees.
5.14 [Item 23] Total Length
Added text about not adding length for crooks and sweeps.
[Item 22] Previous Actual Length [PNW
Renamed "Previous Actual Length". Modified data item to be editable by
Previous Length]
field crew. Added guidelines for when to correct previous data.
5.15 [Item 20] Actual Length
Recorded for all trees. Modified tolerances. Changed minimum Value to
001. Added text about not adding length for crooks and sweeps.
5.16 [Item 21] Length Method
Adopted Core Values (1,2,3) and dropped B, A, N.
[Item 21] AK Length Method
Dropped "AK" from data item title.
Previous Length Method
Added.
5.17 [Item 25] Crown Class
Added "Examples of Crown Class" diagram. Added text about social
position, including example.
5.19 [Item 24] Compacted Crown Ratio
Modified Compacted Crown Ratio Examples diagram.
Tree Damage
Added section title (for rough cull data item).
5.13 [Item 26] Rotten/Missing cull
Added volume table. Modified when collected to collect missing cull for
dead trees only. Modified indicators of bole rot. Added clarifying text for
determining missing cull on snags.
Miscellaneous Tree Measured Data Items Added section.
[Item 27] (AK) Tree Class
Dropped "AK" pre-fix from title. Dropped codes 5 and 6.
[Item 29] [AK] Mortality Year
Modified data item title. Dropped PNW Plot Kind=1 and Reconcile=1
from When Collected criteria. Modified values to begin with year 1995
(beginning of Coastal periodic inventory).
5.21 [Item 30] [AK] Cause of Death
Dropped "AK" from title. Relocated to follow Mortality Year (Core order
for SK=2 data items). Modified When Collected field: recorded on AKRemeasurement plots only. Added six new PNW codes (51, 52, 53, 54,
55, & 71). Dropped PNW Plot Kind=1 and Reconcile=1 from When
Collected criteria.
:
[Item 13] AK Previous Horizontal Distance
5.5 [Item 14] Horizontal Distance
217
pg.
5.23 [Item 28] Decay Class
5.23 [Item 28] Decay Class
Snag Reason for Disappearance
Culturally Killed
Chapter: Seedling Data
6.2 [Item 2] Species
6.3 [Item 3] Condition Class Number
6.4 [Item 4] Seedling Count
6.4 [Item 4] Seedling Count
Added text to clarify what to do when snag has characteristics of more
than one decay class stage. Modified Values field to "1-5".
Relocated in manual to follow Mortality Year (Core order).
Added.
Added.
Removed species list, updated field width to 3 digits.
Added a data table to data item Condition Class Number.
Modified bullet about measuring seedling length to "Measure seedling
length, not “height”. Length is measured along the main stem from
ground level to the dominant apical leader". Added to When Collected:
"or measurable nonforest land".
Added clarifying text: "Count all live seedlings, regardless of substrate
(e.g. suspended logs) or life expectancy."
Chapter: Site Tree Information
7.0 General
7.0 General
General
Added entire chapter, including special protocol for Chugach National
Forest.
Chapter: Invasive Plants Protocol
VII-X General
[Item 1] Subplot Number
Added separate chapter for Invasive Plants (relocated from Subplot
Information chapter). Dropped "AK" from all data item titles. Clarified that
specimens are only required to be collected on remote plots for known
plants.
Changed when collected criteria.
Appendix S: Summary of Manual Changes
Entire chapter revised and re-organized. Dropped "AK" from all titles.
Added database codes to all data items. Updated all language to define
tree age at breast height.
Overview
Section added.
7.0 [IX] General Instructions
Expanded section; added significant text.
7.1 [IX] Selection Criteria
Deleted section; incorporated section into General Instructions.
Changed minimum acceptable age of site trees to "15". Added Primary
Selection Method, includes tolerances on index range. Revised list of
appropriate site tree species to include paper birch, balsam poplar,
quaking aspen, and black cottonwood. Moved "Do not select aspen,
birch or cottonwood…" to Site Tree Selection.
Plots With Site Trees Collected on Previous Subsection added.
Visits
Primary Selection Method
Subsection added.
Site Tree Selection Hierarchy
Section added.
[IX] Alaska Age Tree Selection
Section expanded; includes Determining Breast Height Age of Trees,
and Age Determination Method (relocated from Tree Age at Diameter
data item).
[Item 4] AK Site/Age Tree Type
Relocated to appear after Questionable Site Tree Flag.
7.2.1 [Item 6] Condition Class List
Adopted Core Values 1000 to 9876.
[Item 7] AK Tally Tree Number
Changed name to Tree Record Number.
7.2.4 [Item 12] Site Tree Length
Updated Site Tree Length tolerances to match those from tree tally.
[Item 13] Tree Age at Diameter
Relocated Determining Breast Height Age of Large Trees to new section
(Alaska Age Tree Selection).
Number of Rings
Added.
Number of Rings in Inner 2 Inches
Added.
Length of Measured Core
Added.
Site Index
Added.
Site Index Equation Base Age
Added.
Site Index Equation Number
Added.
Chapter: Vegetation Profile
pg.
218
[Item 3] Percent Cover
[Item 5] Specimen Officially Collected
[Item 7] Specimen Not Officially Collected
Reason Code
[Subplot, Item 10] Vegetation Community
Description for Specimen Label
[VII-X] Voucher Specimen Collected
Renamed Species Canopy Cover. Modified tolerance categories.
Relocated to follow Unique Species Number.
Renamed Invasive Specimen Collected.
Renamed Invasive Specimen Not Collected Reason.
Added; relocated from Subplot Information section.
Added section; renamed Unknown Invasive Plants and Specimen
Collection
Chapter: Coordinates (GPS)
[Chapter X] Coordinates (GPS)
Chapter: Laser 200 Instructions
Dropped; replaced by GPS Operating Guide appendix.
[Chapter XI] Laser 200 Instructions
Moved to appendix (general editing updates only).
Appendix: Historical Inventory Information
Historical Inventory Information
Appendix: Reference Information
Added appendix.
Reference Information
Added; includes metric equivalents and aids (deleted basal area factor
information from table), and slope correction table.
Appendix: Forest Type Codes
Core Appendix 2: Forest Type Codes
Added (forest type codes removed from Condition Class, Item 7: Forest
Type).
Appendix: Tree Species List
Core Appendix 3: Tree Species List
Added appendix (relocated Tree Species List from species data item in
the Tree chapter [Chapter VII, Item 10]).
Appendix: Tree Coding Guide
Core Appendix 8: Tree Coding Guide for
Added.
Reconcile
Appendix: Site Index Equation Numbers
Site Index Equation Numbers
Appendix: Invasive Species Lists
Added.
Invasive Species Lists
Added.
Appendix: Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
[Appendix 4] Determination of Stocking
General editing updates only.
Values for Land Use Classification
Appendix: Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Appendix: GPS Operating Guide
Added.
GPS Operating Guide
Added (replaces Coordinates chapter). Previous material rewritten and
reorganized: all protocol removed from appendix (it is covered in the
Coordinates section of Plot Level Data chapter), and general editing.
:
Appendix: Laser Operating Guide
Laser Operating Guide
Appendix: Safety
Added (replaces Laser 200 Instructions chapter).
Safety
Appendix: Plot Jacket
Added.
Plot Jacket
Added.
219
pg.
Appendix: Plot Forms (Formerly: Forms)
[Appendix 7] Forms
Throughout appendix
Invasive Plants
Boundary Data
Plot Card
[Appendix 7] Plot Card
Appendix: Radio Information
[Appendix 1] Radio Information
Renamed Plot Forms.
Renamed sections (forms) to match new names for their respective
chapters/sections/subsections; added/deleted data items within forms to
match current field collected data items.
Added section (form).
Added section (form).
Added back side of plot card.
Updated names.
Restructured appendix: moved blank information forms to end of
chapter; moved both radio repeater maps to follow radio channel groups;
reformatted channel group tables; added Channel Group 9 - Cordova
Area.
Appendix: Important Phone Numbers
Important Phone Numbers
Added appendix (information relocated from Safety chapter). Updated
with current information.
Appendix: Glossary
Added terms
Added terms
Modified terms
Deleted terms
Definition changed, Core is not correct
Appendix: Cubic Foot Volume Table
Accessible, aspect, basal area, baseline, board foot, botched plot,
compaction (soil), corporate land, crook, declination, defoliation,
disturbance, FDM, Forest Service administered lands, forked tree,
graminoid, hazardous, inspector, krummholz, new installation,
nonstocked, ownership, PDR, plot card, plurality, reference plot (off
grid), slope, snag, standing dead tree.
AK-Remeasurement, improved road, industrial wood, merchantable top.
Actual length, agricultural land, blind check, Census water, diameter at
breast height (DBH), forest industry land, forest type, hardwoods, marsh,
microplot, nonforest land, other federal lands, owner class, owner group,
stand density (renamed to tree density), stand size, training (practice)
plot.
Forest trees, inspection crew, maintained road, national forest land.
Condition class.
[Appendix 6] Cubic Foot Volume Table
Dropped; relocated to Tree and Sapling Data chapter.
Appendix: Changes from Core Phase 2 Field Guide Version 3.0 to 4.0
[Pre Chapter 1] Summary of Manual
Changes from 2009
Updated with changes for 2010.
Appendix S: Summary of Manual Changes
Changes from Core Phase 2 Field Guide
Added.
Version 3.0 to 4.0
Appendix: Summary of Manual Changes
pg.
220
EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST:
Item:
Number:
Item:
Number:
laser
GPS
FM radio
Allegro
shotgun
▪ shotgun ammunition
satellite phone
cell phone
folding saw
bivi bag
plot folder
▪ photo set
▪ plot card
stereoscope
square witness tags
round witness tags
white plot pins
yellow plot pins
flagging
first aid kit
calculator
extra batteries
clam shell with batteries
compass
clinometer
loggers tape
D-tape
1 or 2
1
1
1
1
10 to 20 slugs
1
1
1 per person
1 or 2 per crew
1
1
1
1
7+
12+
4+
4+
1
1
1
9+
1
1
1
1
1
capenters tape
field manual
100-foot tape
increment borer
hatchet
nails
tree crayon
tatum
protractor (photo scale)
plot forms
pin for pinprick
pencil
Sharpie fine point marker
cruiser’s vest
nail puller
increment core straws
Rite-in-the-Rain notebook
reflector
hand lens
ruler with 1/10 and 1/20 scale
insect repellant
head net
gear belt
lunch
hard hat
water
1
1
1
1
1
a whole bunch
1
1
1
1 of each
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2+ bottles
Flight personal protective equipment (PPE)*
▪ Nomex flight suit
▪ Nomex flight vest
▪ Nomex gloves
▪ leather or rubber boots (8 inches or taller)
▪ safety glasses
▪ ear plugs
:
*No synthetic clothing
221
pg.
APPENDIX T 2010 MANUAL ERRATA
Field Instructions for the Annual Inventory of Coastal Alaska
(2010 AFSL manual)
(2010 manual section/subsection/item numbers are listed)
Tree and Sapling Data
8.8.1.1 Tree Class: Code 3
8.8.1.1 Tree Class: Code 4
8.8.2.1 Cause of Death
8.8.2.2 Mortality Year
Add the following text to code 3 (rough cull): “....A dead tree, 5.0 inches DBH or larger,
that has a DECAY CLASS = 1.”
Add the following text to code 4 (rotten cull): “....A dead tree, 5.0 inches DBH or larger,
that has a DECAY CLASS > 1.
Update when collected to: “When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all PREVIOUS TREE
STATUS = 1 and PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 or 3; or PRESENT TREE STATUS =
2 and RECONCILE = 1, 2, or 3; or PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE
STATUS = 2, and RECONCILE = 10”
Update when collected to: “When PNW PLOT KIND = 2 or 3: all PREVIOUS TREE
STATUS = 1 and PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 or 3; or PRESENT TREE STATUS =
2 and RECONCILE = 1, 2, or 3; or PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE
STATUS = 2, and RECONCILE = 10”
Site Tree Information
10.5.1.3 Site Tree Status
10.5.1.4 Questionable Site
Tree Flag
10.5.1.5 Site/Age Tree Type
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1 and
CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1: all site trees”.
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O”.
When collected field should read: “When SITE TREE STATUS = O: all site/age trees”
10.5.1.6 Condition Class List
11.1.1.2 Species Growth Habit Add to the end of when collected field: “Species combined into lifeform groups are not
assigned a growth habit code.”
Tree Species List
Species 0920
Add species to list:
0920, SALIX, willow spp., Salix spp. (note: this is no longer a valid tree species in the
PNW region; it is included so previously recorded tree/witnesses can be identified and
reconciled accordingly)
Appendix T: 2010 Manual Errata
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1 and
CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1: all site trees”.
10.5.1.7 Tree Record Number When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O: all site trees”.
10.5.1.8 Azimuth
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O: all site trees”.
10.5.1.9 Horizontal Distance When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O: all site trees”.
10.5.1.10 Species
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O: all site trees”.
10.5.1.11 Diameter
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O: all site trees”.
10.5.1.12 Site Tree Length
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O: all site trees”.
10.5.1.13 Tree Age at
When collected field should read: “When SAMPLE METHOD CODE = 1, CONDITION
Diameter
CLASS STATUS = 1, and SITE TREE STATUS = N or O: all site trees”.
Vegetation Profile